initial commit of ebook 38748HEADmain

1 files changed, 8922 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/38748.txt b/38748.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..31860ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38748.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8922 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898, Volume
+29 of 55, by Various
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898, Volume 29 of 55
+       Explorations by Early Navigators, Descriptions of the
+       Islands and Their Peoples, Their History and Records of
+       the Catholic Missions, as Related in Contemporaneous Books
+       and Manuscripts, Showing the Political, Economic, Commercial
+       and Religious Conditions of Those Islands from Their
+       Earliest Relations with European Nations to the Close of
+       the Nineteenth Century
+
+Author: Various
+
+Editor: Emma Helen Blair
+        James Alexander Robertson
+
+Release Date: February 1, 2012 [EBook #38748]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PHILIPPINE IS., 1493-1898, VOL 29 ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net/ for Project
+Gutenberg.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                   The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898
+
+   Explorations by early navigators, descriptions of the islands and
+   their peoples, their history and records of the catholic missions,
+    as related in contemporaneous books and manuscripts, showing the
+   political, economic, commercial and religious conditions of those
+   islands from their earliest relations with European nations to the
+                    close of the nineteenth century,
+
+                          Volume XXIX, 1638-40
+
+
+
+ Edited and annotated by Emma Helen Blair and James Alexander Robertson
+  with historical introduction and additional notes by Edward Gaylord
+                                Bourne.
+
+
+                      The Arthur H. Clark Company
+                            Cleveland, Ohio
+                                  MCMV
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS OF VOLUME XXIX
+
+
+    Preface                                                            9
+
+    Documents of 1638
+
+        Events in the Filipinas, 1637-38. [Unsigned; probably
+        written by Juan Lopez, S.J., at Cavite, in July, 1638.]       23
+
+        Letter to Felipe IV. Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera;
+        Manila, August 21.                                            50
+
+        Letter to Felipe IV, from the treasurer at
+        Manila. Baltasar Ruiz de Escalona; Manila, August 31.         52
+
+        Relation of the Filipinas Islands. Hieronimo
+        de Banuelos y Carrillo; Mexico, 1638.                         66
+
+        Glorious victories against the Moros of Mindanao. Diego
+        de Bobadilla, S.J., and others; Mexico, 1638.                 86
+
+        Royal orders and decrees, 1638. Felipe IV; Madrid, March
+        15, and September-December.                                  102
+
+        Fortunate successes in Filipinas and Terrenate,
+        1636-37. [Unsigned; published in Madrid, 1639.]              116
+
+        Value of Corcuera's seizures in Jolo. [Unsigned and
+        undated; probably 1638.]                                     135
+
+    Documents of 1639-1640
+
+        Events in the Philipinas from the year 1638 to that of
+        1639. [Unsigned; probably Juan Lopez, at Cavite, 1639.]      141
+
+        Letters to the Holy Misericordia. Sebastian Hurtado de
+        Corcuera; Manila, December 4, 1637, and October 26, 1639.    172
+
+        The university of Santo Tomas. Felipe IV; Madrid,
+        November 9, 1639.                                            175
+
+        Royal orders and decrees. Felipe IV; Madrid, 1639.           178
+
+        Events in the Filipinas Islands from August, 1639,
+        to August, 1640. [Juan Lopez?]; Cavite, August, 1640.        194
+
+        Relation of the insurrection of the Chinese. [Unsigned
+        and undated; probably in March, 1640.]                       208
+
+        Ecclesiastical and Augustinian affairs, 1630-40. Casimiro
+        Diaz; Manila [1718?]. [From his Conquistas.]                 259
+
+        Relation of the Filipinas Islands. [Diego de Bobadilla,
+        S.J.; 1640.]                                                 277
+
+    Bibliographical Data.                                            313
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+    View of city of Manila; photographic facsimile of engraving in
+    Mallet's Description de l'univers (Paris, 1683), ii, p. 127;
+    from copy in the Library of Congress.                             67
+
+    View of one of Ladrones Islands; photographic facsimile of
+    engraving in Hulsius's Eigentliche und wahrhaftige Beschreibung
+    (Franckfurt am Mayne, M.DC.XX), p. 66; from copy in library of
+    Harvard University.                                              169
+
+    Portus Acapulco (view of harbor of Acapulco, Mexico);
+    photographic facsimile of engraving in Arnoldus Montanus's
+    Nieuwe en onbekende Weereld (Amsterdam, 1671), p. 246; from
+    copy in library of Harvard University.                           188
+
+    Archipelagus orientalis, sive Asiaticus (Eastern or Asiatic
+    archipelago); photographic facsimile of map by Joannis Blaeu
+    (Amsterdam, 1659); from original map in Bibliotheque Nationale,
+    Paris.                                                           279
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE
+
+
+The present volume (1638-40) is largely occupied with the annals
+of those years, and the hostilities of the Moro pirates. This
+period is a troublous one; "wars and rumors of wars," conspiracies
+(among both Chinese and natives), storms, shipwrecks, and disease,
+disquiet the colony. The Chinese revolt of 1639 is described at
+length. Corcuera administers the government with a high hand, and
+arouses many enmities. Two interesting descriptions of the islands
+are furnished, by a Spanish officer and by a Jesuit.
+
+The Jesuit annalist at Manila contributes (1638) the news of the past
+year--apparently the contents of his note-book or diary, as written
+therein at each occurrence or arrival, and free from the "improvements"
+of any official editor, in which fact lies its especial value. This
+document strongly resembles in this respect, and in its scope, the
+famous Journal des Jesuites of Quebec. To some extent, the same remarks
+are true of all the annals written, actually or presumably, by Juan
+Lopez; but the present document is unusually fresh and primitive in
+style. He relates the depredations committed by the Dutch on Spanish
+and Portuguese commerce, especially about the strait of Malaca. The
+Dominican faction of "Barbones" has been suppressed. The Chinese
+at Manila present a large sum of money to Corcuera, with which
+a gift for the king is purchased. Information is given regarding
+several priests and other persons. The settlement at Formosa is
+being abandoned, and the missionaries there are going to China. The
+Camucones have attempted to raid the Visayas, but are repulsed by
+the Indians and Spaniards. The Jesuit Mastrilli has been martyred in
+Japan, and funeral honors are paid to him in Manila. Corcuera has
+gone to punish the Joloans. The Jesuit church at Cavite, and that
+of the Dominicans at Manila, have been entered by thieves. There
+are a few slight encounters with the Dutch. In China, persecutions
+of the Christians have begun, due largely to the imprudence of the
+friars. The missions in Siam and adjoining countries are endangered
+by the machinations of the Dutch. The Joloan stronghold is captured
+by Corcuera; two of his best officers are sent home to regain their
+health, but are slain by their Chinese crew. Jesuits are conducting a
+successful mission in the island of Hainan. The Japanese are growing
+weary of their persecutions against the Christians; only three
+Jesuits are left there of all the missionaries and nothing certain
+is known of these. Corcuera arrives at Manila on May 23; he brings
+back many captives, of whom a considerable number died en route, but
+"it is a cause of great consolation that no Moro has died without
+baptism." A triumphant entry is made into Manila by the victorious
+army. In Mindanao Moncay is killed, and Corralat is no longer aided
+by the Ternatans; the Moros generally are in wholesome fear of the
+Spanish power. The missions in China are doing well, and are aided
+by the emperor. Lopez notes many little items of news, of all sorts,
+about matters civil, ecclesiastical, and foreign, with various gossip,
+some of the cloister, some of his seaport.
+
+A short letter from Corcuera to the king (August 21, 1638) states that
+he has appointed Luis Arias de Mora "protector of the Sangleys;"
+this man (a lawyer) also acts as counselor for the archbishop,
+exercising a wholesome restraint upon that prelate.
+
+A letter from the royal treasurer at Manila to the king (August 31,
+1638) laments the injuries and losses caused to the royal estate
+by Corcuera's reckless and extravagant management. He is blamed for
+refusing to send the trading ships to Mexico, for establishing a force
+for the nightly patrol of the city, for forming several companies of
+Indian soldiers, for paying certain salaries which are claimed to be
+needless, and for building a church for the soldiers. Escalona declares
+that the trade of the islands with Mexico is neglected and unregulated,
+and thus the colonists are being financially ruined. He asserts that
+the expeditions against Mindanao and Jolo had cost much unnecessary
+expenditure of both money and lives; and that Corcuera has attempted
+to cover up these expenses under specious pretexts. The treasurer
+complains that the governor has spent too much on the royal hospital,
+and has interfered with the duties and rights of the royal officials;
+and entreats the king to see that he is restrained within due bounds.
+
+An interesting description of the Philippine Islands is furnished
+(Mexico, 1638) by a Spanish admiral, Hieronimo de Banuelos y Carrillo;
+it is addressed to the president of the Council of the Indias; the
+original is, so far as known, no longer extant, and it is found only
+in the French version by Thevenot. Banuelos finds life in Manila
+"altogether delightful," as it has abundance of all supplies and
+comforts. He describes the Parian, and praises the ability of the
+Chinese; but he asserts that they are injuring the islands by their
+illicit connection with the Mexican trade. The condition and character
+of that trade are here presented, in a description very different
+from that furnished by Grau y Monfalcon. This writer objects to the
+silk trade between Filipinas and Nueva Espana, which only benefits
+the Chinese, the Portuguese of Macao, and the Mexicans. Moreover,
+"the encomiendas are ruined," while the natives are not instructed in
+religion, and are hostile to the Spaniards. The Malays of Ternate and
+other outlying islands are in league with the Dutch, and the trade
+with them is going to ruin. Banuelos proposes a new plan for the
+Filipinas commerce; he would (still limiting its amount) restrict
+it mainly to raw silk and cotton, which could be manufactured in
+Mexico; he enumerates the advantages that would result from this
+course. The Japanese trade need not be considered in this question,
+as it is closed to the Spaniards on account of religious persecution;
+of this last and its effects Banuelos gives some account. He again
+urges that the trade in Chinese stuffs be suppressed; and makes
+recommendations as to the manner in which it should be conducted,
+describing various abuses and scandals which he has discovered therein.
+
+The Jesuit Bobadilla published (Mexico, 1638) a "Relation of the
+glorious victories ... against the Mahometan Moros;" it contains
+Mastrilli's letter of June 2, 1637 (published in VOL. XXVII of this
+series), and other matter obtained from letters which the editor had
+received from Manila; we present here such part as is new. Bobadilla
+prefaced this compilation by a short address to Governor Corcuera's
+brother Inigo (a military officer in Mexico), in which he takes
+occasion to eulogize the virtues of both in glowing terms. The first
+section of the book is occupied by a relation (here only briefly
+outlined) of the miraculous cure wrought upon Father Mastrilli, and his
+entrance into missionary work; then follows "an account of the great
+island of Mindanao," partly descriptive and partly historical. The
+piratical raids of the Mindanaos upon the Spanish settlements and the
+Visayan coasts are briefly recounted, with mention of the establishment
+of Spanish missions and forts in Mindanao; also the raids made by the
+Camucones, Joloans, and Borneans. Then follow a description of the
+naval battle at Punta de Flechas, Mastrilli's letter describing the
+Mindanao campaign, and Lopez's account of Corcuera's triumph--all of
+which we have previously published.
+
+Various royal orders and decrees issued in 1638 are here
+presented. Corcuera is warned (March 15) to proceed cautiously in
+regard to the free negroes whom he has removed from the city, and to
+obtain royal permission henceforth for any important measures that
+he may contemplate. A decree of September 2 imposes restrictions
+on the religious orders in the islands, and permits the governor to
+use secular priests as missionaries. The king orders him (October 2)
+to appoint to new missions native secular priests instead of friars;
+also to treat the nuns of St. Clare with more consideration, and
+to pay them for certain inconveniences that he has caused them. He
+is authorized (November 8) to take such measures as are necessary to
+maintain the seclusion of the inmates of Santa Potenciana. The viceroy
+and Audiencia of Mexico are ordered (December 8) to report whether it
+will be best to increase the amount of trade allowed to the citizens
+of Filipinas with Nueva Espana; and other decrees of the same date
+give the officers of the galleons authority to punish any infractions
+of law committed by their men while in port, and require stricter
+enforcement of the regulations in regard to lading those vessels.
+
+A printed pamphlet, "Fortunate successes in Filipinas and Terrenate"
+(Madrid, 1639), gives a brief outline of the Moro raids into the
+Philippines during several years, and Corcuera's successful campaign
+against those pirates; it is evidently written by a Jesuit, or largely
+compiled from Mastrilli's letter. At the end is a description of the
+encounter between Spanish and English ships at Malayo. We append a
+short document enumerating the spoils seized in the Jolo campaign by
+the Spanish forces, with the value assigned to each item; the expenses
+of the expedition are covered thereby mainly by the proceeds from
+the sale of Moro captives.
+
+"Events in the Philipinas during the year 1638-39" are recorded, as
+before, by a Jesuit, presumably Juan Lopez. The news from Mindanao
+and Jolo is not encouraging; the Moros are revolting, and in Jolo a
+plague and epidemic is feared; besides, the commandant there has proved
+unfit. A letter from the Jesuit Gutierrez relates events in Mindanao;
+these relate mainly to the measures taken by the Spanish commandant
+to control and pacify the disaffected Moros. Spanish friars exiled
+from China have arrived in Formosa, but hope to reenter China. The
+Jesuits of Macao also indulge the hope of gaining foothold anew in
+Japan. The writer gives various interesting news items about the
+arrival and departure of the ships at the port of Cavite; and the
+escape, on several occasions, of Moro captives held at Manila, and
+the recapture of many of them. A letter from Father Alejandro Lopez
+describes the attempt of the men of Jolo to recapture by treachery
+their stronghold from the Spaniards, and the severe punishment
+inflicted by Pedro de Almonte upon the rebels. Chinese pirates commit
+depredations on the Luzon coasts; and plots of the resident Chinese
+against the Spaniards are discovered and punished. A revolt by the
+Indians of Nueva Segovia is also quelled. Recent news from Mindanao
+and Jolo tells of increasing Spanish ascendency, but at a fearful
+cost to the Moro natives--slaughtered people, devastated lands, and
+consequent deaths by famine. One of the trading ships to Mexico has
+been wrecked, which is a great blow to the colony. A fierce hurricane
+causes great damage at Cavite and in its vicinity; and there have been
+epidemics of disease in Luzon, in which many persons have died. It
+is feared that both of the Acapulco galleons have been lost at sea;
+and all these things fill the people with sadness. The small remnant
+of the crew of a Spanish galleon wrecked the preceding year among
+the Ladrones Islands arrive at Manila.
+
+Letters from Corcuera to the confraternity of Santa Misericordia
+ask (December 4, 1637) their prayers for the success of his Jolo
+expedition; and (October 26, 1639) that they will take into their house
+two Moro hostages, to train them in the Christian doctrine. Letters
+from Felipe IV to Rome (November 9, 1639) ask that the college of
+Santo Tomas at Manila be erected into a university.
+
+A group of royal decrees issued during 1639 is presented. The
+governor's action in stationing religious ministers in Mindanao
+is approved. The municipal authorities of Manila are ordered to
+retain Grau y Monfalcon as their agent at the royal court. The
+newly-appointed governor of the islands, Diego Fajardo, is ordered to
+correct (but with mildness and prudence) the Augustinians in trading
+and in oppressing the Indians; and to restore to the secular priests
+Quiapo and other districts assigned to the Jesuits by Corcuera. The
+bishop of Camarines is ordered to return to his diocese, and the royal
+officials to withhold his salary until he shall do so. Directions
+are given to the viceroy of Nueva Espana regarding the inspection
+of Philippine vessels at Acapulco, and the necessity of sending more
+colonists to the islands. Answer is made to various points in a former
+letter from the archbishop; and the Audiencia are commanded to treat
+the Indians more justly.
+
+Events in the Filipinas Islands from August to November, 1639, are
+recorded by the Jesuit annalist of former years (presumably Juan
+Lopez). The arrivals and departures of ships form the chief of these
+events, and the writer furnishes much interesting news in connection
+with them. A fierce storm delays the galleon to Nueva Espana, and
+wrecks two Chinese junks, drowning many of their men. The two Acapulco
+galleons arrive, about this time, at Nueva Segovia, and are wrecked in
+that port, with much loss of life. The recent conquest of Jolo is being
+completed. The king of Macasar is friendly, and has sent provisions
+to the Portuguese colony at Malaca. A Dutch squadron sent against
+the city of Goa has been almost destroyed by the Portuguese. The
+people of Tidore and Ternate are leagued together, which causes the
+Spaniards to fear a revolt against their control. The Moro chiefs
+in Mindanao are plotting together against the Spaniards. Nearly
+half of this document is occupied with an account of the Chinese
+insurrection late in November, 1639; it is soon quelled, with the
+slaughter of many Sangleys. A detailed account of this episode,
+presumably the one mentioned in the last note on Lopez's record, is
+here presented; it is a valuable if not altogether edifying document,
+especially for its revelations of human nature. Lopez's statement that
+the revolt was soon over was premature; it lasted nearly four months,
+and caused great loss of property to the Spaniards, and of lives to the
+insurgents. Most of the Chinese population in Luzon was exterminated,
+thanks to their lack of cannon and firearms and "the special protection
+of our Lord over our army," which lost not even fifty men. It is a
+sickening record of slaughter--not only in so-called battle, but in
+the cold-blooded, deliberate, and systematic butchery of unarmed men,
+taken by surprise or lured by treacherous promises. The most striking
+instance of this is the cruel slaughter, caused by a blind and panic
+fear, of the house-servants and other Chinese in Manila; another is the
+burning of the Parian, with all the rich merchandise stored therein;
+while in Cavite several hundred Chinese are deliberately taken out
+by tens and beheaded. In both cases, however, opportunity is kindly
+provided for the wretched victims to receive baptisms, if they were
+infidels, or to make their confessions, if Christians. Peace is finally
+made with the small remnant of the insurgent force, who are taken to
+Manila and carefully guarded within a stockade. The writer describes
+their method of warfare; and enumerates the villages burned by them,
+and other damages committed, during the revolt.
+
+The history of the Augustinian order in the Philippines, presented in
+VOLS. XXIII and XXIV of this series from Medina's Historia, is here
+continued for the decade 1630-40 by an extract from Diaz's Conquistas
+(written about 1718), partly in synopsis and partly in translation. He
+relates the contest over the vacant see of Manila, finally settled
+(1630) in favor of Fray Pedro de Arce; the election of Geronimo de
+Medrano as provincial in 1632; the persecutions in Japan, the lives
+of martyrs there, the controversy between Corcuera and the bishop,
+biographies of noted Augustinians, and various secular matters (all
+of which we omit). There is an interesting relation of the life and
+labors of a useful missionary, Alonso de Mentrida, among the Indians
+in Panay Island; he wages unceasing war against the devil and his
+agents, the native priests of idols--the former often appearing in
+visible and hideous form. A similar account is given of the life
+of Juan de Medina (above cited). In 1638 Fray Martin Errasti is
+elected provincial. The Visayas Islands have been, of late years,
+harassed by the Moro pirates; but a notable expedition is undertaken
+(1639) against those of the Lake Lanao region, in which the Recollect
+missionary known as "Padre Capitan" is a prominent figure. For the
+time, those Moros are awed and warned. Diaz recounts the main events
+of that time--Corcuera's expedition to Jolo and the insurrection of
+the Chinese. Errasti dies in 1639, and his vacant office is assumed
+by Fray Juan Ramirez, the past provincial.
+
+In 1640 the Jesuit Bobadilla writes a description of the Philippines
+and their people. The former is but a brief outline; most of the
+document is devoted to the Indian natives, and the natural products of
+the islands. The father writes of the custom of slavery among them;
+their religious beliefs, customs, and superstitions; the practices
+of their priests; their physical appearance, and dress; their customs
+of tattooing, filing the teeth, and bathing; their language, writing,
+and music. He describes their marriages, houses, occupations, boats,
+and weapons; and their medical practice and mortuary customs. Then he
+considers the climate of the islands, the culture and uses of rice,
+and the natural products--animals, minerals, and fruits, especially
+the palm and bamboo. He describes the buyo, so commonly used there;
+also various peculiar animals. Bobadilla then mentions the manner in
+which the Spanish colony is governed; their garrisons in the islands;
+and the bishoprics therein. He describes briefly the city of Manila,
+the trade of Filipinas, the relations of the Spaniards with the
+Chinese and other peoples, and the voyage between Manila and Acapulco.
+
+
+    The Editors
+        July, 1905.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DOCUMENTS OF 1638
+
+
+    Events in the Filipinas, 1637-38. [Unsigned; probably written by
+    Juan Lopez, S.J., in July, 1638.]
+    Letter to Felipe IV. Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera; August 21.
+    Letter to Felipe IV, from the treasurer at Manila. Baltasar Ruiz
+    de Escalona; August 31.
+    Relation of the Filipinas Islands. Hieronimo de Banuelos y
+    Carrillo; 1638.
+    Glorious victories against the Moros of Mindanao. Diego de
+    Bobadilla, S.J., and others; 1638.
+    Royal orders and decrees, 1638. Felipe IV; March 15, and
+    September-December.
+    Fortunate successes in Filipinas and Terrenate, 1636-37.
+    [Unsigned; published in 1639.]
+    Value of Corcuera's seizures in Jolo. [Unsigned and undated;
+    probably 1638.]
+
+
+
+Sources: The first and seventh of these documents are obtained from
+MSS. in the Academia Real de la Historia, Madrid; the second and third,
+and two of the decrees in the sixth, from MSS. in the Archivo general
+de Indias, Sevilla; the rest of the sixth, from the Archivo Historico
+Nacional, Madrid; the fourth, from Thevenot's Voyages curieux, t. i,
+part ii--from a copy belonging to the library of Harvard University;
+the fifth, from a book in the Museo-Biblioteca de Ultramar, Madrid;
+the eighth, from Pastells' edition of Colin's Labor evangelica, iii,
+pp. 528-533.
+
+Translations: These are made by James A. Robertson--except the second
+and part of the sixth, by Emma Helen Blair; and the fifth, by Arthur
+B. Myrick.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+EVENTS IN THE FILIPINAS, 1637-38
+
+
+The patache for Espana left here August 24. It had a propitious season
+[for departure], and therefore it has apparently enjoyed favoring
+vendaval blasts. [1] A short time before that, the patache had left
+for the island of Hermosa; its commander was Don Alonso de Alcocer,
+and the governor of that island, Sargento-mayor Pedro Palomino,
+sailed in it. On the fifth of September, a xalea arrived from Yndia
+on its way to Macan, which had been obliged to put in here on account
+of the weather. It left Malaca August 16, in order to advise the
+inhabitants of Macan to be on the lookout, for there were many Dutch
+in the strait. Now they are going in the galleon "San Juan Baptista"
+under command of Juan Lopez de Ariduin, to buy materials of importance
+for his Majesty's fleets. The xalea remains here to be used for the
+expedition to Xolo, for which it seems well fitted. They report as
+news that Goa was almost surrounded by Dutch vessels. Six galleons
+went out to attack them and sank three of the Dutch vessels. The
+latter retired after three days of fighting, with the intention of
+returning to Jacatra and getting a larger force. On the way they met
+eleven Portuguese fustas, which took shelter in a river. The Dutch
+employed strategy in fighting them, and captured seven of the fustas,
+while four escaped. One of the latter was an excuse for a galley. In
+consequence [of that victory], the enemy are now committing great
+depredations in the strait.
+
+It is also reported that the Malabars with seventeen paroos [i.e.,
+praus] attacked last year a ship from Macan with a crew of thirty
+Portuguese, and carrying great wealth, a thing never before seen. It
+is reported that the Dutch there have shown great anger at what
+the relief galleons did this year with their ships and the fort of
+Malayo; and that, for the coming year, they are intending to send
+out a squadron to punish the jest that was played on them.
+
+It is reported that a Portuguese, named Antonio Carnero, has taken
+up arms together with others, and that they have adopted the calling
+of pirates, and are committing depredations on Moros and Christians.
+
+When the king of Achen was about to go to attack Malaca with a fleet,
+he died. The kingdom was inherited by the king of Paon, an old-time
+friend of the Portuguese. He has renewed friendship with them--a
+great piece of news.
+
+Fray Antonio del Rosario, the ancient of Macan, of [the Order of]
+St. Dominic, bishop-elect of Malaca, died on the way [to that city]
+before being consecrated.
+
+The fathers who accompanied Father Marcelo, who were captured last
+year by the Dutch, together with that famous Polish father, are now
+at liberty. Father Antonio Magallanes, procurator of the province of
+Goa, whom I saw at Roma and Madrid, was to conduct Father Marcelo and
+his companions; but he remained in Espana to finish some business,
+has been elected bishop of Japon, and they are awaiting him in Yndia.
+
+Among the Portuguese of that xalea is one who is a lay-brother of
+St. Francis. He came last year from Lisboa as companion of a bishop,
+the friar Francisco Froan de Benavides, who was once in the mission
+of Nuevo Mexico. He died on his arrival at Goa, and this religious is
+trying to pass to Espana by way of these islands, with papers left him
+by the bishop. This is the principal news brought by the Portuguese.
+
+On the morning of the seventh of this month, Fray Juan de Subelco [2]
+came here from the province of the Rosario, to ask assistance by virtue
+of an order that he brought from the governor. This was given to him
+[by the authorities], and he entered the convent, took possession of it
+for his province, and sent to Manila the father rector, Fray Francisco
+Pinelo, who surrendered the house peaceably and quietly. The day
+before, with the same aid, they had taken possession at the same time
+of Minondo, the hospital, and the Parian, and conveyed Father Collado
+and the other fathers to their convent. The community received them
+at the door of their church, amid the chiming of bells, the playing
+of organs, and with candles lighted on their altars; thence they took
+the fathers to their cells. As a thank-offering they began a novena,
+on November 7, of masses and Salves, accompanied by fine music, the
+chiming of the bells, and a goodly crowd. All the people rejoiced
+because they were at peace. Your Reverence will be pleased to know
+how this happened. Collado wrote bits of satire against the governor,
+calling him filius diaboli flagellum dei et alia hujus modi. [3]
+His original letters were returned to hands that placed them in
+those of Don Sebastian. Finally the governor allowed the claims of
+the province of the Rosario to stand. That province had made Fray
+Andres del Santisimo judge-conservator, who summoned Collado to show
+his despatches that had been passed by the Council [of the Indias],
+but he did not answer. The judge-conservator cited him for the second
+time, but there was no answer. The judge-conservator proclaimed the
+cause at an end, and sentenced his province to be suppressed. Aid
+was asked for the execution of the order and was given, etc.
+
+On Saturday, the twelfth of this month, excommunications were read
+here in four churches against those who had or knew of moneys,
+clothing, books, or other things of the bearded fathers, [4] unless
+they gave them up to those of the Rosario. Almost two thousand pesos
+were declared here belonging to Pinelo, who had deposited them with
+a friend. He came to Manila instantly, and begged protection from Don
+Sebastian, saying that they were his--five hundred pesos received from
+a berth on ship, given him by his Lordship for Mexico, and which, with
+his Lordship's permission, he sold when he remained; one hundred and
+seventy pesos from a pay-warrant which his Lordship had ordered to be
+paid to him; and he had been given one thousand or more pesos, which
+his nephew the reader Ochoa (whom he brought with him as a witness) had
+given him. All this did he state, for even as he left here, he tried
+to go to Espana in this galleon by way of Macan, which was conceded to
+him. The governor wrote to Fray Juan de Subelco to let him have that
+money, which was proved to belong to Pinelo. He gave him another and
+very stringent letter for his provincial in Manila that declared the
+same thing. Father Fray Juan, who narrated the matter to me, went to
+talk with him, and told him that the books showed that the expense was
+more than eight hundred pesos ahead of the receipts; and that, besides
+this, he had just received two hundred pesos belonging to a deceased
+man, and one hundred and seventy pesos belonging to another, and that
+he will have to give account of this--besides which, in any event,
+it all belonged to the order, and nothing was his. He answered that
+they should have it there, and that he would write to his provincial;
+and that, notwithstanding his letter, Fray Juan should do his duty,
+in conformity to the rules of his order. I have now learned that they
+gave up all the money to Pinelo, which he carried away. The galleon
+sailed September 19.
+
+Of their own accord the Sangleys offered the governor [5] a gift of
+six thousand pesos, giving the following reasons for so doing: first,
+because he had redeemed thirty-one of their people from the captivity
+of Corralat; second, because he had made the seas free and secure
+for their ordinary trade; and third, because he maintained them in
+peace and justice. Consequently, the expense of the war of Mindanao,
+taking into account the artillery, and the pillage which pertained
+to his Majesty, and the above-mentioned six thousand pesos, was not
+only covered, but there were also one thousand five hundred pesos
+left over, as I was told by his Majesty's accountant. The latter
+also adds that the golden water-jug and plate that had belonged to
+Auditor Alcaraz were bought for the king our lord with those one
+thousand five hundred pesos; and the governor Don Sebastian added to
+that sum more than two hundred pesos as a gift from his own purse,
+in order to make up the cost of the said water-jug and plate. Dated
+at Cavite, September 15, 1637.
+
+September 27, sentence was declared in favor of the Augustinian
+fathers of Castilla, and that sentence makes a complete end to the
+alternative. A sentence was also given in which the will of Espinosa
+el Tuerto [i.e., "the one-eyed"] was declared null and void. The
+property has been delivered to the fund belonging to deceased persons,
+and those who have any right to it are to demand their justice.
+
+I had a letter from Father Melchor de Vera, [6] in which he says that
+the people who escaped alive from the six large Javanese ships which
+were at Lamitan were accommodated in one caracoa, and passing before
+Basilan, full of fear of the Spaniards in the fort of Sanboangan,
+talked with the chief men [of Basilan], and told them that they were
+those who had been driven from the hill, and that many more than they
+had thought had been killed; and that there was no one in Mindanao
+who did not mourn a person of very near kin--the father for his son,
+the son for his father, etc.
+
+I shall add here what occurred last year in the month of September,
+and which I did not learn until the same month of this year 1637. The
+captain and commandant of Caragan was then Juan Nicolas Godino. He
+went with a fleet to commit depredations on the tributaries of
+Cachil Corralat. He met six caracoas at sea, which he attacked and
+conquered--although most of the enemy escaped to land, as they were
+near the shore. However he killed some of them and captured others. He
+also did much damage in a village that he attacked. He returned
+to his fort laden with plunder and with one hundred and twenty
+captives. Among the dead was one Dumplac, who had formerly killed
+Alferez Blas Gonzalez, and had done great damage to the Christians
+of our missions and those of Caragan. Among the captives was a very
+famous chief, who was regarded as a brave man, and who killed Captain
+Pedro Baptista in the insurrection of Caragan.
+
+October 24, the patache from the island of Hermosa entered the port,
+and it brought back most of the people in those forts. They say
+that the Franciscan friars are all going to China, as are all the
+Dominicans, except one who remained there. It is reported that they
+are suffering famine, and that no ships from China go there.
+
+The day before, the twenty-third, Sargento-mayor Don Pedro de Corquera,
+the governor's nephew, died at Manila. The governor had reared him from
+childhood in Flandes. He was well liked and respected in these islands,
+for his affable manners had obtained for him much popularity. Three
+or four days before, a galley-captain, named N. Ramos, and some
+other discontented Spaniards had deserted in a boat with a topmast,
+for their provision robbing two Sangley champans.
+
+The master-of-camp, Pedro de Heredia, died at Manila November 5. He
+left all his property to charity. But the Audiencia sequestered it
+all immediately, until the end of his residencia. Captain Don Diego
+de Miranda also died from an accident, which carried him off in
+thirty hours.
+
+News was received on November 15 that the enemy were passing the
+Mindoro coast. That same day, Don Sebastian despatched some vessels
+to attack them. Alferez Arexica went from this place to attack
+them with fifty firearms in the xalea and two brigantines. He also
+despatched his company from Manila in champans, to pursue and punish
+them. Shortly after, Father Hernando de Estrada [7] arrived here
+from Marinduque. He states that he met some champans which had been
+pursued by the enemy, whom they thought to have been Camucones. The
+two brigantines returned on the night of November 24. On account of
+the wind and rain they had lost the xalea, which was the flagship,
+the night that they had left. They went to Balayan, where they learned
+that the Camucones had attacked Lobo, but that they had done no damage,
+for the Indians resisted them; whereupon the pirates had taken their
+course toward their own country by way of the sea side of Mindoro. The
+xalea returned November 29, without having met the enemy. Then came
+news that one night the flagship and one other of the champans that
+had sailed from Manila had collided. The shock was more severe on
+the flagship, which sprang a leak and went down. Only one Spaniard
+and one Sangley were drowned.
+
+The champan that carried Father Marcelo Mastril did not go to China,
+but to the Lequios, which are subject to the king of Saxuma. Some
+Japanese accompanied the father. Accordingly they made use of the
+following stratagem. Those of the champan talked with the Lequians,
+whom they told that those Japanese had been wrecked on an island,
+and that they had rescued them; and that, if the Lequians would give
+them some provisions, they would leave the Japanese there; but, if
+not, that the latter would return [to Manila]. The Lequians gave them
+some food, and immediately despatched the father and the Japanese,
+as they wished, in a funea, while the champan returned here. They
+learned there that the Dominican fathers who had tried to go to Japon
+last year by way of the Lequios had been seized, and sent to the king
+of Saxuma by the tono of that land.
+
+Yesterday, December 9, Don Sebastian set out from Manila for Xolo. He
+sailed in the galley flagship. With him went the xalea, brigantines,
+champans, and the two galleons for Terrenate, under the command of
+Geronimo Enriquez; and as admiral Don Pedro de Almonte, the same as
+last year. The second galley was launched yesterday, and the commander
+of the galleys, Nicolas Gonzalez, will leave here in it in a week,
+in order to follow Don Sebastian. Admiral Andres Lopez de [word partly
+illegible; Nozadigui?] will govern this port in his absence.
+
+A patache arrived at Manila on December 27 from Macan, laden with
+five thousand arrobas of iron for Captain Juan Lopez de Ariduin. It
+was bought from some English, who were near Macan with three galleons
+and this patache. It brought news of the remarkable martyrdom of Father
+Francisco Marcelo Mastril, who reached Japon September 19. Having left
+Manila on July 10, he landed at the kingdom of Saxuma with only one
+companion. He immediately went inland to go to the emperor's court. But
+he was seized October 4, and, having suffered most cruel tortures,
+he was beheaded October 17 with his aforesaid companion. Since I
+translated the relation from Portuguese into Castilian, and enclose
+it herewith, I shall only add that the bells in our church and others
+were rung as soon as the news arrived. In the afternoon a notable Te
+Deum laudamus was sung. The dean again put on his clerical robes. The
+archbishop came, as did the royal Audiencia, and a great crowd of
+people, and the orders, as well as the master-of-camp, Don Lorenco
+de Olaso, and the flower of the soldiery. From our house they went
+to [the church of] St. Dominic to sing another Te Deum for three
+martyrs of that order. At night there was also a chiming of bells
+and an illumination. The entire city celebrated the glory and virtues
+of the holy father Marcelo, with tender tears; for he was generally
+loved and regarded as a saint.
+
+Among the Dominican fathers died a mestizo of Binondo, son of a Chinese
+and a Tagal woman. He was prosecuted by justice, in order to hang him
+for his crimes; and he embarked with the fathers, in order to escape
+with his life. Arriving at the Lequios, and his other companions
+remaining in the boat, he refused to return, but wished to continue
+with the fathers. They tell and do not finish telling of the valor,
+fervor, and courage of that holy mestizo, who suffered cruel tortures
+with a rare constancy, ever preaching the Divine law of God.
+
+It was learned, at the coming of that patache, that those fathers
+who had accompanied the holy father Marcelo who went with the
+captain-general of Macan had arrived safely; and that the champan
+which had fled hence with eighteen sailors had made port at that
+city. It was also reported that the Portuguese have not been well
+received in Japon either this year or last, and all that is because
+of the preachers who go. It is learned also that Father Alberto de
+Polonia was brought to Cochinchina, and that he is now in Macan,
+where for some time he suffered from a most severe illness.
+
+A champan, which had sailed from the island of Hermosa some years
+ago with a load of people, and had been given up as lost, made port
+at Sian because of the violence of the wind. That king treated them
+well, and gave them the means with which to return. Afterward they
+were driven upon the coast of the kingdom of Patani by other fierce
+tempests--where, having been supplied and sailing near the strait of
+Sincapura, the Dutch followed them. They landed, and at length made
+port at Macan, whence some of the men have come, while the others will
+come in the galleon "San Juan Baptista." It is said by those who come
+in this patache, who had gone in the galleon "San Juan Baptista," that,
+on discovering the English ships, lanchas came from them to reconnoiter
+them; and the English, having heard that it was a galleon belonging
+to the king of Espana, threw up their caps into the air joyfully,
+and eagerly cried out, "Hurrah for the king of Espana!" Then they took
+the news to their own ships, which fired many salutes, and by way of
+toasting the health of the king our sovereign, fired a hundred pieces
+of artillery. They told our men that the daughter of their king [8]
+was in Espana for all her lifetime.
+
+Father Fray Francisco de Pinelo and other religious who went from
+here to pass to Espana embarked in these English ships, on condition
+that there should be no disputes on matters of religion.
+
+News came through the fathers of St. Augustine at Panhay on January
+15, 1638, that one of the champans which left Manila to attack
+the Camucones became separated from the others. It fell in with
+the Camucones, and did them great damage, sinking their flagship
+and almiranta. Twelve Borneans were captured, and six Christians
+were freed. The enemy's loss was a hundred counting drowned and
+killed. Sargento-mayor Pedro de Fuercios was commander of that champan.
+
+Almost all the month of January and that of February was taken
+up with prayers in various churches, for the fortunate success of
+Don Sebastian. Now we are not the only ones to offer them, as we
+were last year; but all make them, both the secular clergy and the
+friars. The Sangleys have said very solemn prayers in their Parian
+church, of their own accord, as an expression of thanks for the peace
+and justice in which the governor maintains them.
+
+Don Sebastian had sent those Borneans and Camucones from Otong to
+Manila, ordering them to serve the various orders and hospitals,
+so that they might be carefully catechized and made Christians. When
+they reached Maribeles, an old Morabite [9] persuaded the others, and
+they rose against the Spaniards who were bringing them. There were two
+Spaniards in the champan who were wounded, but they killed the Morabite
+and wounded some of the others. Some of them were thrown into the sea,
+where they were drowned, and with this fortune they reached Manila.
+
+On the night of February 10, robbers entered the church of this
+residence at Cavite, and stole two silver lamps. They set a trap in
+the stairway, so that the first one who should descend, if the robbers
+were perceived, would undoubtedly be killed. It has been impossible to
+find any trace of the robbers. A week later, about two thousand pesos'
+worth of jewels were stolen in Manila in [the church of] St. Dominic,
+Nuestra Senora del Rosario. But the thief (who was a Spaniard) was
+discovered, and most of it has been recovered.
+
+Letters were received March 19, announcing the governor's arrival at
+Sanboangan and Jolo. The news therein contained is in a separate paper.
+
+A despatch was received from the governor in the middle of April from
+Jolo, from which it was learned that he was pressing as closely as
+possible the siege of the stronghold, which the Macasars and Joloans
+were defending with great obstinacy. There are things worthy of
+history, which will go [in a letter] by themselves.
+
+It was learned from the same despatch that the Terrenate galleons
+had already returned to Sanboangan, and that they had arrived safely
+with their reenforcements, without the Dutch enemy having shown them
+any resistance, although the latter had vessels of great burden. Six
+Dutchmen deserted to our men; the three who were aboard the flagship,
+where Father Pedro Hernando de Estrada was, were converted to our
+holy Catholic faith by his efforts. One of them is a fine student,
+and very talented. He knows Latin and Greek, and had studied the
+whole course of arts, and some years in law, in Flandes.
+
+A patache which left Macan some days after our galleon "San Juan
+Baptista," arrived from that city on May 4, and they expected to find
+the galleon here; however, experienced persons say that it is not
+late. There are six brothers in the galleon--students who are to be
+ordained--and Father Bartolome is coming with them as superior. That
+patache brings two Franciscan friars, Castilians, who have been driven
+from China. They say that the Chinese have driven them away through
+love of us, saying that Ours preach Christ risen, and those fathers
+Christ crucified--a reason that I do not understand. The statement of
+the pilot of the patache is that they have been driven out because they
+proceeded in the preaching with but little caution, and I regard that
+as true. Some nine months ago, I heard a prudent and experienced man
+say that a great persecution was feared in China, because of the little
+caution of the preachers. One week after the arrival of the patache,
+I received a letter from Father Antonio Cardin, [10] commissary of
+the Holy Office for Macan and China, who gives me the following news:
+
+
+    "Section of a letter from Father Antonio Cardin, dated Macan,
+    April 15, 1638
+
+    "I shall relate here the news of the missions that your Reverence
+    desires to know. Japon is a thing of the past if God do not, in
+    His mercy, aid it. China was increasing greatly in Christianity
+    during these years, but with the entrance of the friars, it is
+    being thrown into confusion; for all the religious have been exiled
+    in Chincheo, and the churches destroyed, where they and we were
+    [laboring] in a flourishing Christian church. For as the friars
+    treat of conquests, saying openly that China can be conquered
+    with four thousand Spaniards, such talk can have no good effect
+    on the natives, who immediately tell it to their mandarins,
+    and we are all lost.
+
+    "The fathers have been restored to their former liberty in
+    Cochinchina. The old king died, but his son has given the Dutch a
+    factory, and they are doing as much harm as possible. In Tumquin
+    that Christian church is increasing greatly; but the Dutch are now
+    there, and, although the king has not conceded them a factory,
+    they say that they will do us as much harm as possible in order
+    that we may be exiled. Father Raymundo de Govea is arranging
+    matters in Tumquin, in order that he may go to the Laos. There
+    is no news from Siam. They killed Father Julio Cesar there, and
+    until now they have been at war with Malaca. They now send to
+    ask for peace, and they also tell me that they will ask it from
+    Manila. It is said that they are doing this through fear of the
+    Dutch, who they fear are going to seize their kingdom. Father Lope
+    de Andrada was ordered to retire from Camboja, on account of ill
+    health, and Father Antonio Capechi was sent there. The sending
+    of a large ship directly to Lisboa is being discussed here, but
+    this is so great a blessing that I doubt whether it will be done."
+
+
+At the closing of the hour of prayer on May 13, the day of the
+glorious ascension of our Lord, news arrived of the capture of the
+[fortified] hill of Jolo. It is a matter of the greatest consolation
+for all nations; at least, all joined in the festival with great
+appearances of rejoicing. The bells of all the churches were rung,
+and the Te Deum laudamus, so due to God, was sung in some of them as
+a thank-offering. There was a great illumination at night, and more
+ringing of bells. I refer to the history for particular.
+
+The above news was received on the occasion of the arrival of five
+or six ships from Great China, laden with merchandise, which was
+needed in the islands. They give as news that eleven other and more
+powerful ships have been given chapas. That has been of the greatest
+consolation, for in the last two years those ships have had so little
+custom, because of the small amount of silver that had been sent
+from Mexico, that it was feared that the Chinese would not come this
+year. [11]
+
+The commander of the galleys, Nicolas Goncalez, and Captain Carranca,
+who was general of the artillery, having fallen very sick at Jolo
+almost at the beginning of the siege, were sent away by Don Sebastian
+so that they might recuperate. They arrived at Octong safely more
+than two months ago, and this their delay was already causing
+anxiety. Today, May 17, I have been told that the Chinese of the
+champan in which they were coming [to Manila] killed them through
+greed, in order to rob them, and five other Spaniards with them. One
+they cast into the sea badly wounded, where some Indian fishermen
+rescued him, to whom he related what had happened. Scarcely had they
+reached land before he died.
+
+Some influential men were killed in the assaults on Xolo, among whom
+were Sargento-mayor Melon, Captain Juan Nicolas, Alferez Aregita, etc.
+
+Yesterday, May 16, while talking with the commandant of Macan,
+a very honorable Portuguese, of the Order of Santiago, I asked him
+some questions, the replies to which I shall state here, as they have
+some interest. He says that the kingdom of Tumquin is a part of Great
+China, but has a different king; and it differs in language from China,
+as does Galicia from Castilla. He asserts the same of Cochinchina,
+although there is a greater difference in language. Tumquin is ninety
+leguas from Macan, and is reached by traveling between the island
+of Ainao [i.e., Hainan] and the mainland of China. Cochinchina is
+one hundred and twenty leguas [from Macan], and is reached by going
+outside that island. One of four ships that sailed recently from Macan
+to various kingdoms, which was en route to Macasar with two hundred and
+fifty persons, was wrecked on this island of Ainao, but only fourteen
+persons were drowned. The commandant added that the Society of Jesus
+is now preaching in that island, and that the people are rapidly
+embracing Christianity. The fathers had brought six boys, sons of
+the most influential men, to Macau to be educated better, and they
+show signs of great ability. When I asked him about the exile of the
+preachers from Chincheo, he only replied that the Castilians, as they
+are prepared to hold subject all the Indians of their conquests--as
+Mexico, Peru, and these islands--enter into other kingdoms with great
+bragging and boasts, which is the occasion of their ruin.
+
+I have learned from some fathers of St. Dominic and the cura of Nueva
+Segobia (which is, one hundred and thirty leguas away from here) that
+Fray Diego Collado wrote a paper to Don Sebastian, after the reunion
+of the fathers of St. Dominic, which was entitled "Deceits, tricks,
+and plots of Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera," in which he made
+disgraceful remarks to him. His Lordship sent it to his provincial,
+and the latter retired the father to the house of Nueva Segobia. He
+remained some months in prison, where he could neither hear nor say
+mass; and he is now locked up where he can hear it through a church
+gallery.
+
+Today, May 20, at two o'clock, quite without our expecting it,
+and without the fires in Maribelez having announced it, the galleon
+"San Juan Baptista"--which had taken fifty days to come from Macan,
+a voyage which the patache made in nine--arrived. God delivered them
+from a great danger on some shoals, to which the currents were taking
+them swiftly during a calm. The fathers assert that they invoked the
+holy father Marcelo, the martyr of Jesus Christ, with great faith
+in the greatest danger. Thanks to the Lord, who has allowed them
+all to arrive safe and happy! Father Bartolome Roboredo has told
+us glorious things of the Christendom of Tumquin--where, this year
+alone, nine thousand have been baptized. He says that there are some
+fathers and a bishop even in Etiopa; and that the rulers do not molest
+the Catholics. The fathers of Jentafee, Tibet, and the kingdoms of
+Potente and Siranagar, have suffered various fortunes. In the court
+of the Megor [i.e., Mogul], the church was destroyed, and the fathers
+seized by those Moros, because they were confirming in the faith those
+Christians who had been taken captive from Bengala. But now affairs
+have begun to brighten; they have been granted liberty, and are aiding
+the Christians. By that means it is to be hoped that there will be at
+some other time a gateway into Tibet and Siranagar, the way to which
+must necessarily lie through [the country of] the Megor. It has been
+learned from Japon, from the very ones who are in power, that they
+are now tired and weary of killing Christians; and that they are not
+well satisfied with the Dutch and their trade. He adds that, because of
+what the holy father Marcelo declared to them in his martyrdom--namely,
+that they were rendering their nation infamous and obscuring their fame
+by the tortures that they were inflicting upon the private parts of
+Christians--the Japanese are generally angry, and do not wish that to
+be done. All the priests in Japon at present are three of the Society
+of Jesus, all Japanese. It is not known where they are wandering,
+and no letters have been received from them, because of the severity
+of the persecution. There is one other father, a European, named Juan
+Baptista Porro. They do not say that he is alive, for, although his
+death is not known, it is presumed that he is dead; for he was very
+old and worn out with labors, and it is several years since letters
+have been received from him. It is also said that there are hopes that
+that persecution will soon cease. Would to God that it might be so!
+
+Yesterday, May 23, the day of the Holy Ghost, Don Sebastian arrived
+at this port, having left Tanaguan that morning--a distance of ten
+mortal leguas. He came in the Terrenate galleons, which, as the
+weather was bad, he left at the landing at Mindoro. He, as well as
+Father Juan de Barrios, was fatigued, which we could see was from the
+hardships that they have suffered; but, thanks to God, these have
+been well recompensed in service to God and to the general welfare
+of these islands. The chaplain Don Pedro de Francia died of fever in
+the ship, and, six days later, Captain Don Lope de Barahona, of the
+same sickness. Upon the arrival of Don Sebastian, the bells in our
+house were rung for a long time, as a mark of rejoicing. Later the
+bells were rung in the cathedral church, and that night there were
+illuminations in all the houses and convents.
+
+Yesterday, May 27, the galleons of the Terrenate relief expedition
+anchored at this port. Father Hernando de Estrada says that twenty
+persons of various nations (for the galleons carried Joloans, Basilans,
+and the Bisayans who were freed from the captivity of Xolo) have
+died in the flagship since their departure from Sanboangan, and that
+sickness was caused by their close quarters; and that a goodly number
+have died in the almiranta and the patache; but it is a cause for great
+consolation that no Moro, male or female, has died without baptism.
+
+Yesterday, May 31, Don Sebastian made his triumphant entrance into
+Manila, in the same manner as he had done, the year preceding, upon
+his arrival from Mindanao. I wrote concerning it, by the patache;
+and will only state here the number of pieces--namely, eleven of cast
+iron and one bronze culverin, these being large pieces. Among the
+medium-sized pieces and falcons there were fifteen. The best falcon
+had the arms and name of King Don Sebastian [of Portugal]. There were
+eleven smaller versos. The crowd of people in the windows and streets,
+the illuminations of the night, and the masquerades of the city,
+were the same as I wrote last year.
+
+June 3, Corpus Christi day, the procession of thanks for the victory
+was united with that of the most holy sacrament, as I wrote last
+year. That same day the xalea which had been left in Xolo arrived. It
+brings news that the king and queen, who had fled from the stronghold
+with the other Joloans, have sent to say that they desire to settle
+in whatever place may be assigned to them, and to pay tribute to
+his Majesty. They promise to obey the conditions imposed on them by
+Don Sebastian.
+
+Monday, June 7, the honors for those killed in war were performed in
+the soldiers' church with the same solemnity as those of the past
+year. The father rector, Francisco Colin, preached to a generally
+appreciative audience.
+
+Friday, June eleven, the flagship galley entered this port with a
+round sail, but no bastard; for a flash of lightning, which struck it,
+had torn it from top to bottom and killed two men. It brought some
+bronze artillery of the pieces captured at Jolo, in addition to what
+I mentioned in the triumph--as was told me by a man who comes from
+there, and who is well versed regarding artillery. The pieces with
+ladles mounted in the stronghold numbered in all eleven of cast iron,
+and eleven of bronze; also eleven other large falcons, besides the
+ordinary versos.
+
+He says of Dato Ache, who is the greatest pirate, and the one who
+has done most damage to the Christians of all those of Jolo--and
+who is the one who persuaded the king and the others to fortify
+themselves, and to refuse to surrender to the Spaniards--that a
+mine which exploded and killed fifty Joloans, also caught him, so
+that he was completely buried. With only power to move one hand, he
+beckoned imploringly for help; his men hurried to his assistance,
+and got him out, much hurt. He recovered afterward, and when the
+others descended from the stronghold, he, with some other Malays,
+who were steadfastly of the opinion that they should not surrender,
+escaped, and left the island in great dudgeon at the king.
+
+Sunday, June 20, when we celebrated the feast of the most holy
+sacrament, Father Francisco Rangel chanted his first mass in this
+college. He was one of the six who came from Macan to be ordained,
+and since his residence here has told us some remarkable things that
+happened four or five years ago, and, as I believe that very few
+there have any knowledge regarding them, I shall relate them here.
+
+First, he says that the island of Ainao is as large as the island of
+Cicilia; and that it has its own natives, who are white-complexioned,
+and have a different aspect from that of the Chinese. The latter
+conquered the seacoast many years ago, and the natives retired to
+the mountains, whence it is their custom to descend to harry the
+Chinese--who are scattered, and have never subjected the natives to the
+payment of tribute. While Father Bento de Matos was in that island,
+two remarkable things occurred to him. In a city of the Chinese,
+where no means have yet been found whereby to make an entrance to
+instruct the natives--both because the language is special, and
+because they are always at war--it happened that the father, having
+no lodging, learned that there was a good unoccupied house, for,
+because of fear at I know not what noises that had been heard in it,
+no one would live in it. The father determined to enter and to live
+in that house, although his friends dissuaded him and told him their
+fears. He lived there quite a number of days, at the end of which,
+in the darkness of the night, a dead man appeared to him in the habit
+of a mandarin. The dead man told the father to look well at him,
+and note well his marks, and to go to the mandarin So-and-so, who
+was his brother, and tell him to disinter his body, which was buried
+in such and such a place near the altar; for it was the will of God
+that there should not be the body of a condemned heathen in a place
+where the holy body of His son Jesus Christ was offered to Him in
+acceptable sacrifice. The father gave the marks to the mandarin, who
+recognized that it was his brother. They dug in the place noted, and
+found the body entire in a casket and preserved with precious spices,
+with which it had been embalmed, and carried it to a separate place.
+
+The other circumstance is, that every day when the said father said
+mass there, it was heard by a devout Christian, who, after rising
+suddenly, appeared so joyful and happy that the other Christians
+came to consider and even to believe him as mad. They resolved to
+censure him, and to advise him to have more moderation and modesty in
+the presence of so great a Lord. He answered them that he could not
+do otherwise than he had; for, on rising from the eucharist, he saw
+two most beautiful youths kneeling before the most holy sacrament,
+amid such lights and splendors that they bathed his soul in joy so
+great that it overflowed in its abundance to his body, and he could
+not restrain himself from manifesting it.
+
+It happened to that same father that, while on a mission to Chincheo,
+some literati suddenly entered a chapel in which he was, to make a jest
+of him and of the God whom he was adoring. He kneeled down before a
+crucifix and said "Lord, do not abandon me among thine enemies." The
+holy crucifix answered "No, son, I shall not abandon thee; but I am
+always with thee to aid thee." Thereupon the literati, thunderstruck
+and full of fear, left the father, and went out of the chapel.
+
+In one of these recent years, during a great baquio or typhoon,
+eighteen Dutch ships were wrecked on the coast of Chincheo. The Chinese
+beheaded some of those who escaped alive, and, having seasoned those
+heads with salt, took them with the other men whom they left alive to
+the court of Paquin, where they were all beheaded. For the aversion
+of the Chinese to people with blue eyes is great; and the reason is
+that it is said that there is an ancient prophecy that men with eyes
+of that color will conquer their kingdom.
+
+About two years ago, six out of seven ships that left Olanda with
+reenforcements for India were sunk in the open sea, and only one
+arrived.
+
+The king of China is commonly regarded by his vassals as a Christian:
+1st, because he has only one wife; 2d, because he only adores the God
+of heaven; 3d, because he has tried to exterminate the bonzes. Among
+other plans [for the accomplishment of that], he employed that
+of having six thousand bonzes enlisted for the war against the
+Tartars. He sent them under the command of a great war mandarin,
+and all the six thousand died in the war. The captain alone escaped,
+and he was shortly after baptized; he is a very devout Christian, and
+is known as Doctor Miguel. The manner in which the king [12] became
+a Christian is said to have been that the famous Doctor Pablo (who
+is now dead), having free entrance into the palace, often conversed
+with the king, whom he converted and baptized. The king has shown
+Ours favor by giving them a large convent of the bonzes in Paquin,
+and has given them lands for their support.
+
+July 6, Father Melchor de Vera passed by way of this college, en
+route from Sanboanga. He gives us some particulars which it is well
+to know. Cachil Moncay attacked the new village which Cachil Corralat
+had built. He killed or captured about one hundred of his men, but
+Corralat escaped. Afterward when Dato Siqui brought his customary
+tribute to Corralat from the island of Little Sanguil, he attacked
+Moncay and killed him and others, so that the number of killed and
+captives reached eighty.
+
+Father Vera met on his way here a champan from Terrenate, which
+tells him that Corralat, seeing himself expelled [from his towns]
+by Don Sebastian, sent messengers to the Moros of Terrenate, to beg
+for aid; but that the latter had refused it to him, as they had enough
+of their own affairs to attend to. The men of that champan also told
+him that the petty king of Great Sanguil talked with them, and said
+that he wished peace with the Spaniards, and would pay tribute to his
+Majesty. For greater security he gave them the young prince his son, so
+that they might give the boy to the governor as a token of peace. All
+these are the results of the two victories of Mindanao and Jolo.
+
+Today, July 11, a large champan, which had sailed from the port of
+Macasar at the beginning of Lent, arrived at this port. They relate
+many acts of affection and favor which the king has shown to the
+Spaniards. Those aboard the champan assert that the king will be
+very glad of whatever ill-treatment Don Sebastian accords to the
+Macasars of Jolo, because they have taken arms against the vassals
+of his brother the king of Castilla.
+
+Today, July 18, the patache sails with the reenforcements for the
+island of Hermosa, under the command of Don Pedro Fernandez del Rio.
+
+Yesterday, July 23, at dawn, a Macan patache anchored in this
+roadstead. It comes from Camboja laden with rice, camanguian or
+benzoin, and other drugs.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LETTER FROM CORCUERA TO FELIPE IV
+
+
+Sire:
+
+Last year I informed your Majesty that I had appointed Don Luis
+Arias de Mora as protector of the Sangleys in the Parian; he is a
+lawyer well known in this royal Audiencia, a man of virtue and of
+excellent abilities. On this account, with the salary of that office
+of protector (which he draws from the communal treasury of the said
+Sangleys), he is obliged to act as counsel for the archbishop in
+affairs of justice, in order to prevent the troubles that the friars
+brought upon him last year--inducing him to issue acts against the
+Order of the Society, and excommunicating the royal Audiencia and
+the governor of Filipinas. Since he promised that he would issue
+no mandates without the signed approval of this counselor, we have
+lived in peace, without there having been the least annoyance, or
+any interruption of our harmony; for the said counselor will not sign
+any act or document which the said archbishop causes to be drawn up
+if it contravenes the patronage and jurisdiction of your Majesty,
+or encroaches in any way upon your rights. For these reasons, and on
+account of the said Luis Arias de Mora's long service as advocate
+in this royal Audiencia, and his excellent reputation for learning
+and talent, I entreat that your Majesty will be pleased to grant him
+the favor of confirming him in the said office of protector of the
+Sangleys, until some greater favor be bestowed upon him; any office
+will be well served, if conferred upon him. May our Lord protect the
+Catholic person of your Majesty, as Christendom has need. Manila,
+August 21, 1638. Sire, your vassal kisses your Majesty's feet.
+
+
+Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera
+
+
+[Endorsed: "February 26, 1639; provision is made for this."]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LETTER TO FELIPE IV FROM THE TREASURER AT MANILA
+
+
+Sire:
+
+If my so great obligations to your Majesty--not only since you
+are my king and natural sovereign, but since you have honored me
+so generously in these islands by employing my person in the post
+of official judge-treasurer of your royal estate--necessarily and
+strictly did not oblige me to inform your Majesty of the manner in
+which the said royal estate is administered here, its condition,
+and the so great ruin that it has suffered and is suffering since it
+was your Majesty's pleasure to have Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera
+come to govern these islands in the year thirty-five, I should have
+to arouse myself and take courage to place before the pious eyes of
+your Majesty this memoir of disasters; for no other title or name can
+be given to the calamities that have rushed pellmell both on the said
+royal estate, and on us afflicted ministers who have it in charge,
+to the so great peril and discredit of our persons. The matter, Sire,
+is a very long drawn out one, and hence it is impossible to compass
+it in a few lines; and I in my rashness will weary your Majesty's
+ears. But the love and zeal which move me will perhaps avail to remove
+from me censure for my boldness.
+
+Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera entered this city in the latter part
+of June, 635, to assume this government. He showed apparent signs of
+an endeavor to excel, in his honest and careful attitude toward your
+royal estate; but we were soon undeceived by his so unexpected and
+inconsiderate resolution not to despatch the ships which your Majesty
+has ordered, by so many decrees and ordinances, to be sent annually
+to Nueva Espana with the property of the inhabitants of this city--so
+that the usual situado might be sent back in them to these islands
+from the proceeds of your royal duties, and serve as a help to the
+great and numerous expenses which your Majesty is incurring annually
+in the increase and preservation of so many of the faithful as have in
+these regions deserved to receive the holy water of baptism. Yet it
+was a fact that Don Juan Cereco de Salamanca (who was concluding his
+governorship, to which he had been appointed by the viceroy of Nueva
+Espana), had prepared two ships, and their cargoes were aboard--the
+lading-space having been allotted, in accordance with the orders
+given by your Majesty, among the inhabitants of this city. The losses
+and damage that have resulted, both to your royal estate and to the
+property of the merchants of these islands, are so considerable and
+momentous that I would not dare to name them. Your Majesty's ministers
+in Mexico, in whose charge is the management of your royal estate,
+will have already reported them to you, for they will be able to do
+it with more accurate knowledge and certainty; and, consequently,
+I think that they will already have come to your Majesty's ears.
+
+A few days ago the governor introduced in this royal camp of Manila a
+cavalry company of twenty-nine men or soldiers, with their captain,
+one lieutenant, one alferez, one standard-bearer, and one corporal;
+each soldier was to receive 168 pesos' pay per annum, the captain
+1,200, the lieutenant, 480, the alferez, 380, the corporal, 216, and
+one trumpler, 120--the total amounting to 7,248 pesos. It was for the
+sole purpose of being employed nightly in squads to close the gates of
+the city and to patrol it; and it was all to spare the infantry from
+fatigue, although the latter had until then been employed in that
+duty with much more security to the city, and with the correction
+of many lawless acts which we have been experiencing here since,
+and which have been committed by the very men who are deputed to
+obviate them. When the said governor ordered us to inscribe that
+new order in the royal books, and to furnish the papers to the said
+soldiers with pay so increased, we, seeing of how little importance
+and effectiveness the said company was, and that there was no order
+from your Majesty for its creation, warned him of that--besides giving
+him other reasons which will already have been seen by your Council,
+for we enclosed a copy of both of them in the letters that we wrote
+in the year 1636. Still, notwithstanding that, the governor ordered
+the command to be obeyed. Accordingly we did so, and the command has
+been, and is being, observed; and the governor refuses to recede
+in so pernicious a decision as is the increase of [expenses with]
+pay so large as this, and so unnecessary, and, moreover, when your
+royal treasury in these islands has so many and so great necessities.
+
+Although there was, upon the arrival of the said governor, as much
+infantry in this city and these presidios, as in the times of previous
+governors, and even more, inasmuch as he had brought in those ships
+a very large and fine consignment of men (for they numbered more than
+five hundred men)--a considerable reenforcement, and sufficient to have
+garrisoned and manned your Majesty's forts--he raised two companies
+of ninety-six Pampango Indians apiece, on his own counsel alone,
+and unnecessarily, so that they might take part with the Spaniards in
+the guard and watch of this city. The following pay [was assigned]:
+the captain, 240 pesos per annum; two drummers, each 24 pesos; the
+alferez, 120 pesos; his standard-bearer, 24 pesos; the sergeant, 84
+pesos; the four corporals, 60 pesos apiece. Hence, both companies have
+an annual expense of 10,728 pesos, for those two companies are paid
+monthly the amount of their pay. Not only are those companies still
+kept up, but they have also been augmented since the past year, 637,
+by two other companies--one for this camp, which is here at present;
+and the other in the new presidios of Jolo and Camboja--besides 72
+other Pampango Indians, who are stationed in the fort at the port of
+Cavite. All together mean an expense of 25,092 pesos per year to the
+royal treasury. I assure your Majesty that this matter ought to be
+looked at with the greatest attention, in order that things might
+not be so managed; for it is a useless and needless expense when,
+as I have said, your royal treasury suffers so great losses as it
+does, by the so terrible and irreparable damage which the province
+from which those Indians are drafted has suffered, as they are all
+tillers of the soil, and tributaries of your Majesty. Many losses to
+your royal estate follow, because they and their wives are exempted
+from paying the tribute during the time while they serve in their
+posts as soldiers. Besides, as this province [of Pampanga] abounds
+so plentifully in rice, and your Majesty needs so much of it for the
+rations of so great a number of persons as are employed in the building
+and repairing of the vessels in the port of Cavite, and for the sailors
+and soldiers, it is obvious that the said province will be diminished;
+for it is necessary to allot the vendalas and repartimientos upon the
+few who remain, instead of on the many, so that with a few exactions
+of this sort the poor Indians will be driven to the wall, and will
+find it necessary to desert their huts and take to the woods. That
+would mean the total ruin and destruction of that district, which is
+the support of this colony.
+
+As the governor immediately undertook to despatch the usual
+reenforcement and situado to the forts of Terrenate, he appointed a
+chief commander with 3,000 pesos, and an admiral with 2,000--although
+until then there had been no such officers as commander-in-chief and
+admiral; but only one commandant, who received 60 ducados of eleven
+reals per month, while those who were placed in command of the other
+pataches received very moderate pay. We remonstrated, as we were bound
+to do, warning the governor that there was no order from your Majesty
+for the creation of such salaries. He referred the decision of this
+matter to the treasury meeting, where we found two auditors and Doctor
+Juan Fernandez de Ledo (who was exercising the duties of fiscal), and
+the factor and treasurer. All except the said Doctor Juan Fernandez
+de Ledo, who was of the governor's opinion, opposed the said pay,
+giving very powerful and cogent reasons therefor. Notwithstanding that,
+the governor ordered the said salaries to be made good, and said that
+he would report the matter to your Majesty. Hence, Sire, he will by
+no means listen to any proposition which is made for the benefit and
+use of the royal treasury, if it is contrary to his opinion.
+
+The same thing happened in the said meeting when they were assigning
+the salaries to the chaplains whom he appointed in the said galleons
+of Terrenate, and in all the others that sailed from these islands
+for any place. It was an expense as avoidable as the others which he
+has introduced, for it is a fact that religious are always ready to
+serve those posts because of the accommodations that they receive in
+the galleons, especially in those that sail to Nueva Espana. For when
+the religious sail in them as passengers they must obtain permission,
+and the accommodation of a berth, and, as this costs money and trouble,
+it is found to be no little convenience to give them the posts as
+chaplains; and they have not claimed or demanded any pay, and they
+have been employed in this ministry in all the past. Therefore one
+can understand how superfluous is that expense.
+
+There are five convents of religious within the walls of this city of
+Manila, and one of nuns; the church of La Misericordia, the seminary
+of Santa Potenciana, the cathedral church, and the hospital for
+the Spaniards or soldiers. That makes ten churches in all, and they
+are so near and close to one another that the divine offices can be
+heard from one to another, if one pays moderate attention. So small
+and narrow> is the district of the city, and so few the people in the
+churches, that if there was no more than one convent of religious and
+the cathedral church, they could be sufficiently taken care of and
+without too great fatigue [to the priests]. Although this was the fact
+of the case, the governor, a very few days after his arrival, began
+to build a church for his soldiers, saying at the beginning that the
+expense for the building was to be taken from the soldiers' own pay,
+and that no expense would be incurred by the royal treasury. But he
+did not keep his word, although the said church was fully built,
+together with some barracks and quarters for the said soldiers to
+live in. In the erection of it, more than eighty thousand pesos have
+been already spent, while the amount charged to the infantry is not in
+excess of sixteen thousand pesos. Consequently, it has been necessary
+that the remaining funds should be supplied from the royal treasury,
+although it would be more proper to expend that sum in building
+galleons to carry the goods of this city to Nueva Espana. For with
+galleons the royal treasury will be increased, and thereby will the
+governor obey the many and urgent orders which your Majesty has been
+pleased to issue in this regard; and the vassals and inhabitants of
+these islands would not be so ruined, and so hopeless of returning to
+their former state. It was all occasioned by the governor's resolution
+not to despatch any ships during the year of 635 and that of 637; and
+even next year, 639, there is little assurance that he will despatch
+them, for there is no money with which to prepare them. If that were
+done, we could entertain stronger hopes; because, as I write this, the
+usual succor from Mexico has not yet arrived, as only one very small
+patache was despatched last year, and there is doubt that it was able
+to reach port. On that account we are so perplexed and afflicted that
+it is even a special providence of God that we are able to breathe.
+
+The ships which are being despatched this year are sailing without a
+register; for, as yet, the inhabitants have not registered a shred of
+cloth with which to lade them, as they do not know the condition of
+their property in Nueva Espana. As they are so ruined as regards their
+capital, they are, according to my way of thinking excusable. But
+I have been unable to find any excuse in any way for the governor,
+who has, by his so extraordinary and unadvised resolutions, placed
+this city in the last straits; and has paid no attention to those who,
+with foresight, have represented to him these great damages, besides
+those which have followed and will follow to the royal estate of your
+Majesty. For this year alone (and I do not speak of former years),
+more than one hundred and fifty thousand pesos have been spent on
+these ships, both for the preparation that has been necessary, and
+for the pay of the commanders, pilots, and other seamen and other
+officials who sail in them, and for the food. Your Majesty will
+never be reimbursed for that sum, for, as no cargo goes in the ships,
+there can be no duties collected; and it is from these duties that
+the funds for these expenses must be obtained, as your Majesty has
+ordered and commanded. Hence, Sire, it becomes necessary to say that
+it seems as if your Majesty had sent the governor to these islands
+to ruin and destroy your royal estate, rather than to increase and
+preserve it. This conclusion, if relief does not come speedily, will
+be seen to be verified with the great loss of all, and the special
+sorrow of us who, as your Majesty's faithful ministers and servants,
+are bound to strive for the increase of your royal estate.
+
+In the past year, 637, because these coasts were being infested by
+the kings of Mindanao and Jolo, with great loss and damage to the
+Christian Indians and your Majesty's vassals, the governor left this
+city with two fine large fleets--the first on February two, and the
+second on December eight. Both were despatched against the advice of
+all the soldiers who were experienced in this country--both because of
+the risk to which the governor exposed his person, and because of the
+so heavy expenses that it was necessary to incur; and furthermore,
+since there are very honorable soldiers in these islands, to whom
+these expeditions can be entrusted with the hope that they will give an
+excellent account of them. And thus he would have avoided a very large
+part of the expense, and even of the loss of very brave soldiers who
+died in both expeditions; for more than four hundred Spaniards died,
+among whom were many persons of high standing [in this colony]. That
+is a loss which ought to be wept with many tears, because of the lack
+that they will create when they will be most necessary. In the first
+expedition, 9,867 pesos were spent from your royal estate; and in the
+second, 47,171 pesos. He has tried and is trying to cover the expense
+of both expeditions by the value of the slaves, and other things of
+little account, which he took as booty in both expeditions; and by
+other communications, which will be seen in your Council, according
+to the relations or certifications which he has given to us. Most
+of it can have but little foundation, as there is nothing more than
+what the governor has been pleased to give. But it will be well to
+consider that although the fifth part of any booty taken belongs
+to your Majesty (as is a fact), he has ordered all the artillery,
+and other war supplies and ammunition to be valued and adjudged as
+part compensation for the expense incurred. That is a thing which,
+according to my understanding, could not be done; for he is attempting
+to persuade your Majesty that he is giving you something. Since that
+is clearly yours by law, there is no reason for [thus] adjudging it,
+under any of the pretexts of which, [to judge] from appearances like
+these, he always avails himself to accredit his own actions.
+
+Beside the building of the church, barracks, and quarters for the
+soldiers, he has constructed other buildings of not inconsiderable
+extent, and of the same necessity and importance as the aforesaid,
+at the royal hospital of this city. He has bought some houses that
+are near it for eight thousand pesos, in order that the chaplain,
+apothecary, and physician may live in them. Your Majesty has
+assigned them a very sufficient remuneration, and they have always
+been contented with it, and have not asked for houses in which to
+live. The governor has also added a room to the said hospital (where
+the religious of St. Francis had their living apartments before his
+arrival), without sense or reason. He has spent a great sum of pesos
+in its building; and a great sum has also been and is being spent
+in the support of the sick of the said hospital--although they were
+supported most abundantly in past years with two thousand five hundred
+or three thousand pesos at the most. Now seven thousand pesos and
+upward are spent, and we cannot see in what this increase consists,
+although we are not ignorant that the sick are less carefully attended
+and nursed than before.
+
+A Portuguese nobleman, an inhabitant of Macan, by name Don Diego de
+Miranda Enriquez, came from that city to this during the former year of
+636, with a quantity of arquebuses, muskets, nails for the ships, and
+rough iron. Having sent for us that we might bargain and pay for it,
+we did so, availing ourselves for that purpose of the recent example
+that we had for it in the previous year, 1635, which was accredited
+and approved by the said governor. Nevertheless, after several months
+the governor fined the factor and me (for we were the ones who made
+the said contract and rendered payment, as the accountant was then
+living in the port of Cavite) without our knowing what crime we had
+committed, in the sum of two thousand one hundred and thirty-three
+pesos, five tomins; for he said that we had not observed his orders
+in the said contract. After he had conferred over the matter with
+your auditors, and they being of the opposite opinion, nevertheless,
+holding his own even to the end, he had us notified of the act imposing
+the said fine. We appealed from it to your Audiencia, where we were
+freed from the prosecution. The said governor was indeed very angry
+at that; and he even gave your auditors to so understand, and that,
+in matters of justice, he even was trying to tie their hands.
+
+At the very beginning of his governorship, the said Don Sebastian
+Hurtado de Corcuera tried to change the inferior employees of the
+tribunal of your royal officials. Among the others whom he appointed
+was the weigher of coins, notwithstanding that we opposed that. For
+your Majesty has been pleased to honor us with your special decrees,
+in which you order that we ourselves choose our employees, so that
+they may be to our satisfaction; and that your governors give their
+titles to those whom we should thus propose to them. [We also opposed
+it] because the said governor ordered us to admit the said weigher
+to the enjoyment and exercise of his office without bonds, although
+all those who had thus far exercised that office had given bonds
+in the sum of four thousand pesos for the security of your royal
+estate, as it is an office that requires great faithfulness because
+of the many and continually-recurring opportunities that present
+themselves for him to make considerable thefts without your royal
+officials being able to put a stop to it. That has been proved to us
+by experience, for, notwithstanding all our efforts in watching him,
+at the end of a year and slightly more (for so long a time did he
+hold the said office) we found that he had stolen more than three
+thousand five hundred pesos from your royal treasury. We began
+a prosecution in your royal Audiencia. The said governor, seeing
+that the weigher was proved to be a criminal by what was enacted,
+and by his confession and deposition, in order that he might not
+be completely exposed, had a memorial presented [to the Audiencia]
+through a father of the Society of Jesus--in which it is stated that
+a man had declared in confession that he was the thief, and that
+the said weigher was not guilty; and had given him a certain number
+of pay-warrants with which to satisfy, by way of restitution, the
+[claim for] three thousand five hundred pesos. The said governor
+ordered that this reparation should be accepted; and although the
+pay-warrants had no justification--as their owners had been dead for
+many years, and the papers contained no cessions or powers by virtue
+of which receipts should be given and signed--we had to receive them,
+because, as they had been examined before the auditor of accounts,
+and attested by him, they were [technically] entirely sufficient, and
+could and ought to be received. Thereupon, the said weigher went scot
+free from prison. The said governor immediately sent him to Macan, in
+order to remove him from the danger that might meet him at any time
+in this city. In this manner, Sire, was so serious a crime as the
+aforesaid punished; and in this wise does the governor protect his
+henchmen, for there is no human strength which can oppose his. This
+is a consideration that causes not a little sorrow to your Majesty's
+servants and ministers; for only that name is left us, for we have
+been stripped, for the sole purpose of being able to depreciate
+and even disaccredit us, of all the power and authority which your
+Majesty was pleased to give us in our titles, and in the ordinances
+and many other decrees. However, I think and trust, God helping, that
+that will not be attained, however vigilant the governor may be; for
+we are and shall be always in your Majesty's service, and hope that,
+as our pious king and sovereign, you will always examine our causes,
+and that you will pity us for the calamities and miseries that we are
+suffering for the sole reason of being so far from your royal presence,
+and that you will take what corrective measures are most pleasing to
+you. With that hope we receive new courage, although in the midst of
+so many perils, to fulfil our obligations, as faithful and grateful
+vassals and ministers of your Majesty, whose royal person may our Lord
+preserve, with the increase of greater and more extensive empires,
+as is necessary to us all. Manila, August 31, 1638.
+
+
+Don Baltasar Ruiz de Escalona
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+BANUELOS Y CARRILLO'S RELATION
+
+
+Relation of the Filipinas Islands, by Admiral Don Hieronimo de Banuelos
+y Carrillo [13]
+
+
+The city of Manila is the chief city of the islands of Lucon, or the
+Filipinas. It lies in a latitude of fourteen degrees thirty minutes,
+is fortified on one side by the sea, and on its land side has a castle
+called Santiago, although that castle furnishes no great defense. The
+artillery of that castle points seaward, in order to prevent the
+entrance of [hostile] vessels--which can, however, enter there,
+without the cannon doing them any great damage. The chief port of
+these islands is called Cavite, and there the ships from Nueva Espana
+are anchored. That port of Cavite serves as a refuge for our sailors;
+it is sheltered from the heavy winds, and very secure. Manila, on the
+contrary, is an open bay, beaten by the north winds. The anchorage
+there is very poor, and the entrance very difficult; but, on the other
+hand, it is very well supplied with all that is necessary for commerce
+and for war. One may say that it serves as a magazine for the richest
+commerce in the world. There is abundance of bread, flesh, and wine
+there; and although the wine is not so good as that of Espana, those
+of the country who are accustomed to it do not hesitate to prefer it
+to that of Goa, or that of Mexico--although those are used only for
+the mass, and that of Espana for the tables of the richest men. The
+Portuguese of Goa also send abundance of provisions there, so that
+they can be bought in Manila at a very good bargain. There are one
+hundred and fifty fires [i.e., households] in Manila. The houses of
+the city are so suitable and those of the country so charming that
+life in those islands is altogether delightful. At one musket-shot
+from the city can be seen the Parian, the lodging of the Sangleys
+or Chinese merchants. There are about twenty thousand of them,
+all merchants whom business has attracted to that place. It is a
+very curious place to see, because of the fine order in which they
+live. Every kind of merchandise has its own separate quarter, and
+those goods are so rare and curious that they merit the admiration
+of the most civilized nations. [14]
+
+Although that Parian is built only of wood, and the Chinese who
+live there have no weapons, we do not fail to keep a strong guard on
+that side. We even have some pieces of artillery pointed toward that
+city, for the Chinese are a very spirited and bold nation. We have
+experienced that heretofore, and are still threatened [with danger]
+in that hour that we are not so closely on our guard. There is no
+Spanish house where nine or ten of these merchants cannot be seen
+every morning, who take their merchandise there; for all the traffic
+passes through their hands, even all that is used for the sustenance
+of the Spaniards. There are some men who say that they mix a slow
+poison in our food, which works its effect chiefly on the women. It
+is a fact that a woman who reaches the age of twenty-six years is
+seldom seen. Those persons add that their intention in doing that is
+to prevent the Spaniards from fortifying themselves more strongly in
+that island, and that the Chinese would drive them out entirely. That
+would be very easy for them, by employing such means, if it were not
+for the interest that they have in the commerce of the silver of Nueva
+Espana. These people have a subtle and universal intelligence. They
+imitate whatever one presents to them, and they make the article
+as well as do those who invented it. The riches of Manila, and the
+felicity of existence there, are steadily decreasing. I shall relate
+here the causes for it, having regard only to the service of God and
+of the king.
+
+The chief cause for the ruin of these islands is the great trade that
+the Sangleys carry on. The king has permitted the inhabitants of the
+Manilas to export a portion of their capital to Nueva Espana. in the
+merchandise of that country. The Spanish inhabitants daily lend their
+names to those Sangleys and to the Portuguese of Macao, so that they
+may enjoy the freedom of that commerce. These people do not attempt
+to hide the fact that they are acting as agents for the inhabitants of
+Mexico; and these last years they sent such a quantity of merchandise
+to Peru and to Nueva Espana that no sale could be found for it. That
+is a hindrance to the voyages of the trading fleet. The king of
+China could build a palace with the silver bars from Peru which have
+been carried to his country because of that traffic, without their
+having been registered, and without the king of Espana having been
+paid his duties, as has been well shown by Dom Pedro de Quiroga y
+Moya. That silver was sent at the account of influential persons, who
+do not reside at the Manilas. The two vessels which left in his time
+paid more duties to the king than all the other ships put together
+which had made that voyage before; that clearly shows the neglect
+of the other officials commissioned to receive the duties from his
+Majesty. They have attempted to conceal this truth, by saying that
+those ships were richer than the others because Dom Sebastian Hurtado
+de Corcuera had written, in the preceding year, that he would not send
+the vessels that year; and that he had even detained and caused the
+unlading of those that had been on the point of sailing on the voyage
+to Acapulco. I do not know his reason for so doing, but I know well
+that he wrote that resolution at the Embocadero of Manila--that is to
+say, eighty leguas from the city--and that without having consulted
+the inhabitants of the Manilas. Those of the country are agreed that
+that delay has been their ruin; for they all know that they cannot
+maintain themselves against the Dutch or against the Mahometans except
+by means of the regular succor that is sent them from Nueva Espana.
+
+The marques de Cadereta [15] came at that time to act as viceroy
+of Nueva Espana. He sent a large reenforcement to the islands very
+opportunely, under command of General Don Andres Cottigllo. The
+latter brought news that Don Pedro de Quiroga had arrived at Mexico to
+inform against the officials of his Majesty, and that he would go to
+Acapulco to inspect the ships and regulate the Chinese commerce. The
+inhabitants of the Manilas and the factors of the Portuguese tried
+to get back their merchandise that they had already laded on the
+vessels, being fearful of that news and that name of visitor. But
+having finally recovered courage, they laded the two vessels that
+the governor had detained the preceding year, which were worth about
+five millions in gold. Nevertheless those of the country affirmed
+that they were not so richly laden as those which had sailed before,
+for one of the chief merchants [16] had not put a single box aboard.
+
+They report another reason for obscuring so apparent a truth. They
+say that Don Pedro de Quiroga had specified among the orders that
+he had drawn up as a remedy for the disorders of the past, that for
+those ships; and that it was he alone who prevented their sailing. But
+he himself says that that is false, and that he had heard that those
+who had encomiendas [Fr., commanderies], and the merchants of Mexico,
+had resorted to entreaties to Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera (for I
+cannot believe that they were in compact with him); and that they had
+represented to him the great quantity of Chinese merchandise then in
+Mexico, and declared that, if new vessels were sent there, a market
+could not be found for that merchandise, and that the merchants of
+Mexico and Nueva Espana would lose a great amount by it.
+
+Don Pedro de Quiroga adds that having learned that the governor of
+the Filipinas had given his word not to have any new vessels sail,
+in order to better carry out his Majesty's service, he had employed
+this expedient--namely, that if they entered the port that year,
+they would enjoy the benefit of the rules which had been made during
+that time; but that, if they came only the following year, they
+would not enjoy these, and that they would pay the king's duties
+in all strictness. That plainly showed that he was advised of the
+promise which the governor of the islands had given to the merchants
+of Mexico, to detain the vessels and the merchandise that ought to
+have been sent that year. The transaction was, in truth, greatly to
+the interest of the inhabitants of Mexico, and of the Spaniards who
+have encomiendas--although to the great prejudice of the islands,
+which cannot get along without the reenforcement which they ought
+to have annually from Mexico; and to the decrease of his Majesty's
+duties, which are an aid in the discharge of the expense for that
+succor. In fine, if the marques de Cadereta had not reenforced the
+islands as powerfully as he did, they would have fallen into extreme
+need. It would be easy for me to show here other consequences of
+that delay of the vessels which Don Juan Cereco y Salamanca had
+prepared to sail that year, as is done every year; and it will not
+be more difficult for me to demonstrate the other damages that we
+suffer in that commerce. The inhabitants of the Manilas have nothing
+on those vessels; their cargoes belong entirely to the Chinese, to
+the Portuguese of Macao, or to the Mexican merchants. If the king
+does not put a stop to it, the Chinese will absorb all the riches of
+Peru, and the subjects of the king in those islands will be forced to
+abandon them. I will go on to represent to your Excellency the other
+disorders in the government of those islands, as far as I have been
+able to learn them in the short time that I have spent there.
+
+The encomiendas are ruined. Formerly the king rewarded soldiers
+with them, and now the islanders, who were formerly assigned under
+those encomiendas, have become our enemies. There has been failure to
+instruct those innocent people in the Catholic faith, and that is the
+only title under which the king of Espana holds that country, which
+does not belong to his patrimony. Instead of making them our friends
+and brothers, we have made them our domestic enemies. We have received
+the Sangleys in their place, with whom the profit of the traffic always
+embroils us. Let one consider what damage has been committed since
+by the inhabitants of the island of Mindanao. They have overrun the
+shores of these islands with their caracoas or little boats, and the
+governor was forced to leave the city in the hands of the Sangleys,
+in order to leave the island and to go to make war on them, where he
+lost more than one hundred and thirty Spaniards, without being able
+to bring the war to a successful end. In this it cannot be said that
+he was not greatly to blame; for one of his officers named Nicolas
+Gonzales, at the first war cry, forced one of their best positions
+without the loss of a single man, whence the governor had been unable
+to drive them with all his forces. [17]
+
+We have also as enemies the people of Jolo and those of Terrenate,
+who are also more to be feared on account of the help that they get
+from the Dutch. They declare themselves neutral, but they help the
+Dutch underhandedly on all occasions. The chiefs of those Indians take
+the title of kings, but they are among the kings who go quite naked
+and who live by their labor. True, those of Macassar, of Cochinchina,
+and of Cambaya, are more powerful. But for all that, it would be enough
+for us, for the little help that we can get out of them, to become the
+arbitrator of their differences, and thus to keep them favorable to our
+side. But since they have seen that we have made this friendship with
+the Sangleys, with the inhabitants of Martavan, of Borneo, and other
+neighboring islands, they have broken off all trade with us, and have
+begun to take all the products of their country to the Dutch, so that
+they do nothing except at their orders. If for that reason also the
+king does not prevent the trade with the Sangleys, the Filipinas are
+lost. I come now to the remedy that can be applied to this disorder.
+
+Among all those one hundred and fifty families who are settled
+at Manila, there are not two who are very rich. My plan would be
+to allow those inhabitants to export Chinese merchandise to the
+value of two hundred and fifty thousand escudos, the greater part
+of which should be raw silk and cotton bolls, so that they could
+be manufactured in this country [i.e., Mexico]. For there is less
+[chance for] trickery in that sort of merchandise than in the stuffs
+manufactured in China, which ought never to be allowed to be taken to
+Manila. The permission of trade to that sum would also be proportioned
+to the ability of the Manila merchants; and they would get more than
+five hundred thousand escudos in return for it, for the profits of
+that trade are exorbitant. Today even, when there is so much of
+this merchandise, four hundred per cent is gained on the poorest
+quality exported. By that means the Spaniards could be employed in
+manufacturing that silk, the textiles would be better, and they would
+secure innumerable other advantages. Accordingly, the inhabitants
+of the Manilas would not charge themselves with the commissions of
+Mexico, and they would get all the profit derived from those islands,
+which is now quite universally in the hands of foreigners. Further, as
+their affairs in the country became more prosperous, they would become
+more interested in its conservation; and they would be more careful
+to have the Indians, who have been assigned to them in encomiendas,
+instructed and held in subjection. They would save what they give
+to their agents in Mexico, who often ruin them. They keep their
+merchandise two or three years, and it has a poor sale in Mexico,
+because of the great quantity that is taken there; and trading only at
+Acapulco, and conducting their own business, they alone would enjoy,
+and that every year, the profits of that traffic.
+
+Fifty thousand escudos could be employed in white mantas, unbleached
+[crues] and of excellent quality; that is a kind of merchandise
+very largely used among the Indians, and Mexico has great need of
+it. That would be the right commerce that ought to be carried on
+by pilots and sailors; for some of it can always be sold, and those
+people are obliged to sell it quickly. Care must be taken that only
+that quantity be carried, and that any surplus be confiscated; and
+the governors and other officials should be very careful in this. In
+order that your Excellency may see that I am not trying to weaken the
+commerce of those islands, as some might believe, I will state here
+that the inhabitants of the Manilas should be allowed to export as
+many shiploads as possible of the products of their country--such as
+wax, gold, perfumes, ivory, and lampotes. Those they would buy from
+the natives of the country, thus preventing them from carrying those
+goods to the Dutch. Thus would the people become friendly, and would
+supply Nueva Espana with that merchandise; and the silver taken to the
+Manilas would not be exported thence. I may be told that the king of
+China does not use that silver to make war on us; but even if it is
+used only to swell his treasury, it is as lost to us as if it were
+at the bottom of the sea. Your Excellency should consider that one
+and one-half millions in gold are sent annually to China. If what I
+have just said be closely observed, the merchandise of the Manilas
+will be sold to good advantage, and the natives of the country will
+become our friends; while their neighbors will leave the Dutch, who
+are deriving heavy profits from them; for there is scarcely a place in
+those islands where the Dutch do not possess a factory. Thus have they
+become the masters, and they give arms to the natives to make war on
+us. Add to all these considerations that the Spaniards inhabiting the
+islands will not be obliged to be continually on their guard because
+of twenty thousand Sangleys or enemies, whom they have in a corner
+of the world where the Spaniards can muster scarcely eight hundred men.
+
+Perhaps your Excellency will be told that, if we break with the
+Sangleys, they will go to live in the island of Formosa, or in some
+other place among the Dutch, and will carry to them the trade that
+they have with us; and that, having enjoyed the trade of Japon as
+conveniently as we have that of the Western Indias, they will still
+carry their merchandise to Nangazaki, the chief port of Japon, from
+which they will also obtain silver. To that I will reply that the
+kingdom of China is so full of merchandise, and the Sangleys are
+so shrewd in commerce, and so keen after gain, that they know what
+quantity of that merchandise is needed by the English, how much by
+the Dutch, and what quantity ought to be sold in all of Japon--and
+that with so great exactness that a tailor, after once seeing the
+figure of a person, decides how much goods is necessary to clothe
+him. They do the same in regard to us, and, knowing that only two
+ships sail annually to Nueva Espana, they generally have in the Parian
+the quantity necessary to lade those ships. If the inhabitants of the
+Manilas had trade with Japon, they would derive great profit from it;
+but a secret judgment of God has broken the communication that we had
+with those islanders, and has given it into the hands of the heretics,
+after having permitted them to destroy our churches there, and their
+having put to fire and sword all the Spaniards or Japanese Christians
+there. Hence we do not believe that a single religious is now left in
+all the country; and the people are compelled, under pain of death,
+to come to denounce those whom they know to be Christians. Our
+religious go there no longer, for it means certain death to them to
+go to Japon. The following is the manner in which that persecution
+was reported.
+
+A Vizcayan captain, named Sebastian, [18] having sailed from the
+port of Acapulco for an island called Ricca doro, [19] was blown by
+a heavy gale to the latitude of that island; and, not being able to
+anchor, put in at Japon, and with the curiosity of a seaman sounded
+the ports of that kingdom. That novel proceeding made the Japanese
+suspicious. They asked an Englishman who was then allied to them what
+could be the design of that Spaniard. He told them that the Spaniards
+were a warlike nation, who were aiming at universal monarchy; that
+they always commenced their conquest by means of the religious; that
+after the religious of that nation had been permitted to preach there,
+and to build churches, they considered the conquest of that kingdom
+as secure; that that vessel had come to reconnoiter the country, and
+the entrance of the ports, and that it would be followed by a great
+army, which would complete that design. At that juncture a tono [20]
+or prominent lord of the country died. The emperor had formerly tried
+to buy from him a house built for recreation; but that lord, who was
+fond of that place, refused to sell it. He was a Catholic, and left it
+at his death to the Jesuits, whereupon the latter thought it best to
+pay their respects to the emperor by offering it to him. That prince
+reflected that what an emperor could not accomplish, the Jesuits his
+subjects had compassed. Putting that reflection with the advice of the
+Englishman, he determined to exterminate the Catholics. That resolution
+was so executed that there are no Christians in Japon, except only the
+Portuguese from Macao. I am too much ashamed to name the conditions
+to which they submit, in order that they may be received there.
+
+Since that time all the trade of that island has fallen into the
+hands of the Dutch, English, Portuguese, and Sangleys, although the
+king of China has forbidden the last named to have any communication
+with the inhabitants of Japon, under penalty of death, because the
+Japanese had formerly revolted against China, of which they had
+formed a part. But for all that, their greed for silver makes them
+go there as they do to the Manilas, so that Japon does not lack any
+of the goods that pass through the hands of those peoples. As for the
+silver, the Dutch do not carry any more to China or to Japon, because
+those countries get all the amount that they can buy by means of the
+Sangleys who live in the Manilas. It would be very advantageous to
+the inhabitants of the Manilas and to his Majesty to break off that
+commerce with the Chinese, and it is unnecessary to say that by that
+means advantageous disposition may be made of the silver of Peru and
+the silks of the Filipinas--for in truth the king does not find there
+his account; the silks would come to Mexico with greater advantage,
+and the islanders and his Majesty would get more profit from it, and
+that at the admission of all informed persons. As for the governor,
+he should possess the following qualities: he should be discreet;
+his distance from Madrid, and his authority as governor, should not
+make him presumptuous, but should serve rather as a check than as
+a cause for vanity; he should be a fine seaman, and very sedulous
+in despatching and making the ships sail every year. All the exports
+should be registered. In order that the islands be better reenforced,
+the ships should be of five hundred toneladas, and they should have
+two decks, better equipped than they have as yet been; for if they are
+poorly equipped they take much time in making their voyage, and have
+been the cause of great expense to his Majesty. Besides, the viceroy of
+Nueva Espana has been unable to make them depart by the first of April,
+as would be necessary. Those vessels ought only to carry seamen. The
+offices of the ships ought not to be sold to merchants, but given
+as a reward to those who have served well at sea. Great disorders
+have happened from that, which was the former custom, and because
+the offices of pilot, boatswain's mate, and steward have been sold.
+
+In the year 1637, when I was about to set out as admiral of the
+vessels that were to take the reenforcements to those islands, I went
+to the port of Acapulco. There I found the vessel "San Juan Bautista,"
+which had come that year from those islands, and which had lost its
+mast on the way. I endeavored to get Don Pedro de Quiroga to advise
+the marques de Cadereta of the poor condition of the masts and other
+rigging of the vessel. He refused to permit it, and compelled me to
+embark, telling me that if we failed to embark by the first day of
+the month of April, we would run the risk of losing our voyage. While
+at sea, I asked the boatswain's mate for an inventory of the sails
+and rigging. I found that there were no spare sails, but one single
+cable, and one other old cable, which was used to make fast the
+pieces of artillery that were rolling about the ship. Ordering him
+to bring me also the inventory of what there was when they left the
+islands, I found that it had been equipped with three spare sails,
+five cables, and a quantity of rigging. He answered me that the sea
+had carried away the sails and that the ship had lost its cables as
+they left San Bernardino. Without pressing him further, he confessed
+to me that he had used the money that had been given him for that
+purpose in buying merchandise, in order to discharge a debt of three
+thousand escudos that he had paid for his post of boatswain, but
+that he had not found his account in that merchandise. I endeavored
+to punish him. He appealed to the commander-in-chief, and the latter
+ordered me not to prosecute him until I should have arrived at the
+Manilas. At the Manilas he was excused, because they said that he had
+paid three thousand escudos, although he had made the king lose more
+than sixty thousand. Those who furnish the provisions for the crew put
+in food of poor quality. The pilots cram their room at the stern with
+merchandise, thus endangering the vessel. Had I encountered a capful
+of wind during that voyage, I could scarcely have finished it. I had
+to take a capstan at Maribeles to lift my anchor, and to make the port
+of Cabite, which is three leguas from that place. Thus for the twenty
+thousand escudos that is drawn from the sale of those offices, thirty
+thousand are lost, and the fleet is in danger of being lost--which
+means, of losing those islands. It is not sufficient to give the
+offices to sailors who deserve them; it is not at all necessary to
+compel them to perform the functions of soldiers when they have no
+inclination for it, or to punish them when they gamble, as is done.
+
+It is of great importance to have galleys on these coasts; that is
+the means of keeping away from them the Dutch, and the Indians from
+Mindanao and Jolo--who do not cease to be hostile to the Spaniards,
+although they have neither courage nor discipline; for one Spaniard has
+been seen to put twenty of their caracoas to flight with only one shot
+from his musket. The enemy most to be feared are the Dutch, who have
+taken possession of that sea. It is easy to manage the oared vessels
+of that country, and they have been used in several emergencies to
+tow the vessels, which otherwise would have been in danger of being
+wrecked. Besides, those boats are more suitable for a sea like that,
+full of islands, than vessels with high freeboard. It would also be
+very much to the point to have work done in Camboya in the building of
+new vessels, as the wood of those parts, and that of Angely, resist
+the seaworms and decay better than other woods, and especially those
+of the Filipinas.
+
+In the year 1637, when I arrived at the islands, there were no
+vessels ready for Nueva Espana. They were obliged to send a small
+vessel of one hundred toneladas to advise the marques de Cadereta
+of their wretched condition, and to entreat him to send the usual
+reenforcement--notwithstanding the prohibition of the commerce with
+Peru, and their knowledge that there were no vessels at Acapulco. That
+showed how important it is to be continually building vessels for the
+Filipinas, and for the governor to be a seaman rather than a soldier
+of the Low Countries. It is also important for the governor and the
+archbishop to live in harmony. The spiritual government in these
+countries is the one thing of greater consequence than the political
+government, because of the scandal that the Indians receive from it. It
+is also important that those sent by the viceroy be men of merit and
+service, and that they be well treated in the islands. The observation
+of all the above points will be of use to us in keeping off the Dutch,
+who are the most terrible enemy that we have; and who will become
+absolute masters of the Manilas, if they can attain their ends. Espana,
+by observing those things, will triumph over its enemies. For my part,
+I will fulfil my duty as a subject by doing my utmost for the service
+of my master, and for the welfare of my country; and at the same time
+I shall discharge my obligation toward your Excellency of serving you.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+GLORIOUS VICTORIES AGAINST THE MOROS OF MINDANAO
+
+
+To the master-of-camp, Don Inigo Hurtado de Corcuera, knight of the
+Order of Santiago: [21]
+
+The despatch-boat which this year arrived from the Filippinas Islands
+at Acapulco, a port of this Nueva Espana, was destitute of the silks
+and other costly goods that the ships are accustomed to bring each
+year from China, for it carried nothing of that sort. Nevertheless,
+it came richly laden, with the news of the happy and fortunate
+successes of the arms of Spain in that archipelago, directed by the
+valor and prudence of Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera, governor and
+captain-general there for his Majesty, and a worthy brother of your
+Grace. I received in all many different relations--although all of
+them agreed, for truth is always one--from different persons, well
+worthy of confidence, both ecclesiastic and secular. Every one--not
+only the citizens of this great City of Mexico, the capital of this
+kingdom, but those of all the other cities and towns--desired to see
+these letters, and made urgent requests for them. To satisfy the
+desires of so many, and give them pleasure, it was the opinion of
+many that they should be printed. The truth is, that I was perplexed
+and in doubt as to which one to use, because, as I have said, there
+were several. After careful consideration I decided to print one by
+Father Marcelo Francisco Mastrillo, a letter written to Father Juan
+de Salazar, provincial of the Society of Jesus in those islands,
+signed by Father Marcelo himself and sent to me. It gives a detailed
+account of every event. No one could give a better account than the
+father himself, for he was a witness of everything that happened, as
+he always accompanied Don Sebastian with the standard of St. Francis
+Xavier. In the simplicity and sincerity with which he recounts these
+things, the truth shines more resplendent; so it seemed best not
+to alter his style. In order that it may be better known who this
+servant of God is, we will describe the miracle wrought upon him by
+our father St. Francis Xavier in the city of Naples, and the occasion
+of his journey to the Filipinas and his stay in Mindanao. We shall give
+some information about the latter island, of the hostility which those
+Mahometans have displayed for so many years to the Spaniards, and of
+the friendly and subject Indians. We shall also give a description
+of the naval battle which preceded the expedition to Mindanao. Then
+we shall insert the letter of Father Marcelo, and conclude this
+document with a description of the triumphal demonstration with
+which Don Sebastian Hurtado was received in the city of Manila,
+the rejoicings in that city, the thanks rendered to our Lord, and
+the honors paid to those who died in the war, so that there will
+be a complete account of everything. Besides the aforesaid reasons,
+I was impelled to this on account of the obligations of our Society
+of Jesus to Don Sebastian Hurtado (and especially by my own); for we
+are always sensible of these, and our hearts will always keep them
+alive, with perpetual acknowledgments. Besides, it seems to me that
+one could not give your Grace a richer present, a more precious jewel,
+an ornament of greater worth, than the exploits and triumphs of such
+a brother, in whom one finds zeal for religion and the service of
+God, appearing in all he does. The prudence with which he governs
+his province, the unwearied solicitude with which he orders affairs,
+the disinterestedness with which he serves the king our lord--well
+worthy of the favor which his Majesty has shown him (in making him a
+member of his Council of War, and sending him two [appointments in]
+orders for his two nephews), and of those which I expect his Majesty
+will yet grant him; the valor with which he defends those islands, the
+grand courage with which he exposes himself to the greatest perils,
+although his person is of such importance: all these are especially
+praiseworthy, to say nothing of the admirable example by which he
+encourages his soldiers to great undertakings, and the compassion
+with which he watches over the Indians who were so harassed by so
+many enemies. In short, your Grace will see in Don Sebastian Hurtado a
+copy of your own holy zeal, prudence, care, disinterestedness, valor,
+magnanimity, and many other virtues conspicuous in your Grace's own
+heart. In him your Grace will see a true brother--as Tulio [22] said
+(book 3, epistle 7), Frater quasi fere alter, "a brother is naught
+else than a counterpart of the other brother;" so that they are hardly
+two, but rather one soul divided between two bodies, as Quintilian
+said (Declamation 321), [23] Quid est aliud fraternitas quam divisus
+spiritus? [i.e., "What else is brotherhood but a divided soul?"] So
+that your Grace's own valor, prudence, piety, and religion and Don
+Sebastian Hurtado's are one; from that which God inspired in you,
+may be inferred that of Don Sebastian; and in the virtues of this
+great cavalier and captain-general shine those of your Grace, to whom
+I offer a thousand congratulations on the triumphs of so glorious a
+brother, whose exploits I offer to your Grace, and humbly place in
+your illustrious hands. May our Lord watch over your Grace as this
+your humble chaplain and servant desires. Mexico, February [25, 1638].
+
+
+Diego de Bobadilla
+
+[Folios 1-9 of Bobadilla's work are occupied with a long and detailed
+account of a miraculous cure experienced by Father Mastrilli, and its
+result in sending him to labor in the foreign missions. Its substance
+is as follows: In 1633-34, Mastrilli was in Naples, and assisted, as
+a priest, at one of the altars erected for a solemn feast in honor
+of the Virgin Mary. After the ceremonies were over, Mastrilli was
+accidentally wounded in the head by a hammer dropped from a workman's
+hand. His life was despaired of; but an image of St. Francis Xavier,
+miraculously endowed with speech, promised to restore his health if he
+would go to the Indias. Mastrilli vowed to do this, and to renounce
+country, friends, and all else that he held dear, for the sake of
+that employ; and the next morning found him cured and sound. In
+fulfilment of his vow he went to Spain, and set out for Japan; but
+(as related in previous documents) he was obliged to land at Manila,
+and accompanied Corcuera to Mindanao.]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+AN ACCOUNT OF THE GREAT ISLAND OF MINDANAO, AND THE HOSTILITIES
+COMMITTED BY THOSE MOHAMMEDANS IN THE FILIPPINAS ISLANDS.
+
+
+The great island of Mindanao is one of the largest in the archipelago
+of the Filippinas Islands, which seem to be almost innumerable; and it
+has even been said that there are over eleven thousand of them. [24]
+I believe that if one counts islands large and small, inhabited and
+desert, the above estimate is not far from the truth. In size, Mindanao
+rivals the island of Manila, the chief and head of the others, for it
+is almost three hundred leguas in circumference. Esteban Rodriguez de
+Figueroa, one of the first leaders in the conquest of those islands,
+and one of the most valorous soldiers who has been in them, made an
+agreement with his Majesty to conquer this island at his own cost and
+charges, and subject it to his royal crown--his Majesty awarding him as
+tributary vassals, ten thousand of the first Mindanaos whom he should
+subdue and choose for himself, and granting him other favors which
+he sought. His Majesty accepted the agreement; and, with the title of
+governor and captain-general, Don Esteban assembled at his own cost a
+goodly army of Spaniards, which (as I have heard) numbered about four
+hundred, and over four thousand Indians. They were all embarked in a
+fleet of caracoas, which are oared vessels much used in the Filippinas,
+carrying from fifty to one hundred rowers apiece. There are larger
+ones, which are called juangas, and carry from one hundred and twenty
+to one hundred and thirty rowers. They sailed from the island of Oton,
+where the fleet was fitted out and collected. They reached Mindanao
+and the army disembarked. When the enemy saw such a force, they began
+to flee, and a victory was declared for Espana; but our satisfaction
+was soon disturbed, for a wretched Mindanao audaciously resolved--it
+is said, after he had taken opium, with which these people intoxicate
+themselves--to assassinate our captain-general, even though he should
+die in the attempt. The deed was to be done with his campilan, a
+weapon something like a cutlass, with a lead weight at the hilt. The
+weight makes its blows so terrible that it will cleave a man through
+the middle. He hid in some bushes near the road on which our men
+were marching in triumph. When General Esteban Rodriguez de Figueroa
+reached a place abreast of the bush where the Mindanao was hidden,
+the latter leaped out unexpectedly and struck the general so fierce a
+blow on his head with his campilan that it cleft his skull from ear to
+ear. I can account myself a witness of this, because, although I did
+not see that event, and did not go to the Filippinas until many years
+after, yet in 1632 I saw the skull, when they disinterred the bones
+of this famous but unfortunate captain from the old church of our
+college at Manila (which he founded, and where his body was brought
+for burial), to transfer them to the church which we have recently
+built. The skull shows very plainly the cruel blow of the campilan,
+so that even I said, as I held it in my hands, with great grief,
+"Our founder will not deny the blow of the campilan." Those who
+accompanied our general killed the Mindanao on the spot, without much
+difficulty. They sounded the retreat, and abandoned their pursuit of
+the enemy. This was the origin and the beginning of the misfortunes
+and calamities which for so many years have caused us so much sorrow in
+the Filippinas. Our army, having lost its leader and captain-general,
+did nothing further. The Spaniards retreated, and fortified themselves
+in a place on that river, where they remained in garrison; and Father
+Juan del Campo, a fervent man and a great minister of the gospel,
+gave instruction to several villages, until he died there. Many of
+the Indians along this river had rendered obedience, and were paying
+tribute to his Majesty. Afterward the garrison moved to another place,
+called La Caldera, where the Spaniards remained several years. Although
+they made no conquest of that country, they served as a check to
+the enemy, because the latter could not sail out with their fleets
+on plundering expeditions. As Don Pedro de Acuna afterward decided,
+when he was governor in the Filippinas, this garrison was withdrawn
+from La Caldera, which resulted in the utter ruin of the islands,
+because land and sea remained in the possession of the enemy.
+
+At that time the island was ruled by a Moro named Buysan who claimed
+the entire seacoast as his. Another Moro, named Silongan, ruled the
+well-populated district along the river. These two Moros conspired
+together, and called to their aid other friends, and even in certain
+ways their subjects--as those of the island of Sanguil and Sarragan;
+and the Caragas, who inhabit the further [i.e., from Manila] shores of
+this same island of Mindanao, which from that side faces our islands
+of Pintados. They gathered great fleets of caracoas and jungas,
+which at times numbered over one hundred and even one hundred and
+fifty vessels--arming them with several large guns, many culverins,
+a large number of arquebuses and muskets and many other arms; and
+manning them so heavily, that they could land six to eight thousand
+soldiers. In this way masters of the land and sea, they infested the
+high seas, capturing all our ships that navigated those waters, robbing
+and burning towns, sacking churches, carrying off the ornaments and
+consecrated vessels, committing a thousand desecrations on the sacred
+images, breaking them into pieces and insulting them, and capturing
+Christian Indians in so great number that it would break one's heart
+to tell of it; for one time those whom they carried away numbered over
+two thousand and five hundred. The Spaniards had no better fortune; for
+some were killed, and others carried away as slaves. In the year 1616,
+they set sail with a powerful fleet, after effecting an alliance with
+the Dutch, who came with ten galleons, and entered the bay of Manila
+on All Saints' day. They were, however, defeated and destroyed in the
+following April, 1617, by our fleet under the leadership of General
+Don Juan Ronquillo. While the Dutch aided the Mindanaos, the latter
+worked dreadful havoc, capturing, massacring, robbing, and burning
+everything there was. They came as far as Balayan, a large and rich
+town on the island of Manila, and not far from the city itself. They
+attacked the shipyards at Pantao, where a galleon and a patache were
+in process of construction, and indeed almost finished. These they
+burned, and murdered almost thirty Spaniards--among them Captain
+Arias Giron and Captain Don Juan Pimentel, who were in command of
+the yards. Others, besides many Indians, they made prisoners. They
+captured from us a large quantity of firearms and some artillery,
+and inflicted on us great damage. Even the fathers and ministers of
+the gospel have not been exempt; for, on the last occasion of which I
+have spoken, they captured and murdered two Franciscan fathers. Before
+that, on other occasions, they captured Father Hurtado, who was kept
+a long time in captivity in Mindanao, and Father Pasqual de Acuna,
+who was a prisoner at Caraga and still lives. Before and since the
+time of his captivity, he has labored gloriously for the space of
+almost forty years in the islands of Pintados--teaching those Indians
+until his great age and his failing strength obliged him to retire,
+and end his life in the fulness of his years, devoting himself to
+God alone. The other fathers and ministers crossed the mountains
+to escape the cruelty of these Mahometans, enduring great hunger,
+hardship, and distress.
+
+To King Buysan succeeded Cachil Corralat, his son, who with
+great sagacity and cunning set about making himself much more
+powerful. Several times he made peace with the Spaniards, but his word
+was ever a Moro's. It was soon known that he could not be trusted,
+for he made and broke treaties with equal readiness. He infested the
+seas with his fleets, sending out his own as he did in the year 1633,
+when he sent out a large fleet which plundered and burned several large
+and wealthy cities on this very island of Manila. But where he did most
+harm was in our island of Pintados; for in the town of Ogmuc alone
+he slew or made prisoners more than two hundred people--children and
+women, as well as men. They captured the minister there, Father Juan
+del Carpio of our Society, and cut him into pieces, of which his head
+was the smallest. Cachil Corralat gave orders to his followers not to
+carry to him a single father alive, but to slay them, in fulfilment
+of a vow which he had made to Mahomet during a serious sickness,
+not to leave a father alive if his health were restored. God, in His
+just judgment and to punish us, chose to grant his prayer.
+
+Other Mahometans, their neighbors, joined the Mindanaos--tribes from
+the island of Jolo, who at one time paid tribute and then rebelled,
+killing all the Spaniards. Although that island is very small,
+and there cannot be more than three thousand men able to bear arms,
+yet they are very valiant, and they have very plainly proved it to
+us when they have sailed forth to scour the high seas--especially
+one chief, called Dato Achen, who can be compared with the most
+destructive African pirates. This man once attacked a shipyard which
+we had established in the province of Camarines, in which several
+galleons were being built. After the usual robbery and burning, he
+slew or made prisoners many Spaniards and Indians. He carried away
+artillery and firearms, with which he strengthened his defenses in his
+own country. He overran the Pintados Islands and did a great deal of
+damage there. At Cabalian he captured Father Juan Domingo Vilancio
+of our Society, a native of Luca--a holy man, and known as such by
+Indians and Spaniards, and even by the Moros themselves. As such,
+the latter revered him and did not ill-treat him in their own country,
+where they carried him. While efforts were being made for his ransom,
+it was our Lord's pleasure to give him complete liberty by freeing
+him from the prison of this [earthly] body, and giving him in heaven
+his reward for his faithful labors. He toiled thirty years or more in
+the conversion of the pagans, to the remarkable edification of all;
+and he displayed heavenly sincerity, which secured him the love of
+God and men. The Moros buried him on their island of Jolo. Although
+we have asked for the body, they will not give it up, saying that
+they would rather keep it because it is holy (for sanctity and virtue
+are pleasing even to Moros and infidels). They allege other things
+in proof of his sanctity, which I shall not refer to, because they
+are not thoroughly investigated. The Lord will make them clear later,
+to His own glory. Returning, however, to the Joloans, they are grown
+insolent with their fortunate successes, no less on land than on the
+sea; for, although we have gone there three times with powerful fleets,
+they have come off with credit and singing victory. In short, we have
+returned without accomplishing anything. There was one time, however,
+when Don Christobal de Lugo, lieutenant for the captain-general in
+the Pintados Islands, went there with a fleet, and sacked and burned
+the principal town, and did considerable damage; but they have always
+escaped, and repaid to us their losses. They put their trust in a
+hill very difficult of access, which they have well fortified with
+artillery, to which they retreat whenever they are attacked.
+
+The evils that are suffered at the hands of these two enemies, the
+Mindanaos and the Joloans, never were avenged, because, although
+the governors sent out fleets after them, they did not encounter
+the pirates on account of the great multitude of islands in the
+archipelago; or else, if our ships did meet them, the Moros escaped,
+for their vessels are remarkably swift and so have a great advantage
+over ours. Then, to remedy so grievous injuries, Don Juan Cereco
+Salamanca, who was then governor of the Filippinas, in the beginning
+of the year 1634, overcoming remarkable difficulties which arose,
+with a holy zeal for the service of God and of the king our lord,
+ordered a position to be occupied on the island of Mindanao, at a
+place which they call Samboangan. There he began to raise a fort which
+should be a check to the Mindanaos and the Joloans, who came past
+that place when they sailed forth on plundering expeditions. Although
+they could pass us by standing out to sea, or in the darkness of the
+night, without being seen from our fort, they would not so lightly
+dare to leave behind their houses and lands with the Spaniard so near
+a neighbor--for the latter could do them great injury by carrying
+off their children and wives, and all their possessions, if their
+towns were left unprotected when the men went away in their fleets;
+or at least the Spaniards could await them on their return and knock
+them in the head. The Moro king, Cachil Corralat, was much disturbed
+at the proximity of the Spaniards; since now he could not make raids
+in safety, as before; and he called upon the Joloans, the Borneans
+and the Camucones to sail from various points to plunder our island,
+which they did.
+
+The Camucones are a nation inhabiting some islands subject to the king
+of Burney. Sometimes alone, and sometimes in company with the Borneans,
+they have infested our seas with their fleets, pillaging our islands,
+capturing many Indians, and killing all the Spaniards whom they took,
+because they did not wish to carry these alive to their own country;
+accordingly they granted no Spaniard his life. They are a base and
+very cruel people. These robbers began as petty thieves, with a few
+small vessels; but with the captures which they have been continually
+making, they have grown so powerful that they send out great fleets
+upon the sea, and do a great deal of damage. In the year 1625, while
+the archbishop Don Francisco Miguel Garcia Serrano was visiting the
+district of Bondoc, these Camucones attacked the town one morning, and
+the archbishop had no little trouble in escaping over the mountains;
+they stole whatever they could carry away, with the silver and the
+pontifical vestments. That same year, they captured Father Juan de
+las Missas of our Society, who had come from Tayabas to preach and was
+returning to the island of Marinduque, which was in his charge. They
+killed the father, and captured all who were aboard his ship, except
+perhaps some one who escaped by swimming. They did much more damage,
+continuing their depredations up to the year 1636, when, as I said,
+they sailed with a large fleet, at the solicitation of the king Cachil
+Corralat. They entered so far among the islands, that from them they
+sailed out upon the high sea--an act of great daring. They arrived
+at and plundered Palapag, a mission of our Society. They rounded Cape
+Espiritu Santo, and captured over a hundred Christians at Baco. There
+they divided into two bands. One passed over to Albay, on the island
+of Manila, where they were met by the alcalde-mayor, Captain Mena,
+of the Order of St. George, with several Spaniards and six Franciscan
+friars. The Spaniards pressed the Camucones so hard that seven of
+their caracoas went ashore on the island of Capul, where many of their
+Christian captives were set free. The natives of the said island slew
+some of the Camucones. Three of their caracoas they abandoned on the
+sea, going aboard others to make their escape more easily. Not one
+of our men was killed in this encounter, except that one Franciscan
+father was wounded by a musket-bullet, and afterwards died of his
+wound. The other band went out to sea again, coasting the island of
+Ybabao. They entered a town called Bangahun and made prisoners there
+more than one hundred other Christians. This troop fought a battle with
+a caracoa full of soldiers from the city of Zebu, who inflicted some
+injury upon the Moros, killing and capturing some. These Camucones,
+returning afterward to their own country, while they were coasting the
+island of Panay, were overtaken by a sudden storm, which drove three of
+their caracoas ashore. Those who escaped with their lives were captured
+by the natives, and many of them are now on galleys at the port of
+Cavite. Other caracoas stealthily ventured to the Calamianes Islands,
+where some Spaniards came out to meet them, and captured two of their
+ships, and set free twenty captives from the island of Mindoro who
+were among their prisoners. Fifteen other caracoas were coasting the
+island of Paragua in company; and, two days before arriving at Borney,
+they encountered thirty caracoas of Joloans, who had recently quarreled
+with the Borneans. The Joloans attacked the Camucones and Borneans,
+captured their fifteen caracoas, and made prisoners many Camucones and
+more than one hundred of the Christians carried off by the Camucones;
+these latter were ransomed at Samboangan, at a moderate rate.
+
+After these pirates Cachil Corralat sent his fleet, which did
+considerable damage in our islands. In order to stop it and check
+all these enemies, the governor, Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera,
+decided to go forth in person and make an expedition to Mindanao, to
+begin the punishment of this enemy, because they were most powerful--as
+we shall soon see, describing first the naval victory given us by
+our Lord over the fleet despatched hither by Cachil Corralat.
+
+[The next part of this compilation is an account of the naval
+victory over Tagal's fleet in December, 1636; it is practically
+the same as that which we have already presented in our VOL. XXVII,
+although rewritten and much abridged for publication. Then follows
+Mastrilli's letter to his provincial (June 2, 1637) which also we
+have published; Bobadilla states that he reproduces it verbatim, save
+for the correction of "a few words which are not quite in accord with
+our ordinary language, as he was a native of the city of Naples." The
+document ends with a description of Corcuera's triumphal entry into
+Manila, evidently compiled (with some additional details) from Juan
+Lopez's letter on that subject, already presented to our readers.]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ROYAL ORDERS AND DECREES, 1638
+
+
+REMOVAL OF NEGROES FROM MANILA
+
+The King. To Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera, knight of the Order of
+Alcantara, my governor and captain-general of the Filipinas Islands,
+and president of my royal Audiencia resident therein. In a letter
+which you wrote me on the last of June, 1636, you declare that shortly
+after your arrival at those islands, that city petitioned you to have
+the free negroes and the freedmen, who number about four hundred or
+five hundred, removed from it, because of the disorders that they
+were creating within the city, as well as the thefts that they were
+committing in union with the slaves--the former receiving and taking
+to other places to sell what these said negroes had stolen. You
+declare that that city demanded that the negroes should go to live
+nine leguas away from there, but that that measure has not seemed
+advisable; and the fathers of the Society gave you an islet which they
+possess in the middle of the river, in order that they might settle
+the negroes there, with the obligation to give them instruction--but
+there would be no obligation to give the fathers any stipend for
+that purpose beyond what is given them from the communal fund of the
+Sangleys whom they have in Santa Cruz. Those Sangleys also render me
+aid by giving me six reals per annum, besides the general license,
+so that they may be allowed to live there with the fathers. They
+number from about eight hundred to one thousand Chinese. The fathers
+minister to those who have become Christians from this number, as
+well as to the negroes--the latter being separated from the former
+by an arm of the river. Also the Chinese pay all his salary to the
+alcalde-mayor from their communal fund, which has been a saving to
+my royal treasury. You declare that, in your desire to economize
+and avoid so heavy expenses, you have deemed it best to give the
+commander of artillery, who receives seven hundred pesos monthly
+salary for his duties, the office of alcalde-mayor of the Parian;
+for during the time while he should hold that office, there would
+be an annual saving of seven thousand two hundred pesos to my royal
+treasury. You also ordered the master-of-camp, Don Lorenzo de Olaso,
+to go to live at the port of Cavite with his company, and to serve
+there as castellan, chief justice, and governor of that port, with the
+same salary as at present, as you say that the sargento-mayor would
+be sufficient for you in that city. The above you reported to me, so
+that I might understand it; and you say that by the aforesaid measures
+and your method of governing, and provided that no one steals from
+my royal treasury, you will entirely clear my royal treasury of debt,
+and govern those islands from the proceeds of them. The matter having
+been examined in my Council, it has been judged best to tell you that
+it is thought that you will have given careful consideration to the
+removal of the free negroes and freedmen from that city and their
+settlement on the islet which was given you by the brethren of the
+Society of Jesus; and the rest that you mention in the said letter
+touching the said matter is neither approved nor rejected here,
+for the present. It is to be feared, however, that those negroes,
+having been removed from the city, and settled with the Chinese on
+an uninhabited island, may commit more serious damage. Consequently,
+you shall watch carefully so that you may remedy what needs correction;
+and you are to note that in the matter of government, the best is not
+[always] the easiest to execute, nor its results satisfactory. Hence,
+for that reason, no new thing can be entered upon suddenly; and you
+will, therefore, not carry out the execution of these new measures
+until you shall have first reported to me all the things that you shall
+see to be for my service, so that orders as to your course of action
+may be issued to you. In the meanwhile, you shall not carry out your
+proposed change of the persons of the commander of artillery and of
+the master-of-camp, Don Lorenzo de Olaso; and I charge and order you,
+that, jointly with the session [of the Audiencia], you shall inform
+me, both in this regard and in others, of what changes should be made
+from the past government, so that in everything decision may be made
+as to what measures may be taken.
+
+
+I the King
+
+By order of the king our sovereign:
+
+Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon
+
+
+
+
+RESTRICTING THE RELIGIOUS ORDERS
+
+The King. To Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera, knight of the Order of
+Alcantara, my governor and captain-general of the Filipinas Islands,
+and president of my Audiencia therein: your letter of June 30, 636,
+touching ecclesiastical matters, has been examined in my royal Council
+of the Yndias, and answer is [hereby] made you.
+
+You say that the religious of the Order of St. Augustine need to be
+reformed, for they pay no heed to the bulls of his Holiness, or the
+decrees despatched in regard to the rotation; and that it would be
+advisable not to give them any more religious for eight years--both
+because they have many, and because of the causes that you mention for
+such measure. I have thought best to charge you to have the rule for
+rotation put in force strictly, without allowing more religious in each
+mission station [doctrina] than, in accordance with my royal patronage,
+shall be necessary for it; and that the others be occupied in missions
+[misiones] and in preaching, for which purpose they were sent.
+
+In regard to what you write me concerning the advanced age of the
+archbishop of those islands (who is so aged that his hands and head
+tremble), namely, that it would be best to give him an assistant;
+and that you are arranging to give such assistant an income of two
+thousand pesos in addition to the four thousand pesos enjoyed by the
+said archbishop, without taking that sum from my royal treasury, or
+from my vassals: I charge you to explain to me the method or means by
+which you can get that money without damage to my royal treasury and
+the vassals who serve me, so that, if it be worth while to allow it,
+you may execute it.
+
+So that the Order of St. Dominic, and the other orders resident in
+those islands, may live with the regulation and good example that
+is proper, and so that they may not increase the number of mission
+stations granted them by my decrees, you shall allow no new elections
+in them, which shall not be in harmony with my patronage. With
+the advice of the archbishop, you shall endeavor to unite some of
+the stations; and in those that shall be newly founded, you shall
+endeavor likewise to have secular priests introduced, if you find
+them intelligent and competent. Madrid. September 2, 1638.
+
+
+I the King
+
+By order of the king our sovereign:
+
+Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon
+
+
+
+
+APPOINTMENT OF SECULAR PRIESTS TO MISSIONS
+
+The King. To Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera, knight of the Order of
+Alcantara, my governor and captain-general of the Filipinas Islands,
+and president of my royal Audiencia therein: in one of the sections of
+a letter which that city [of Manila] wrote to me on June 27 of 636, it
+is stated that there are two colleges in that city--one that of Santo
+Tomas, with religious of the Order of St. Dominic; and the other that
+of San Josef, with religious of the Society of Jesus--both of which
+have possessed, for several years past, authority to confer degrees
+in all the sciences. It is also declared that, with this opportunity,
+many students have excelled in those studies, and especially various
+sons of poor citizens, who have graduated in all the degrees; but
+that, since they have no beneficed curacies on which they can depend
+for support, their studies bring them no advantage. It is said that
+this is caused by certain religious orders, who have acquired from
+the archbishop, bishops, and governors the aggrandizement of their
+orders with many benefices which formerly were administered by secular
+priests; and that this might be remedied if I would decree that all
+the benefices which have been annexed to the religious orders during
+the last twenty years should be restored to the [secular] clergy, and
+that edicts should be issued in the form which I have ordained. This
+matter having been considered in my royal Council of the Indias, I
+have thought it best to issue the present, by which I command you that
+in the new missions that shall be established, you shall--except when
+they are in a territory assigned to the religious--it being understood
+that there are virtuous secular priests, take pains to appoint them
+to such missions; for such is my will. [Madrid, October 2, 1638.]
+
+
+I the King
+
+By command of the king our sovereign:
+
+Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon
+
+
+
+
+COMPENSATION TO NUNS OF ST. CLARE
+
+The King. To Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera, knight of the Order of
+Alcantara, my governor and captain-general of the Filipinas Islands,
+and president of my royal Audiencia therein: in a letter which the
+abbess and nuns of the convent of St. Clare in that city wrote me
+on the thirtieth of June, 636, they make the following statements:
+That the said convent was established so that they could live in it,
+with all decorum and humility, with certain alms from the citizens;
+and their house and church were built close to the wall of the said
+city that lies next the river--a place that seemed most separated from
+the business quarter, and so closely shut in that little save the
+sky could be seen. That in front, on the other side of the street,
+is the royal hospital for the Spaniards, which from the time of its
+foundation has been administered by the religious of St. Francis;
+and that in the hospital the religious who was vicar of the said
+convent [of St. Clare], and administered the holy sacraments to the
+nuns, had a cell, and they helped to support this religious out of
+the alms bestowed upon them. That you, without any occasion or just
+cause, drove out the religious from the said hospital by force and
+violence, with armed soldiers--saying that the hospital should be
+managed by a secular priest whom you took thither with you. That the
+said vicar was thereby compelled to find shelter in the convent of
+St. Francis, which is at a great distance from that of St. Clare;
+and consequently, with the inconveniences of the excessive heat
+and the violence of the rains in the wet season, he cannot go to
+hear confessions and administer the holy sacraments at St. Clare,
+especially at night. That their greatest annoyance is, that you are
+constructing in the hospital a ward for convalescents, on the side
+that faces the said convent; and that it is so high that it looks
+down upon the convent, notwithstanding the enclosure of the latter,
+and from the windows of that ward may be seen the beds of the nuns
+in their infirmary and dormitory--a matter which requires thorough
+reparation. They say that on the other side of their house is a
+space between the houses and the wall (which was formerly a street),
+which is a passage to the convent, and is useful to it; but that you
+have closed this way, and are building another house, which abuts
+upon their own ground-plot, for barracks and stables for the cavalry
+troops. They entreat me that I will be pleased to command that a check
+be placed upon this undertaking, and that, considering their poverty,
+I order you to pay them the amount of one hundred and twenty pesos
+in certified pay-warrants on the treasury there, which they hold,
+which sum will be a great benefit and charity to them. The complaint
+of these nuns has been considered in my royal Council of the Indias,
+and the damage which they say has been caused to them by closing up
+the street and by their being in sight of the ward that was built in
+the cells [at the hospital], and by the stables and barracks that have
+been placed so close to their house. I have therefore thought it best
+to ordain and command you, as I do, that you shall not in any way cause
+injury or inconvenience to the said nuns; and that the pay-warrants
+which they say they hold, you shall cause to be paid--provided they
+are duly certified--in their due value and at such time as the said
+nuns desire; for such is my will. [Madrid, October 2, 1638.]
+
+
+I the King
+
+By command of the king our sovereign:
+
+Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon
+
+
+
+
+REGULATING THE SEMINARY OF SANTA POTENCIANA
+
+The King. To the president and auditors of my royal Audiencia resident
+in the city of Manila of the Filipinas Islands: it has been reported in
+my royal Council of the Yndias that there is in that city a seminary
+named Santa Potenciana, of which I am patron; that it was established
+for orphan girls, and for the reception of married women when their
+husbands are occupied in my service in various parts; and that for
+some years the custom has been introduced of sheltering in the said
+seminary certain women who live scandalously. [I am also told] that,
+since this is of so great service to God our Lord, you, my president,
+have given orders to the mother rector of the said seminary not to
+receive in the seminary any woman sent by the archbishop of that
+church, or by his provisor; and that no one of its inmates may
+leave it. It has been judged best to order you (as I do hereby)
+to take what measures appear to you most advisable in this matter,
+considering all ends. Given in Madrid, November eight, one thousand
+six hundred and thirty-eight.
+
+
+I the King
+
+
+Countersigned by Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon, and signed by the
+members of the Council.
+
+[Endorsed: "To the royal Audiencia of Manila, in regard to the order
+given by the president of the Audiencia to the mother rector of the
+seminary of Sancta Potenciana of that city, that she should not receive
+therein any woman sent by the archbishop or his provisor." "Ordering
+that the president take what measures appear most fitting, considering
+all ends."]
+
+
+
+
+COMMERCE OF THE ISLANDS WITH MEXICO
+
+The King. To my viceroy, president, and auditors of my royal Audiencia
+resident in the City of Mexico, of Nueva Espana: Don Juan Grau
+Monfalcon, procurator-general of the Filipinas Islands, has reported
+to me that the permission possessed by those islands of two hundred
+and fifty thousand pesos of merchandise, and five hundred thousand for
+the returns thereon, is very small, as that was conceded thirty-four
+years ago, when the citizens and inhabitants were fewer, the duties
+and expenses not so great, and the islands less infested by their
+foes. Because of this latter, their needs have increased so greatly
+that, if the said permission be not increased, it will be impossible
+to maintain them, or for their citizens to support themselves. He
+tells me that some illegal acts may have resulted from the present
+narrow limit of the permission, both in the lading of the merchandise,
+and in the returns of the silver. In order that those violations may
+be avoided, and those islands and their inhabitants maintained in a
+less straitened manner, he has petitioned me to have the goodness to
+concede an increase of the two hundred and fifty thousand pesos of the
+merchandise to four hundred thousand, and also of the five hundred
+thousand pesos of silver to eight hundred thousand. For, besides
+the above-mentioned advantages, my royal duties will thus increase,
+to supply the expenses of the said islands; illegalities and frauds
+will cease; and the inhabitants will increase in wealth. The matter
+having been examined in my royal Council of the Indias, inasmuch as
+I wish to know what permission the said islands enjoy, and that of
+the count and duke of San Lucar, and whether it will be advisable to
+enlarge the permission of the said islands; and considering their
+needs and expenses, and other advantages: I order you to inform me
+very minutely in regard to it all, so that, after examination, the
+advisable measures may be taken. Given in Madrid, December eight,
+one thousand six hundred and thirty-eight.
+
+I the King
+
+Countersigned by Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon, and signed by the
+members of the Council.
+
+[Endorsed: "Don Juan Grau Monfalcon. To the viceroy, president, and
+auditors of the Audiencia of Mexico, ordering information as to the
+permission [of trade] for the Filipinas Islands, and that conceded
+to the count and duke; and as to the advisability of increasing the
+amount permitted to the islands."]
+
+
+
+
+JURISDICTION OVER SEAMEN
+
+The King. To Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera, knight of the Order of
+Alcantara, my governor and captain-general of the Philipinas Islands,
+or to the person or persons in whose charge that government shall be:
+in a letter which I wrote to you on the second of last September,
+on various matters, there is a section of the following tenor: "I
+have considered the arguments that you bring forward for its being so
+expedient that the commander and the admiral of the ships shall have
+authority and jurisdiction in the port of Acapulco, when he is not on
+shore, to punish his sailors and soldiers; and that the warder of the
+fort there shall not interfere with them by undertaking to punish them
+on shore (regarding them as his subordinates, as hitherto they have
+been) as they are persons of ability and good qualifications--since
+from the time when the ships cast anchor, during all the time while
+they remain in port, the men do not respect or obey, as it is right
+they should, the said commander or admiral. Desiring to avoid
+this difficulty, so that those officers may punish the culprits
+in such cases, I have decided that what you propose may be done,
+with the conditions that you mention; and, by a decree of the same
+date as this letter, I am sending to the viceroy of Nueva Espana
+advices to that effect. [I have told him] that as this seems to be
+a general complaint, to judge from the instances [reported] here,
+he must give the necessary orders for the execution of this decree,
+unless some difficulty shall arise that may oblige him to defer it;
+for when those men commit any disorderly acts on shore complaint can
+be made against them, and the matter referred to the said commander
+and admiral." And now a report has been made to me, on the part of
+Don Juan Grao Monfalcon, procurator-general of that city of Manila,
+that it is very advisable that the said commander and admiral of
+the ships possess all necessary jurisdiction for punishing the men
+aboard them--as is done at Cartagena, Portovelo, and other places;
+and he entreats that I be pleased to command that this be accordingly
+done. The matter having been considered in my royal Council of the
+Indias, I have thought it best to issue the present, for such is my
+will, that the usage which I have mentioned be put in practice in the
+islands, as well as in Nueva Espana, since that is advisable for my
+service. [Madrid, December 8, 1638.]
+
+
+I the King
+
+
+By command of the king our sovereign:
+
+
+Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon
+
+
+
+
+ON THE LADING OF THE GALLEONS
+
+The King. Don Juan Grau y Monfalcon, procurator-general of the
+Philipinas Islands, has reported to me that certain citizens of those
+islands, to whom were allotted toneladas in the amount [of lading]
+permitted, have, for lack of means to ship the goods, sold that
+space--which has thus been secured by the merchants of Nueva Espana
+and Peru, who for that purpose have their agents in Manila. He states
+that this practice is overlooked [by the officials], although, after
+the first distribution of the permitted lading space has been made,
+and the toneladas allotted, the citizens who through poverty or other
+causes are unable or unwilling to lade the goods which belong and
+are allotted to them cannot give, sell, or transfer that space to
+any other person, unless they again declare the toneladas before the
+bureau of allotment. The bureau again shares the space which was thus
+declared among such citizens as ask for it, or who can occupy it to
+better advantage; and these must pay for it, giving for each tonelada
+the amount appraised, according to the season and the circumstances,
+by the bureau itself. The proceeds from the said toneladas shall be
+given and paid to the owners who had declared them. Thus poor persons
+will obtain relief, and the citizens [of the islands] will have the
+benefit of the entire amount of trade permitted to them, while those
+of Nueva Espana will be excluded from it. [The said procurator]
+entreats me to issue a decree in accordance with these facts,
+including therein adequate penalties to secure its execution. The
+matter having been examined in my royal Council of the Indias, and
+the above statements carefully considered, I have approved [the said
+procurator's request]. I command my governor and captain-general of
+the said Philipinas Islands who now holds or shall in future hold
+that office, and the auditors of my royal Audiencia therein, and other
+persons who shall have in charge the allotment of the said toneladas,
+and the bureau for the said allotment, that they observe and fulfil,
+and cause to be observed and fulfilled, exactly and inviolably,
+what is ordained in this my decree, without in any way contravening
+or exceeding its tenor or form. And those who disobey this decree
+are warned that such act will be charged to them in the visitations
+and their residencias, and they will be punished according to law;
+for such is my will. [Madrid, December 8, 1638.]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FORTUNATE SUCCESSES IN FILIPINAS AND TERRENATE, 1636-37
+
+Fortunate successes which our Lord has given by sea and land to the
+Spanish arms in the Filipinas Islands against the Mindanaos, and in
+the islands of Terrenate against the Dutch, in the latter part of
+the year 1636 and the beginning of 1637.
+
+
+
+
+FILIPINAS
+
+These Filipinas Islands, subject to the Catholic king our sovereign
+for the past thirty years, have been so harassed and terrorized
+by invasions, robberies, and fires caused by the Moros (Mindanaos,
+Joloans, Burneyans, and Camucones), that one could not sail outside
+the bay of Manila without manifest danger. Not a single village was
+now safe, nor could an evangelical or royal minister perform his
+duty undisturbed. These pirates--some at one time, others at another,
+and sometimes all together--set out every year from their own lands,
+and at first attacked the islands which are called the Pintados,
+for these were the nearest; and afterward, becoming more impudent,
+they came to coast along the island of Manila itself, and once they
+even came to the suburbs of this city (although without making their
+presence known). The Christians captured by them on these raids were
+numberless; some were Spanish but the majority were natives, who, sold
+afterward either among the enemies themselves, or among more distant
+unbelievers, either abandoned the faith, or suffered living death in
+a wretched slavery. The villages which they had ravaged were pitiful
+to see, being either burned to the ground or abandoned and deserted;
+for those inhabitants who were able to escape from the hands of the
+enemy hid themselves in the thickets of the mountains, among wild
+beasts and venomous serpents, without other food than a few roots
+and wild fruits. And what is impossible to relate without shedding
+tears, the gospel ministers were compelled to flee in this same way,
+to endure the same calamities, and suffer the inclemencies of sky and
+ground, in order not to fall into the hands of Mahometan cruelty. Even
+thus they were not always able to flee, for some, cut to pieces, fell
+into their hands; others were captured and ransomed at great cost,
+or died of ill-treatment in their captivity. Those barbarians did not
+spare the churches, but rather plundered them with an infernal fury;
+burned them, and trampled under foot the ornaments; broke the images
+and profaned the vessels; and impiously clothed themselves with the
+sacred vestments. The most unbearable thing of all was to see all
+those evils unchecked, our friends disheartened, the enemy unresisted,
+and the villages defenseless. For, although the governors sent fleets
+in pursuit of the enemy, nothing was effected--partly because the
+latter hid themselves from our men among the numerous islands, and
+partly because of the great speed of their boats, in which respect
+they had great advantage over us.
+
+Finally, in the year 1633, the king of Mindanao, named Cachil Corralat,
+sent out a very large fleet which did signal damage in the islands. To
+put an end to this, Don Juan Cerezo de Salamanca, who was governor of
+the islands at that time, surmounting many difficulties, commanded a
+certain position to be taken and a fort to be begun in Samboangan,
+on the island of Mindanao, and occupied by a Spanish garrison; for
+that point was well suited to the purpose of restraining from there
+the Mindanaos and Joloans, as they were forced to sight it when they
+went forth to pillage. Soon the enemy Corralat felt the damage done
+him by the new post of the Spaniards, and since he could no longer
+sally forth at his safety, he called upon the Burneyans, Joloans,
+and Camucones to set out in various directions to pillage--which they
+did. He himself sent out after them, in the beginning of April, 1636,
+a large fleet in command of a Moro chief named Tagal. This fleet,
+as our garrison was but recently established, was able to proceed to
+our islands, and attacking many places, to make many captures--among
+them three Recollect religious of the Order of St. Augustine, and a
+Spanish corregidor of the island of Cuyo; to pillage much property,
+and to plunder the churches. They carried away the ornaments and
+vessels, and destroyed the images, and especially the cloth of a
+sacred crucifix, from which Corralat made himself a cape. Thereupon
+he became arrogant, and boasted that he was carrying away the God of
+the Christians a prisoner, because he had taken from among the sacred
+vessels a monstrance and a lunette with the most holy sacrament;
+and he returned to his own land, where they were already mourning
+him as lost, because he had been absent from it for eight months.
+
+This last invasion, more than all the previous ones, afflicted Don
+Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera, who at that time had been proprietary
+governor of the islands for a year. Inflamed with a zeal for the honor
+of God and his king, he determined, after surmounting the numerous
+difficulties and oppositions, to avenge in person the insolent acts
+of those barbarians. But first of all he sent out, as governor of the
+presidio at Sanboangan, Sargento-mayor Bartolome Diaz Barrera, and,
+under his orders, Sargento-mayor Nicolas Goncalez, so that they might
+be making preparations and sweeping the seas of those corsairs--a very
+important matter, as will be seen subsequently. He then fitted out a
+good fleet of champans (sailing vessels of moderate size, which are
+used by the Chinese); and, embarking in one of them, made sail on the
+day of the Purification of our Lady, the second of February, of this
+year 1637. At Oton (which is about half-way) he received definite
+information that Tagal was returning to his own country with eight
+very well laden ships. The commander of the garrison at Sanboangan
+was informed of that; and, preparing in two hours a squadron of five
+caracoas (which are swift craft with oar and sail, which are used
+by these Indians) and placing in command thereof Nicolas Goncalez,
+the sargento-mayor of that presidio, he set out to round a very steep
+cliff, in which a small mountain terminated, projecting out into the
+sea, and distant about thirty leguas eastward from our fort. It was
+necessary for the enemy to stop there, in order to discharge numerous
+lances and arrows at the cliff (for it was their custom to sail by
+that point when either outward or homeward bound)--a superstitious
+custom of those barbarians. On account of this the place was known as
+"the point of arrows" [punta de flechas]. The result was that which
+our men desired for on the morning of the day of St. Thomas, the
+twenty-first of December (at the time when prayer was being offered
+up within the fort), the enemy was sighted; and both then and on the
+following night our men made such an attack upon the enemy that, in
+spite of a desperate defense, they surrendered. Of the eight ships
+only one worthy of mention escaped, and that one in such a condition
+that in order to escape, they cast overboard all its merchandise and
+slaves. The other ships, heavily laden with merchandise, fell into the
+hands of our soldiers and were plundered. There were not many firearms,
+but they contained the vases and sacred ornaments, which were declared,
+in order to be returned to their rightful owners. There died Tagal, the
+commander of the enemy, with more than three hundred other Moros--so
+obstinate and furious that they preferred death rather than surrender,
+although they were offered their lives. Better was the course of one of
+Tagal's brothers, who, when badly wounded, surrendered, protesting that
+he had always regarded the faith of the Christians as the true one,
+and begging for baptism, after receiving which he died. His example
+was followed by fourteen other Moros, who surrendered and besought
+baptism. Thus also there were recovered a hundred and twenty Christian
+captives and among them a Recollect father, one of those whom the
+Moros were taking away with them; but he was so badly wounded that he
+soon died, although greatly consoled to have seen with his own eyes
+the bravery with which our captains had punished the insolence of
+the barbarians, obtaining so signal a victory as that, to the honor
+of Jesus Christ and of the Spaniards, without its having cost even
+a single man to our side. In that we began to enjoy the benefits of
+the fort of Sanboangan; for if it had not been there, we could not
+have encountered the enemy--who were none the less frightened by a
+miracle which occurred on the very night on which the victory was
+won. For having commenced by a terrific trembling of the earth and
+sea, with a great noise of groans and screams, which were heard by
+some, and which terrified all, that cliff--which we have mentioned
+as an infamous place, both on account of the superstitious rite of
+shooting arrows at it and many other things, and because there was
+a tradition among the natives that the devil had been actually seen
+there--became loosened from the land and fell with a great crash into
+the sea, our Lord giving to understand thereby that the impiety so
+strongly intrenched in that island was to fall and give place to our
+holy religion, as events are constantly demonstrating. The shore has
+already been consecrated to God with the name of Point San Sebastian,
+so that the superstitions by which that place was contaminated may
+be transformed by His holy arrows.
+
+The governor was highly elated with these tidings, and still more
+when he received the ornaments, sacred vessels, and images which had
+been recovered; and was moved to deep pity by the maltreated holy
+crucifix, which had been made into a cape. [25] He ordained the latter
+as thenceforth a standard for that expedition, as he did also with the
+miraculous painting of St. Francis Xavier which was carried by Father
+Marcelo Mastrillo, well known in the greater part of the world for the
+so great mark of favor shown him by the Lord through the agency of
+that great apostle of India. This father, while passing from Malaca
+to Macan, a port of China, in fulfilment of the vow which he made at
+Napoles, met with the Dutch corsairs, from whom the Lord delivered him
+by a sudden wind which, while it turned him from the course which he
+was pursuing, miraculously carried him, without a pilot who knew those
+regions, into the bay of Manila. They anchored at the port of Cavite,
+on the day of St. Ignatius of last year, for the signal consolation
+and edification of all these islands, and for the good success of
+this expedition (in which consisted the complete relief and remedy of
+all)--especially to the benefit of the sick, of whom he took charge
+during the entire course of the expedition. Our fleet reached the
+port of Sanboangan on February 22, of this year; and all the men in it
+having been confessed and having received communion, and having been
+so encouraged (as they made evident to the father) by seeing from the
+pulpit, the outraged image of the Crucified One, they cried out that
+they would attack the whole world; and that the mothers were fortunate
+who had employed their sons in so glorious an undertaking. Then the
+soldiers returned to their vessels; they were divided into three
+companies of Spaniards, and one of Panpango Indians. Without awaiting
+the Spaniards and the volunteer Bisayan Indians they began to lay
+their course toward Lamitan, on the fourth of March, in order not to
+allow the enemies time to prepare themselves. At that place Corralat
+had his principal village. The governor preceded the entire fleet,
+with only four boats--both because the weather was contrary, and
+because he had heard that there were some Moro merchantmen on the
+sea from Java Major, very full of Christian slaves. Without the loss
+of an instant's time, by sailing night and day, he came within sight
+of Lamitan, on March thirteen. There the same man, in company with
+only six musketeers as a guard, personally reconnoitered the coast
+and river, with great valor and risk. Having fully ascertained that
+the beach and the low grounds were safe, he disembarked with the men
+of his four boats, as well as those of two others, that had already
+come up at that time--in all, about seventy soldiers. He placed
+these in battle-array, and marched with them to attack the village,
+without knowing that it was so well fortified as was the case, as he
+understood that all their force was about one and one-half leguas
+inland on a high hill. It was an especial providence of our Lord,
+and a brilliant stratagem, to leave an open road along the beach
+(on which, as was afterward seen, the enemy had planted all their
+artillery), and to deceive the enemy by taking another road on the
+opposite side. This was very difficult and dangerous, both because of
+the ambuscades which the enemy had prepared in the thickets (which were
+quickly cleared by our men, by means of two field-pieces which were in
+the vanguard), and by the swamps and river--which the soldiers forded
+twice, with the water up to their breasts, with incredible valor. They
+were encouraged by the example of their captain-general, who was the
+first in all these hardships, as he was also later, when attacking two
+large stockades, one after the other. Those stockades, notwithstanding
+the fierce resistance made by the Moros in their defense, he entered
+with his men, ever proving himself not less prudent in commanding
+than spirited in attacking--personally encountering several Moros,
+who set upon him with extraordinary spirit. Thereupon, they caught
+sight of the fort with which Corralat had defended his village. It
+was exceedingly well fortified with a new ditch, with eight pieces
+of artillery, twenty-seven versos, many muskets with rests, and other
+lighter arms, and with more than two thousand warrior Moros. But that
+was of little use, for so gallant was the assault of the Spanish,
+notwithstanding their small number, that they instantly gained
+possession of the fort, killing a goodly number of Moros--among whom
+was their castellan, who obstinately fought to the death--while the
+others fled very badly wounded. From that place a portion of our men
+went on ahead to a stockade which, with one piece [of artillery],
+defended the house of Corralat, and it soon fell into our power;
+for after the commander who had charge of it (and who until then had
+kept them in good spirits by his vain and superstitious promises)
+had been killed, those who accompanied him lost heart and fled, while
+many of them were left there dead. The other body [of the Spaniards]
+attacked the river at the same time, and, putting the Moros to flight,
+captured more than three hundred craft, great and small. Of these they
+sacked some large Javanese merchantmen which were heavily laden with
+goods, and set free their Christian slaves. Some boats which were
+suitable for our men were kept, and the others were burned, without
+a single one being left. Had the fleet that left Sanboangan been all
+together on that day, they would have finished matters with the Moro
+king Corralat, who, with as many men as possible, withdrew to the hill
+which he had fortified, disguised and borne on the shoulders of slaves.
+
+The governor after having given the village over to sack, having
+gathered all the arms of the enemy--which, as aforesaid, consisted
+of eight bronze pieces with ladles, one swivel-gun of cast iron,
+twenty-seven versos, and more than one hundred muskets and arquebuses;
+besides a very great number of cannon-chambers, and iron, balls,
+and powder; campilans (what the Indians call by this name resemble
+certain cutlasses), lances, javelins, and many other kinds of poisoned
+missile weapons; and also after having repaired the fort which the
+enemy had (now called San Francisco Xavier) with new and suitable
+fortifications, which he planned, and himself commenced with his own
+hands to execute; and having lodged his men without the loss of even
+one (for only two servants deserted): he retired to a large mosque,
+where he established a bodyguard. He first had the mosque blessed,
+and a chair and some Arabic books of the cursed Koran burned. Quite
+necessary was the garrison and watch set by the vigilant governor
+during the days of his stay there, while awaiting the rest of his
+fleet, in order to drive away some false and pernicious embassies, and
+to defend themselves from the continual surprises which the defeated
+Moros sprang upon them, especially at night. Our men did not receive
+much hurt from them; on the contrary, various bodies of troops,
+leaving their posts, overran the country, burning the villages, and
+committing other damage on the enemy. Many Christian captives fled from
+the enemy on this account, and were immediately sent to Sanboangan.
+
+On the sixteenth of the same month, Sargento-mayor Nicolas Goncalez
+came to join the governor with the rest of the fleet, which sailed
+from Sanboangan. The governor immediately began to prepare his men
+with all temporal and spiritual equipment with which to invest the hill
+on the next day. There was well seen the military prudence and skill,
+and the zeal for the divine honor, of the captain-general, in the so
+well arranged and efficacious address which he made to his soldiers,
+and in the so definite orders that he issued. He divided his men; and,
+committing about one hundred and twenty Spaniards, thirty Pampango
+Indians, and some other Bisayans as carriers, to Sargento-mayor Nicolas
+Gonzalez, ordered him to surprise the enemy by the rear of the hill,
+first sounding his trumpets, so that he himself might attack the
+front at the same instant by this means dividing the enemy's forces,
+and weakening their defense. In accordance with these orders, the
+sargento-mayor began his march. The governor, with the rest of the army
+(after leaving a sufficient defense of soldiers in the fort and boats),
+marched toward the hill at six o'clock the following morning. At its
+brow was a very fine deserted village, where the governor fortified
+a good house, and had a piece of artillery planted and a garrison
+of Pampangos established, to be used as a place of refuge for his
+men. Commencing to ascend the hill by the road which the Moro who
+was guiding them showed him, he stopped near where there was another
+road; and, having asked the guide whether that road also led to the
+hill, and which of the two was the better, the Moro replied in the
+affirmative, and said that both were poor. "Then if both are poor,"
+said the governor in reply, "let us go by the other, and not by the
+one along which the Moro is guiding us." That was the inspiration of
+Heaven, and very good military counsel, and so did the outcome declare
+it; for that first road was taking them point blank into a cavalier,
+garrisoned with three pieces, one of which was of bronze. It was
+found afterward that, besides a double charge of powder, the piece
+was loaded with two plain artillery balls, two crowbars, and more
+than three hundred musket balls--with which, no doubt, at least all
+the vanguard would have been swept away. Now freed from that danger,
+and marching with great difficulty up the hill, the governor sent
+some of the vanguard with orders to reconnoiter only the road,
+and to halt at some fitting place in order to await the signal of
+those who were to attack the enemy in the rear. In truth the road
+was so difficult that it could be ascended in some places only with
+great difficulty, by clambering up and laying hold of the shrubs with
+their hands. It was narrow and very steep, and had precipices in all
+parts, so that they could not mount upward except one at a time. And,
+above all, it was so well commanded at the top by three forts--which
+were inaccessible, both by the great height of their location, and
+by the defenses of ditches, very stout stockades, and a very large
+supply of weapons--that very few of the enemy, without receiving
+any hurt, could with the use of only stones kill a million men who
+might attack them in that part. Notwithstanding this, those who were
+sent to reconnoiter the road were so blinded by their overweening
+valor and spirit (truly Spanish) that, thinking that they could
+easily gain all, they went ahead to attack one of the three forts,
+without heeding the order that the general had given them; thereby
+they encountered, for themselves and the rest of the vanguard, great
+damage from the three forts, without doing anything to the enemy. More
+than twenty [of the Spaniards] were killed and more than eighty badly
+wounded. Much greater would have been the destruction of our men--for,
+not considering those who were falling, they continued to involve
+themselves and the others further, with false rumors of victory--had
+it not been that the governor, placing himself in the greatest danger,
+where the balls were raining down, and where they wounded his squire
+(and others who were very near him fell dead), and recognizing that
+victory was impossible in that part, and prudently hiding the disorder
+which had happened, in order not to discourage his soldiers, caused
+them all, both whole and wounded, to retire. This he did with so great
+ease and gallantry on one side, while on the other he confronted the
+enemy with so great valor, with sword in hand; had he not done that not
+a single man would have remained alive, since the enemy were numerous,
+the road full of precipices, and our men badly impeded with the wounded
+and more than two hours of fighting. That night the governor passed,
+with those who remained unhurt, in the retreat at the brow of the
+hill--at the greatest risk of perishing, if the enemy had made a sally,
+however vigilant our men had been. But God delivered them from that
+danger; for the enemy did not make a sally, because they made a great
+feast that night over the good result of having, as they imagined,
+killed the governor. Already by this time the sick were in the camp,
+in which miraculous cures of very deadly wounds occurred. One had
+been shot through the head from temple to temple; another was shot
+through the mouth by a ball that passed up through the stomach;
+another had several poisoned dart-points (here called sompites)
+left sticking in his throat; and both those and all the others,
+excepting two or three who did not allow themselves to be treated,
+are today alive and well. They, and all, attribute their miraculous
+health to the special favor with which God chose to repay the holy
+zeal with which all risked their lives for His Divine Majesty.
+
+On the following day, the eighteenth of the same month, while the
+governor was hearing mass, the rattle and roar of artillery and
+musketry was heard on the hill, which increased his anxiety. Suspecting
+that Nicolas Gonzalez was fighting, he sent him, as a reenforcement,
+a company of soldiers under command of Captain Don Rodrigo de
+Guillestigui. And it was so that, the said sargento-mayor, Nicolas
+Gonzalez, not having been able to arrive the day before at the assigned
+place because of the great difficulty of the road, it was our Lord's
+pleasure that, after conquering many difficulties and great obstacles,
+he gained possession of an eminence which dominated the enemy's forts
+in the rear. Thence he started to invest them, with such intrepidity
+that, although the king, leading his men in person, began to resist him
+furiously, he could not however withstand our charges. Consequently,
+they were compelled to abandon their three forts, one after the other,
+leaving an infinite number of dead Moros, who perished partly by the
+balls, and partly through falling over precipices in escaping, as
+the way was narrow. Among those who escaped by flight was Corralat;
+he fled, badly wounded, to some small villages that he owned, which
+were four leguas distant from the hill. The queen his wife, and many
+others of his servants threw themselves over the precipices of their
+own accord, in order to avoid falling into our hands. Many of the enemy
+were captured and the Christian captives there freed. Among the latter
+was found alive one of the Recollect fathers, who, as he had been
+badly mangled, was judged to have lived as by a miracle until the day
+following, when he died as a saint in the camp, after receiving all the
+sacraments with great consolation. The third [Recollect religious] was
+killed through the fury of the Moros, and it is not known where they
+threw his body. The three forts, then, with all their arms (namely,
+four pieces of artillery, and other numberless weapons of other kinds),
+having fallen into our hands, as well as a great quantity of food,
+and a quantity of wealth, and a suitable guard having been placed, the
+governor was advised of everything. He was waiting anxiously in camp;
+rejoicing over the good news, and more that no one of our soldiers
+had been killed, he ascended the hill. In two days' time having taken
+down to the camp with very few men the pieces which it had taken the
+enemy six months to take up with more than two thousand Indians;
+collecting many sacred vases and ecclesiastical ornaments which
+were found; giving the house of the king over to sack, and others,
+very large and full of riches, by which many Spaniards were greatly
+advantaged; and having burned the buildings, and leveled the forts:
+as he was no longer able to endure the stench which arose from the
+[dead bodies of] the enemy who had been slain and those who had fallen
+over the precipices, the forces returned to camp--leaving the Moro
+king entirely ruined, as a chastisement for the many outrages which
+he had impiously committed on the true God, on His priests, and other
+Christians. From there, after having given thanks to our Lord with
+a mass, and a solemn procession with the most holy sacrament on the
+day of the Incarnation, they set sail for Sanboangan.
+
+When they left, the governor sent Sargento-mayor Pedro Palomino
+with one hundred Spaniards to Cachil Moncay (the legitimate king,
+although he had been oppressed by the tyranny of his uncle Corralat),
+in order to tell him that, if he wished to be protected by the
+Spanish arms of his Majesty, he must render homage and pay tribute
+to the Catholic king our sovereign, wage war by fire and sword on
+Corralat and his allies, free the Christian captives, and admit
+gospel ministers. The king offered in person to do all that, and
+afterward through his ambassador and brother-in-law, at Samboangan,
+to the governor. The latter having issued the fitting orders in that
+presidio, and having received the homage offered to our sovereign
+by many--especially by the inhabitants of the island of Basilan,
+to whom he immediately assigned gospel ministers, as they asked for
+them--he entrusted one hundred Spaniards and more than one thousand
+volunteer Indians (who had now arrived, although after the battle),
+with orders to coast along the island, doing all the harm possible
+to the enemy, and helping the Spaniards' friends. The said captain
+performed all the aforesaid excellently, coasting along the island from
+Sanboangan to Caraga. And although the Moros had retreated inland,
+being terrified by the news of the victory, still the captain did
+them considerable damage. He burned as many as sixteen villages, and
+many other collections of houses, laid waste the fields and gardens,
+destroyed more than one hundred ships (counting large and small),
+and seized others for the use of the fleet, whose need he abundantly
+supplied with many provisions which he collected. He also beheaded
+seventy-two spirited Moros, who defended themselves against him,
+whose heads he placed on pikes, in various places along the beach,
+in order to terrorize the others. He made prisoners some others,
+whom he took alive, with which the whole land became fearful. While
+that was being done, as has been said, the governor set sail toward
+Manila. He entered that city in triumph on the twenty-fourth of May,
+with his four companies in battle-array, with the prisoners in their
+midst, and with fourteen wagons heavily laden with many important
+arms of the enemy, together with the banners which had been captured
+dragging in the dust. There was general applause and rejoicing by the
+Spaniards and natives. That was an affair well calculated to inspire
+fear in the numberless infidels by whom we are surrounded.
+
+Finally, his Lordship, having shown certain very splendid honors to
+those who had so gloriously perished in the war, and having ordered
+a great number of masses to be said for their souls, ended the
+celebration most happily on the seventh of June (the Sunday of the
+Trinity), by a very solemn procession of the most holy sacrament as
+an expression of thanks. In front marched the ransomed Christians,
+very handsomely clad, carrying candles and rosaries. Four long paces
+behind them were many sacred vases and ecclesiastical ornaments,
+which were recovered from the possession of the barbarian. By that
+sight the hearts of Catholics were moved to great compassion; and the
+people gave many thanks to our Lord for the sight of that which they
+had desired for so many years. They entreated Him that the work might
+progress until, the enemies who remained in those regions having
+received the faith of Jesus Christ, they and the other long-time
+Christians might enjoy the desired peace and quiet.
+
+
+
+
+TERRENATE
+
+The governor's great care and vigilance in preparing and arranging the
+fleet of Mindanao did not cause him to forget the other enemy--infested
+posts that his Majesty possesses in this archipelago. At the same
+time, he despatched another very good fleet, consisting of two large
+ships, one patache, and one galley, under command of General Geronimo
+Henriquez, as a guard to a number of champans which were taking the
+succor to the forts of Terrenate. Two excellent ships of the Dutch
+enemy were awaiting them at the entrance. When they saw the courage
+of our men the enemy retired in flight to the shelter of their fort
+of Malayo, without daring to await them. The Spaniards were so keen
+for fighting that, hastily leaving in safety the aid which they were
+taking, they started in pursuit of the hostile galleons, and did
+not stop until they met these under the enemy's fort, where they had
+gone. There they fired so many volleys, both at the ships and at the
+fort and village, that (as was learned afterward from some who took
+refuge with our ships) very considerable damage was done, without
+the Dutch daring to sail out, or being able to do us any damage of
+importance. That was a very great cause for scoffing against the enemy,
+and they lost as much reputation among those Moros, as was gained by
+the Spaniards, especially with the king of Tidore, our friend, who very
+joyfully thanked the commander Henriquez and the admiral, Don Pedro de
+Almonte, with presents for that action of so great valor and gallantry.
+
+One month after that fleet had returned to Manila, Don Pedro de
+Mendiola, governor of Terrenate, heard that two Dutch ships were
+becalmed not a great distance from there. He instantly despatched
+two galleys, which together spiritedly attacked the better of the two
+ships. After it had been entirely defeated, and our men were about to
+board it, a strong wind which suddenly arose snatched it from their
+hands, although it was badly crippled by the discharges from our
+galleys. The latter received no considerable damage. Thereupon that
+enemy were greatly terrified; the Moro natives received a very exalted
+idea of the Spaniards, while the latter were very joyful at beholding
+the arms of the king our sovereign, even in these most remote bounds
+of the earth, shine with the luster and splendor that they merit.
+
+With license. In Madrid. Printed by Diego Diaz de la Carrera, in the
+year 1639.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+VALUE OF CORCUERA'S SEIZURES IN JOLO
+
+
+[Under date of Manila, August 2, 1638, the city cabildo of Manila write
+the king a detailed account of Corcuera's campaign in Jolo, which
+was begun in December, 1637. Inasmuch as this letter covers ground
+sufficiently treated in documents already presented in this series, it
+is not here given. The original is conserved in the Archivo general de
+Indias with pressmark, "est. 68, caj. 1, leg. 32;" and it is presented
+by Pastells in his edition of Colin (iii, pp. 528-532). Pastells
+(iii, pp. 532, 533) follows this letter by a document showing the
+value of the artillery and other things seized from the Joloans,
+and the money value of the captives who were sold as slaves. This
+document is conserved in the same archives and has the same pressmark
+as the above. It is as follows:]
+
+The relation of the expense incurred on his Majesty's account during
+the expedition made to the kingdom of Jolo by Don Sebastian Hurtado
+de Corcuera, in December, 1637; also the value of what was seized
+and gained from the enemy; and the net gain. Subtracting the one from
+the other, the result is as follows:
+
+
+                                     pesos   tomins   granos
+
+        Gained from the enemy,      28,345        7        0
+        Expenses of the expedition, 26,314        5        4
+
+          Net remainder of gain,     2,031        1        6
+
+
+The value of what was gained from the enemy can be analyzed in the
+following form:
+
+[A list, partially duplicate, of the artillery taken from the Joloans
+follows, of which we present only the final summary, in order to
+avoid such duplication. It appears that the artillery when taken to
+Manila was appraised by one Melchor Perez, royal chief of artillery
+and artillery-founder.]
+
+
+Bronze artillery, useful
+
+Pieces                        Weight in quintals and libras
+      Make                           Weight of ball in libras
+                                        Value of one quintal in pesos
+                                                Total value in pesos
+
+1    English                  11      3  30     330
+1    falcon of King Don
+       Sebastian of Portugal  11      4  28     308
+2    of King Don Sebastian of
+       Portugal               15     10  26     390
+1    Manila, of the time of
+       Tavora                 26,80  10  26     670
+21   camaras [26]                               124
+
+Bronze artillery, useless, appraised merely at the value of the copper
+
+1    English                  11     3   12     132
+1    Siamese                   4     1   12-1/2  54
+10   versos                   14         12     168
+
+Cast-iron artillery
+
+1       English                7     35   3     12-1/2     91
+1       Macao                 12-1/2  4  12               156
+1       English               11      4         12-1/2    137
+1       Dutch                 10     88         12-1/2    136
+1       English               12     25   5     12-1/2    153
+1       Dutch                 12     25   5     12-1/2    153
+1       English               10     45   5     12-1/2    130
+1       English               14     63   7     12-1/2    182
+1       Dutch                 18          9     12-1/2    225
+1       English               21     33   9     12-1/2    266
+1       Dutch                 24     97  11     12, and
+                                                  1 tomin 312
+1       iron base [roquero]                                 4
+
+
+Firearms
+
+                                           pesos
+
+3       Vizcayan arquebuses                   12
+10-1/2  Macao muskets                         31
+11      Vizcayan field muskets                66
+1       Dutch arquebus                         4
+19      Macao arquebuses                      57
+16      Dutch muskets                         64
+1       musket de pinote of Macao              4
+2       Vizcayan arquebuses                   10
+7       arquebuses from Macao                 21
+7       Japanese small guns [escopetillas]    21
+2       Vizcayan field muskets                12
+5       Dutch arquebuses                      15
+10      Dutch muskets                         50
+1       bit of a Vizcayan gun [escopeta]       1
+
+
+Besides the above, in cloth or money, 2,866 [pesos]; in small darts
+and blowpipes, 50 [pesos].
+
+Lastly, from 192 captive Indians--men, women, and children--sold as
+his Majesty's slaves at royal auction, 20,815 pesos. Of this amount
+10,375 pesos were in cash, in coin; and the 10,440 remaining were
+charged to the pay due the infantry and seamen.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DOCUMENTS OF 1639-1640
+
+
+    Events in Philipinas, 1638-39. [Unsigned; probably Juan Lopez,
+    1639.]
+    Letters to the Holy Misericordia. Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera;
+    December 4, 1637, and October 26, 1639.
+    The university of Santo Tomas. Felipe IV; November 9, 1639.
+    Royal orders and decrees. Felipe IV; 1639.
+    Events in the Filipinas Islands, 1639-40. [Juan Lopez?]; August,
+    1640.
+    Relation of the insurrection of the Chinese. [Unsigned and
+    undated; probably in March, 1640.]
+    Ecclesiastical and Augustinian affairs, 1630-40. Casimiro
+    Diaz; [1718?]. [From his Conquistas.]
+    Relation of the Filipinas Islands. [Diego de Bobadilla, S.J.;
+    1640.]
+
+
+
+Sources: The first of these documents is obtained from a MS. in the
+Academia Real de la Historia, Madrid; the second, from a MS. volume
+in the library of Edward E. Ayer, Chicago; the third, and the eighth
+decree in the fourth, from the Archivo general de Indias, Sevilla;
+the fourth (except the above-mentioned decree), from the Archivo
+Historico Nacional, Madrid; the fifth and sixth, from the Ventura
+del Arco MSS. (Ayer library); the seventh, from Diaz's Conquistas,
+pp. 267-444; the eighth, from Thevenot's Voyages curieux, t. i,
+part ii--from a copy belonging to the library of Harvard University.
+
+Translations: These are made by James A. Robertson--except the fifth,
+sixth, and seventh, and two decrees in the fourth, by Emma Helen Blair.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+EVENTS IN THE PHILIPINAS
+
+FROM THE YEAR 1638 TO THAT OF 1639
+
+
+Today, August 14, I learned that thirteen Macasars and Basilas,
+of those who had been sold as slaves, had fled in a small boat,
+and that they had been furnished with arms. Some suspected that the
+Lascars aided them. A few days before, six of them had fled, but they
+were captured and brought to this port by the Indians of Maragondon.
+
+At the end of September Nuestra Senora del Rosario [i.e., our Lady
+of the Rosary] was robbed. Only three jewels were taken from her--a
+diamond of the value of one thousand two hundred pesos; a cross of
+smaller diamonds; and a gold rosary. The holy image was found in a
+prostrate condition. It is said that there are some indications of
+the robber. A portion of the robe was found in the possession of a
+soldier; but he says that he found it on the ground, and it has been
+impossible to prove anything else.
+
+In the beginning of October came a despatch from Sanboangan, in which
+it is declared that although the Spaniards tried to constrain Cachil
+Moncay to make his men pay the tribute, he replied that he would
+not do so, but that he would take arms and declare war. In fact,
+he retired to the mountains and took captive Father Francisco Angel;
+but another chief, his opponent, had the boldness to take the father
+from him and deliver him to the Spaniards.
+
+We are advised from Jolo that many of our men have been killed; and
+that the islanders who have remained there have suffered great famine,
+and consequently, an epidemic and plague is feared. It is also said
+that Panguian a cachil, together with Dato Ache, has retreated with
+almost all the brave men of Jolo to the island of Tabitabi, [27]
+where they have fortified another hill, and are preparing ships to
+go out to pillage our tributaries. The king and queen are in Jolo
+without anyone paying any attention to them; and Panguian Cachil is
+trying to make himself king of the Joloans.
+
+Three ships left this port for Macan: the Macan patache, on the
+thirteenth of October; on the fourteenth, that from Camboja; and on
+the sixteenth, that which came from India. It has to return here to
+collect its goods which it left here [for sale] on commission [fiada],
+and will go hence to Goa.
+
+October 26, a champan from Sanboangan arrived, in which was Father
+Gregorio Belin, seeking the reformation that is especially demanded
+by affairs in Jolo, whose commandant [28] has prevented many good
+results and been the cause of many evils, by his bad government and
+scandalous conduct. Don Sebastian [Hurtado de Corcuera] removed him,
+as he was already well informed of what has taken place there. Father
+Pedro Gutierrez informs us about Mindanao in a letter which he writes
+to the father provincial, as follows.
+
+
+
+
+Letter from Father Pedro Gutierrez
+
+"These three posts of Sanboangan, Jolo, and Mindanao, were left
+so destitute, for lack of the little fleet that was here at the
+beginning, that I am surprised that the commandant, Don Pedro de
+Almonte, has been able to attend with so great promptness to the
+necessities that have arisen. The time when the [lack of the] fleet
+began to be felt was when a soldier and a Pampango were brought
+badly wounded from Basilan. In order to remedy the damages that
+might ensue from not inflicting punishment, it was necessary to
+equip a caracoa with Pampangos and servants of the Spaniards. The
+matter was entrusted to Adjutant Cristoval de las Eras, who had the
+two evildoers shot in Basilan. Then, seeing that the Spaniards who
+were in Basilan were poorly accommodated, and without any defense,
+he advised the commandant, Don Pedro; and, by virtue of the order
+sent him, he built a fortified house in a very good position. After
+the people of the mountain (some of whom had absented themselves
+through fear) had calmed down, he returned to this port.
+
+"During that time the commandant, Don Pedro, was already getting ready
+a small fleet among the Lutaos, in order to attack the Joloans who had
+gone to Tabitabi and other islands. That he might accomplish this, he
+requested a good juanga which was at Dapitan, whence it was brought
+with fifty Indians. With one that he procured from those that his
+Majesty had here, and those which he had made by the Lutao chiefs,
+he had five caracoas with four pieces of artillery, besides three
+other small boats called pilanes, all of them excellently equipped
+with infantry and ammunition.
+
+"While the fleet was on the point of being despatched, news arrived
+from Mindanao of various acts of treachery which Moncay, chief of
+Buayen, had attempted against the Spaniards; and that he had seized
+Father Angel; and that after the said father had escaped from them,
+they fell upon the food and the household effects that the father left,
+thus declaring themselves. But the commandant, Don Pedro, seeing the
+danger in delaying help, and knowing that if Corralat and Manaquior
+were to unite with Moncay much damage might be done, determined to
+send the fleet that was prepared for Jolo to Mindanao. For greater
+abundance, he added a champan with food and ammunition for the
+said fleet, and as an aid to the fort at Buayen. He charged Adjutant
+Cristoval de las Eras with all this, on account of his experience as a
+good soldier, and his knowledge of wars with the Indians. In addition
+he charged me to go in the fleet, so that I might see Corralat and
+Manaquior; and as that was my affair, and the Spaniards were not to
+meddle in it, it was made certain that those chiefs would not unite
+with Moncay. We came near to Lamitan, where Corralat was living, and
+I found Father Carrion, who was with Corralat, and who was coming to
+Sanboangan to ask for an order to make peace with Manaquior, to make
+war on Moncay, to talk to Corralat, in order that he should not unite
+with Moncay, and to request succor in some things. I told him that
+the commandant Don Pedro had already prepared for all that he wanted,
+and more; and that he was sending that fleet, collected as if by a
+miracle. The father was very much surprised by that, and even told
+me that if they saw what had been done, they would not believe it
+in Buayen; for, as they know the limited resources in Sanboangan,
+they had not dared to ask for a single soldier.
+
+"I landed alone, and the fleet went to await me at La Zabanilla. I
+talked to Corralat, and he promised me all that I wanted. For greater
+security, he told me that he would give two caracoas to guard me. He
+offered me four, but I did not desire more than two, which he sent
+after me. It was diverting to hear the Mindanaos say that on no account
+must they separate from my caracoa; and when I told them, as we were
+returning, to stay behind and look for food, that did not avail, for
+they told me that they were not to leave me until I should return,
+and they kept their word.
+
+"We arrived at the fort. I informed Adjutant Eras of the condition of
+affairs. According to his orders, Manaquior was summoned; and he made
+a treaty of peace with Captain Marquez. For a beginning, he offered
+an iron piece that uses a ball weighing three libras, which he handed
+over to the said adjutant Eras. We continued to ascend the river to
+quiet the villages that the hostile Moncay had taken from Manaquior,
+and which he had fortified. But when they learned that the Spaniards
+were coming, they discarded their foolish ideas, and, as sensible men,
+abandoned the village, which was excellently fortified. They set fire
+to a part of it, but were unable to burn it all because of their haste
+in escaping. They went to join those who were fortified in a village
+higher up the same river, which was the village which prevented those
+who could have done so from carrying refreshment to the fort of the
+Spaniards. The Spaniards went up the river, and before they arrived the
+natives deserted that village also, and that so hastily that they were
+unable to burn more than one house. We went up as far as the village
+of Manaquior, where we were well received. We took five days to reach
+that place from the fort. Manaquior said that the inhabitants of the
+two villages had united with a third, in order to fight, and that
+they were on an arm of the river. The adjutant with his fleet, and
+with Manaquior, who had always accompanied him, descended the river;
+and, arriving at the entrance of the said arm, as one of the caracoas
+was large, the adjutant left it there (it was the one in which I was
+embarked), and ascended with the rest. Before his arrival, the enemy
+also fled and said that all those who had abandoned the other villages
+were going to fortify themselves in another position farther up the
+river. Thereupon, those who accompanied Adjutant Eras tried to persuade
+him not go any farther, since those Moros did not await them, and the
+river was becoming narrower. The adjutant refused to do anything else
+but pursue them, and did so for two days by that arm of the sea. He
+reached the last site, where the enemy were fortifying themselves
+with an excellent stockade. There must have been a great force of men,
+since they had done so much in so few hours. They did not hold their
+ground there, either, but according to the track that they left went
+to the mountains in two divisions. Thereupon we returned to Samboangan,
+after having reenforced the fort with food and ammunition.
+
+"Two bronze versos were found at that last site, which had been
+hidden in the river. The adjutant seized them, and is sending them,
+I believe, to Don Sebastian. I have been in various fleets, and
+have seen in none of them what I have seen in this one--namely,
+that although those people had never encountered Spaniards before,
+there was not a single soldier who ill-treated any Indian, while the
+latter came very willingly. Perhaps the cause for it was the speech
+that Adjutant Eras made to the Spaniards--who, as they know that he
+treats them with great courtesy, and that for that reason he will
+stand no nonsense, did not wish to give him cause for anger. As we
+were returning, I saw Corralat, and tried to ascertain from him his
+intentions. He does not wish to fight with the Spaniards; but, on the
+other hand, he makes impertinent demands--namely, that the country
+from Sibuguei to near Catel (a region about two hundred leguas in
+circuit), and the lake of Malanao, be left to him. As my intention
+was not to make any agreement with him, except that he should not
+unite with Moncay, I told him that I was writing to Don Sebastian,
+as I did, whose letter I am despatching now.
+
+"All the Mindanaos fear the Castilians, especially Don
+Sebastian. Corralat's whole anxiety was lest he might come here, and
+he asked why he should come, when it would be sufficient to send a
+captain; and he said other things in this manner. May our Lord arrange
+matters as is most fitting to His holy service; and may He preserve
+your Reverence, to whose holy prayers and sacrifices I earnestly
+commend myself. Sanboangan, September 30, 1638."
+
+
+
+
+Section of a letter written in Manila
+
+"Father Belin took with him about eighty Christian captives of those
+who have come to our soldiers--both in that entrance which was made in
+the villages, and of those who have been escaping from the Moros since
+the time of the arrival of Don Sebastian, who exceed one hundred and
+fifty Christians. Among them, at times, were some Moros who requested
+holy baptism. The eighty who arrived here were disembarked at the gate
+of Saint Dominic, where the sargento-mayor was awaiting them with the
+captains and adjutants and the company of the governor, who marched
+them down in their midst. When the procession or march was ended,
+the alcaldes and Father Belin went through the street which leads to
+[the house of] the master-of-camp and [the convent of] St. Augustine,
+to the palace. Having gone round by the parade-ground, they went up to
+the governor, where Father Belin thanked his Lordship for the liberty
+that had been obtained through his mediation. His Lordship ordered
+them to be lodged in the city; and directed the father to bring the
+chiefs to the palace next day, as he intended to clothe them as he
+had those whom he sent to Basilan. Among them is a Moro who is a
+Christian, who is accompanied by more than twenty persons of his
+relatives and household. All of them have resolved to be baptized,
+and to live among Christians in Cabuyao. [29] That was the chief who
+brought Father Angel to the fort, and withdrew him from captivity
+when he came to our people. The fact was that that chief captured a
+girl about twelve years old in that village of Cabuya, whom he has
+married during this time, with the intention of making her his chief
+wife until his death. She, having seen the love that he showed her,
+told him that if he wished her to live in his company willingly,
+not only was she to be a Christian, but he was to become one also,
+in order to be her true husband and live among Christians. In short,
+she won him so that he determined to come with her to her village. He
+persuaded his men to do the same, and in accordance with that they
+have come. In the champan, he told his Tagal wife that she should
+not tell the Castilians that he had captured her, lest they kill him
+or do him some harm; but that she could say that she was bringing
+him and all his people to captivity, as was a fact. Don Sebastian,
+influenced by reasons of expediency, orders that that family return
+to live in Mindanao."
+
+October 31, the patache from the island of Hermosa entered this
+port. It brings as news that five or six Franciscan and Dominican
+friars are there, who have been exiled from China; and that they
+hope to be able to reenter that country. The report that the Dutch
+had occupied the post of Tanchui, which we had left, is said to
+be false. On the contrary, the inhabitants of Tanchui came to beg
+friendship and Spaniards, to which the only answer given was that
+they should come with safety to the fort with their drugs, which
+would furnish them a safe passage.
+
+A champan also arrived from Terrenate at the end of October. It brought
+news that the sargento-mayor, Francisco Hernandez, made an important
+raid into the country of the enemies, with good result. He found in
+Macasar the Spaniards who deserted from this place last year with
+Captain Ramos, whom they had already killed through anger. Francisco
+Hernandez begged the king for permission and aid to arrest them; and,
+being given it, arrested them and placed them in the galleys.
+
+A small vessel, called a cho, came from Macan November 2. It brings
+more authentic news of the conversion of the king of China, than what
+I wrote by the ships. The fathers say of him that he is earnestly
+considering becoming and living as a Christian. Word is also received
+that the fathers of the province of Macan, which is the same province
+as that of Japon, formed a congregation; and that, because they
+have strong hopes of the opening of the door for the conversion of
+that kingdom, in which the faith has been so severely persecuted,
+they have elected two procurators to go to Europa by two different
+ways--Father Antonio Cardin, in the first place, who goes by way of
+Goa; and Father Reymundo de Gouca, who is about to come to Manila in
+order to go by way of Mexico.
+
+At midnight on November 10, so fierce a gale of wind came from the
+south that it broke five of the moorings of the flagship "San Luis,"
+which was about to set sail to Terrenate, having been already laden
+and with its artillery aboard. The wind carried away its shrouds,
+and grounded it in the sand near Palanaque, but in such a manner
+that it could be floated off after five days. The wind also drove
+the second galley ashore, but without doing it any damage.
+
+At dawn on the morning of the eleventh, the ship from India, which was
+the last to go to Macan, anchored in the bay. It lost most of its masts
+by the fierceness of the storm, and the others were disabled. That
+storm struck them after they had already anchored. Had it struck them
+outside, all think that no one would have escaped, to judge from the
+way in which the ship is disabled.
+
+News arrived on the night of November 20 that the second patache,
+which was going to Octong to get a cargo of rice for Terrenate,
+was driven ashore some leguas from here by the gale of wind above
+mentioned, but that all the crew were saved.
+
+Early on the night of November 21, the two galleons, "San Luis"
+as flagship and "San Juan" as almiranta, left for Terrenate. The
+commander-in-chief is Don Pedro de Almonte, and the admiral Don Alonso
+de Alcocer, although with the title of governor of the almiranta
+galleon. The commander of the flagship as far as Sanboangan is
+Don Pedro Fernandez del Rio, who is captain and sargento-mayor for
+the voyage.
+
+A despatch [-boat] arrived from Sanboangan on the last of November,
+which carried some Joloan captives. It happened in this wise. The
+king of Jolo, desiring to recover his hill, and to fortify himself
+anew with the arms that the Spaniards had there, set a snare for
+them with this bit of treachery. He caused an Indian (who was a
+clever leader of the fishermen), called Cahapitan, and his men to
+become very friendly with the Spaniards and to sell them fish--a
+thing that our men, not knowing his intentions, valued very highly,
+because of the privation that they were suffering. After some days
+he came with a message from the king, to the effect that he wished
+to submit and to pay tribute, and that he was sending Indians to be
+registered. In the meantime the fathers [30] were warned by a certain
+Capot, a Christian, who had escaped, that the king was beyond all
+question plotting treason, and they advised the commander of those
+forts of it. He replied that the fathers were entertaining fears,
+and that no attention was to be paid to it. He allowed Cahapitan,
+as well as those who were to be registered, to enter the fort with as
+much security as if they were in Old Castilla. Eight hundred Indians
+having registered, a day was assigned for many more to come. The
+Moros chose that day for the execution of their treachery. Cahapitan
+arrived, with the word that he was bringing three hundred more, who
+should be allowed to enter with him in order to be registered. By
+that time there were already about two thousand Moros in ambush,
+while others were in ships on the sea, in order that they might,
+on seeing the signal, do their part--namely, kill the Spaniards,
+and seize the fort. And that would have happened just as they wished,
+if God in His ineffable providence had not obstructed it; for, at the
+time agreed upon, the commandant caught a high fever, and accordingly
+answer was sent them to return on another day, as he would not register
+them [that day]. The Moros urged strongly that they be registered,
+and their urging caused suspicion. Accordingly, a resolute answer was
+sent that he would not register them until next day. Seeing themselves
+frustrated in their principal intent, they went to the stone-quarry,
+where the force of twenty-three galley negroes and some Sangleys were
+getting stone, being guarded by only five Spaniards. Alleging peace,
+they landed; and, attacking them, killed two Spaniards, three negroes,
+and one Sangley, and wounded two Spaniards, who, with the other one
+that was unhurt, escaped; and they captured the others--to the number
+of thirty-eight persons, counting dead and captured. The commandant,
+having learned of the treachery through those who escaped, sent a
+despatch to Sanboangan asking for help. It was God's pleasure (and
+that was another of His wonderful providences), that the commander Don
+Pedro de Almonte should have determined of his own accord to visit
+Jolo with a small fleet, which he had difficulty in collecting. He
+was met at sea by the despatch-boat. He made haste and arrived at so
+opportune a time that he met Cahapitan and all his men. Cahapitan,
+hiding his treason, went to meet him with a white flag. The commander
+Don Pedro received him cordially, but told him that he should follow
+him to the fort, in order to be well assured that he was free from
+guilt. He followed the commander very securely with thirty-six
+persons; for he had so deceived the commandant at Jolo that he was
+persuaded that Cahapitan was guiltless, and thus he assured the
+commander Don Pedro. That deceit was brought about by his having
+entrusted to Cahapitan a quantity of goods in order to trade them
+for drugs of the country. Yet the commander, Don Pedro, although he
+freed Cahapitan and two old men at the persuasion of the commandant,
+in order that they might carry a letter to the king of Jolo (for the
+commandant petitioned the commander, saying that he would advise that,
+and the traitor [i.e., Cahapitan] desirous of performing another act
+of treachery, facilitated it), detained all the other men. Cahapitan
+went straight to a place where he had three negroes and two Sangleys,
+who had fallen to his share as the principal author of the deed. He
+ordered them to be killed, and his men killed four more of them; but
+one, a Sangley, attacked him, and killed him with his own dagger. The
+Sangley came all bloody to the fort, and disclosed the whole evil
+plot. Thereupon the commandant awoke as from a profound slumber, in
+which his self-interest had buried him. Afterward he confessed that he
+had done wrong in not believing the fathers; thereupon the commander,
+Don Pedro de Almonte, sent his boats under Captain Gaspar de Morales,
+to overrun the island. In that raid much harm was done to the enemy,
+to the profit of their allies, who secured rich pillage. Almost all
+the people escaped; but those people who were captured, together with
+those of Cahapitan, were made slaves. They numbered in all fifty,
+besides three who were killed. That punishment made them tremble,
+and many have concluded to settle quietly and to give hostages. All
+the above I have taken, in summary, from a very long letter of Father
+Alexandro Lopez, who took part in the whole affair; and was in the
+fleet that went round the island.
+
+At Christmas came news that the Chinese pirates were pillaging these
+neighboring coasts. A fleet was sent to attack them, under command
+of Captain Maroto, which returned on the second of January, 1639. The
+report he gives is, that some Chinese of the Parian of Manila fled in
+a champan. They attacked another champan on the sea beyond Mariveles,
+pillaged it, and sent it to the bottom. They attacked another anchored
+in a port, and pillaged and burned it. After that they put out to sea,
+in order to cross over to China. Our men brought in the Chinese who
+had escaped from both champans.
+
+Later, at the beginning of January, news came that the same men were
+pillaging, although in more remote districts where they had captured
+some boats and killed many Spaniards and Indians, who were sailing
+quite unsuspicious of danger. Consequently, a few champans under
+command of Don Pedro Bermudez were again sent against them.
+
+January 15, General Don Geronimo de Sumonte took possession of [the
+post of] castellan and other offices at this port.
+
+On January 18, news was received that the fleet of our champans
+encountered the pirates in the entrance of Mindoro, eight in
+number. They were pursuing a boat of the Augustinian fathers. The
+Spaniards attacked the pirate's flagship, a champan, which, after our
+men had damaged it considerably, escaped, with one other vessel. The
+rest were either sunk entirely, or driven ashore with the loss of all
+their men. Of those driven ashore, some Chinese were captured alive,
+and they were executed by various rigorous modes of punishment. [31]
+Our men did not follow the two other champans, as it was already
+night. The latter returned toward the coasts of this island of Manila,
+where other of our boats were sailing, and committed some depredations.
+
+January 27, a violent north wind sunk a boatload of Joloan captives
+who were fleeing from Manila, six of whom were captured.
+
+February 24, an advice-boat arrived from Macan with news that the
+Portuguese had done a thriving business in the fairs of Japon, but
+that the Japanese were very particular that no priests should go
+there. Accordingly they came to request that the fathers in these
+islands wait patiently, and that no priests go there until God gives
+a better opportunity.
+
+March 4, the father provincial arrived from the visit to Pintados. Two
+days previous they had been attacked by two champans of Chinese
+pirates--who were beaten off, however, because our vessel had
+sufficient defense. Later however, they saw that the pirates were
+pursuing another champan, and that of the father provincial hastened
+to aid the latter, with which aid that vessel escaped safely--which,
+had he not aided it, would infallibly have been captured.
+
+March 20, came tidings that large pieces of planking, masts, and the
+ribs of a vessel which had suffered shipwreck had been found on the
+coast of Paracali, opposite Manila. From appearances, it is thought
+that it is the almiranta "San Ambrosio," which sailed for Mexico from
+these islands last August, quod Deus avertat ["which may God forbid"].
+
+In the middle of March, the ship from India set out for Goa. It was
+the one which had come from Goa, and after setting out for Macan had
+returned disabled to put in at this port. The cho from Macan returned
+to its city by November. The four fathers of the Society who belong
+to that province are going. Don Pedro Bermudez sailed once more, with
+three champans, to attack the Chinese pirates who were harassing the
+coasts of this island, and had committed depredations. They attacked
+the flagship champan, which was a large vessel; they killed sixty
+Sangleys in it, and seized and sent to Manila the others. These men
+have disclosed extensive treacheries that the Chinese were plotting
+in order to stir up the country. The authorities have been making
+arrests and investigations, and they are still doing so; and in
+the middle of April they hanged six of the Sangleys. They declared
+that they were building two champans on the Pangasinan coast, of the
+heaviest planking, and suitable for fighting. The Spaniards went for
+these vessels, and brought them to Manila with the carpenters who
+were working on them. God had great pity for these islands.
+
+On April 18 came the flagship and patache of the Terrenate relief
+ships; they say that the almiranta was driven to leeward of them
+near Macasar. The soldiers remained with the commander Don Pedro
+de Almonte, in order to make an expedition in Mindanao, together
+with other squadrons of ships that have sailed from Caragan and
+Bisayas. From Xolo they write that the inhabitants have attempted to
+plan other acts of treason like the past. The leaders have either
+been killed or are in the galleys. Father Melchor de Vera writes
+of the Moros near Sanboangan that some of them are being baptized,
+and that there are hopes of a great conversion.
+
+On May 30 arrived the almiranta from Terrenate. They have suffered
+many hardships, especially of thirst, which was so great that some of
+them even drank salt water. They bring as news from Mindanao that our
+men are building a fort at La Zavanilla, in the country of Corralat;
+and that he, as well as Moncay, has retreated. Manaquior is daily
+becoming more friendly. With the ships of Terrenate came one hundred
+and fifty Siaos and fifty Terrenatan Christians, to take part in this
+war. They were already about to enter the lands of the enemy. The
+commander, Don Pedro de Almonte, also sent a portion of a fleet to
+coast about the island of Xolo; for a report was current that Dato Ache
+was getting ready to go out to pillage. To Mindanao had already come
+one hundred and twenty valiant Caragas, who had always accompanied
+Corralat from the time when they killed the priests in their land,
+[32] and to whom Don Sebastian had sent a pardon.
+
+News of a new revolt came from Nueva Segobia. The natives killed
+seventeen persons, counting soldiers and their wives. They did not
+wish to kill the father who instructed them, as he was a mild-mannered
+man. Don Marcos Zapata went to attack them, and killed thirty and
+captured thirty others. The rest retreated to the mountains.
+
+It is learned from a ship from Macan, that the second patache, in which
+were two of the recently-ordained fathers, and which sailed from here
+in November, has not arrived at that city. During the last few days
+the report has been current that both it and the vessel from India
+(which sailed again from here in March) have been pounded to pieces
+on the shoals of Paragua, and that great bits of wreckage have been
+washed up at Calamianes, whence they write this. These losses will
+be a great calamity.
+
+News came on May 23 that, our men having arrived overland at the
+lake of Malanao, [33] in the island of Mindanao, two thousand five
+hundred armed Indians were waiting for them in battle array. They
+could not sustain the discharge of our firearms, and retired to the
+lake. Our men had carried six boats in pieces, to fit them together
+and navigate in them. When the Malanaos saw them on the water, they
+gave themselves up as lost. Some five thousand of them fled, while
+more than one thousand remained and offered homage and tribute to the
+king our sovereign. They were all registered, and began immediately
+to render allegiance. They admitted ministers of the gospel, and
+gave hostages and security in everything. Doubtless those who fled
+and hid will soon appear and submit.
+
+The fathers write from Jolo that Dato Ache has been entirely unable to
+do anything since the occurrence at Lami, in which he was buried. [34]
+It is added that since these things are so, all the Joloans are
+perishing from famine. They will never humiliate themselves or
+give signs of surrendering. In some raids that have been made, the
+Spaniards have killed and captured some of their chiefs. Among them
+was a pirate who captured the beneficed priest Francisco Vazquez,
+and refused to give him up for less than two thousand pesos. Now he
+is paying it in the galleys, where he has been put at the oar.
+
+Father Alexandro Lopez writes from Jolo that the commandant of that
+island [i.e., Xines Ros] begged pardon in public from God and the
+fathers for the insults that he had uttered, and for the injuries
+that he had done them; and that he was building the church for them
+with much fervor, before his successor should arrive.
+
+A champan arrived here on May 30, with fifty arrobas of nails which
+had been taken from the wreckage of the ship which, as I said, had run
+aground on the coast of Paracali. Those whose opinion is most accurate
+in that matter have examined it, and believe that it is all from the
+almiranta "San Ambrosio." On that account the profound sadness that
+was general in April and May has ceased; for it had been reported
+that indubitable signs were found that the flagship had been wrecked.
+
+On June 17 arrived a despatch from Sanboangan. The news brought by it
+will be told by a letter from Father Pedro Gutierrez. "On setting out
+for Terrenate, the commander, Don Pedro de Almonte, left an order that,
+when the boats of the volunteers arrived at Samboangan, they were to
+skirt the coast of Jolo. Six caracoas did that, as well as six other
+boats from Basilan, under command of Adjutant Cristoval de las Heras,
+and manned by some Spaniards. Inside of a fortnight, they coasted about
+the island of Jolo and came to another small islet near by. They burned
+many boats, killed some Joloans, and brought back a goodly number of
+captives, without having lost any of our men. They did not delay longer
+because a fixed time had been assigned to them. The said commander Don
+Pedro came back from Terrenate on the sixth of March. As the almiranta
+had not arrived, he despatched Sargento-mayor Don Pedro del Rio to La
+Zabanilla with most of the fleet, so that he might fortify himself
+in La Sabanilla and reduce a village of Caragas who had formerly
+come to Corralat, when fleeing from the Spaniards. Thereupon, as
+soon as the said sargento-mayor arrived at La Zabanilla, he began to
+build the fort, which was finished in good shape, and he reduced the
+Caragas; and, when the general arrived, he was already holding them
+in La Zabanilla. As the almiranta did not arrive, the commander Don
+Pedro came with the rest of the fleet. While he was in La Zabanilla,
+a despatch from Captain Don Francisco de Atensa was brought. It gave
+advices that he had arrived at the lake of Malanao, [35] having entered
+by the gulf of Pangi [i.e., Panguil] with the Spaniards whom he had
+in Caraga, as well as with Caragas and Butuanes; and having fought
+with those of the lake, the Moros fled, and immediately, on the next
+day, the chiefs began to come in to submit to the Spaniards. They
+all did that except one, named Mancaya. In order to accomplish that,
+the commander sent Sargento-mayor Don Pedro del Rio, with his company
+and about five hundred Indians. They all reached the lake where they
+found it unnecessary to stop, as Captain Don Francisco de Atensa
+had pacified all the inhabitants of the lake, and Mancaya; and they
+had given hostages and firearms, and had registered themselves to
+pay tribute to the number of one thousand tributes. They promised to
+receive fathers. Thus those villages of the lake were already reduced,
+and had also given up some Christian captives whom they had taken. The
+lake of Malanao is of a cold rather than a warm temperature, and the
+people have plenty of rice and native fruits. Between the lake of
+Malanao and La Zabanilla there are three chiefs who were related to
+Borongon; those chiefs proceeded to some very rough mountains near
+the lake. It is said that they have about three thousand warriors,
+who are devoted to Corralat; and as he was not a declared friend of
+the Spaniards, they gave us plenty to suffer on the return. For, as
+the road was in such shape that it was necessary to go single file,
+some of the Indians who accompanied the Spaniards were wounded. But
+although the enemy made several ambuscades, they could not inflict
+more damage, because of the care with which the march was made--until
+Holy Saturday, when it began to rain; when a great number of them
+attacked us from ambush and killed one Spaniard, who was without
+[fire: crossed out in MSS.] arms, as he was sick. They also killed
+four Indians, and wounded four others. It was our Lord's pleasure
+that, notwithstanding the rain, the arquebuses of the Spaniards,
+who were near, were not without effect. With that, no more damage
+was done us; the enemy fled, dropping about thirty shields in their
+flight, and they received some damage. The troops of Sargento-mayor
+Don Pedro del Rio arrived at La Zavanilla, where Captain Pedro Navarro
+had been left in command of the infantry, which was in the fort. The
+commander, Don Pedro de Almonte, had gone to Buayen with the rest of
+the fleet; and, having sent a message to Moncay, the latter answered
+that he would fight. In order to seize the posts of the enemy, the
+commander, Don Pedro, sent two boats to the mouth of a creek, by which
+reenforcements could be taken, so that they could not reach Moncay by
+that way; and also to a lake which was up the river of Buayen, which
+was not only an entrance to Buayen, but also where the enemy had their
+retreat in an excellent fortification. The best fortification was in
+a swamp. On that undertaking, the commander, Don Pedro, sent Captain
+Juan Lopez Lucero with his company, and our ally Manaquior and his
+men. That was all very necessary, because of the great number of men
+that the enemy had. They fought for three days, at the end of which,
+it was our Lord's pleasure to let our men dislodge the enemy with
+heavy loss. Of our men only one Spaniard was wounded and one or two
+of Manaquior's men were killed, and one or two others wounded. Our
+men burned all the houses and fortifications.
+
+"At that same time the commander, Don Pedro de Rozas, marched from
+the Spanish fort to that of Moncay, which was very strong; for,
+besides being surrounded by swamps and water, and by a dike that
+had been made, and besides the fort (which was built long ago) of
+stone, there had been added ditches, terrepleins, and stockades with
+their bulwarks. Having reached it, our men planted two bulwarks upon
+fascines with which they could bombard the enemy's fort. At the end
+of three days, a white flag was displayed; and there was a cessation
+in the hostilities, for the time being. Moncay, having declared
+that he wished to become a friend, abandoned the fort that night,
+after setting fire to some of the houses. Next day our men finished
+burning what was left. Not a little wonder was caused, and thanks
+to our Lord, at seeing that so strong a fort had been gained with
+the loss there of one Spaniard and two wounded, one of whom died
+afterward; and four wounded Indians, of whom one died. Besides that,
+they burned many fortified houses, and destroyed palm-trees and sago
+plantations. Some days afterward, the commander sent Don Agustin de
+Cepada to reconnoiter the creeks. The latter came upon a well-fortified
+house, which he burned. He sent Sargento-mayor Pedro de la Mata to
+coast along the shores, and do all the damage possible to the enemy. He
+found a fortified hill also, and it was regarded as a miracle that it
+was taken without any loss of our men. It is thought that the chief
+man in the post was one who was in the bulwark; for as soon as he was
+laid low by a volley from the Spaniards, all the enemy fled, and the
+Spaniards burned all the fortifications and the neighboring houses.
+
+"The commander, Don Pedro, also sent Captain Don Francisco del Castillo
+to an islet which was situated opposite the bar of Buayen. He captured
+some Lutaos, destroyed a great number of boats (and the same was done
+by Adjutant Don Albaro Galindo, who destroyed some boats); but found
+no people. He sent the chief Manaquior to discover whether there were
+any means of finding Moncay, and returned at the end of fourteen or
+fifteen days. As there was no way of being able to pursue Moncay,
+and as the season was advanced, and many were falling sick, and as
+he had to go to Jolo, the commander, Don Pedro Almonte, went with
+the rest of his fleet to La Zabanilla, after having planned that the
+Spaniards who remained in the fort of Buayen, and the men of Manaquior,
+should continue to pursue Moncay--all being under the order of Captain
+Juan Lopez Lucero, castellan and captain of the said post.
+
+"The inhabitants of Basilan, who had gone to Jolo to do all the damage
+possible to the Joloans--in company with six Spaniards, under command
+of Alferez Juan de Ulloa--returned with seventy-seven captives and
+some of our Bisayans, who had been seized by the enemy. They destroyed
+about two hundred boats, counting large and small, first selecting for
+themselves fifteen of the best. They reported that a Lutao chief of
+Jolo, named Lohon, had taken to the fort of Jolo fifty other captives,
+with which, necessarily, the [forces of the] Joloans must be exhausted.
+
+"The commander, Don Pedro de Almonte, coming from Buayen, reached
+the passage of the river of Sibuguei; and Datan, the chief of the
+river, registered eight hundred tributes, and handed over the arms
+and Bisayan slaves that he had there."
+
+We received news here, on the twenty-fifth of June, that the sea
+of Camarines is continually floating ashore more fragments of the
+wrecked ship, which some think that they recognize as belonging
+to the flagship. Consequently, it has begun to be rumored again
+as more probable that, if only one ship has been wrecked, it is
+the flagship. But others are of the opinion that the wreckage shows
+unmistakable signs of the two ships, both flagship and almiranta. That
+casts a gloom over all the land. If that has happened (which may God
+not have permitted), it is thought that it will be impossible for
+these islands to recover in many years.
+
+June 27, a destructive hurricane came down upon this port from the
+northwest, and veered about to almost all points of the compass. It
+overturned some houses, and did great damage in all the others and in
+the churches. It blew the tiles through the air as if they were bits
+of paper. The galleons along the shore were a great cause for anxiety;
+and the commander, Don Geronimo de Sumonte, and Captain Pedro Munoz
+hastened to them quickly, with the prominent men of this port, all of
+whom worked valiantly. That was very necessary; for the galleon "San
+Juan Baptista," although held by eleven cables, came dragging upon "La
+Concepcion," which was being made ready to sail to Mexico. They would
+infallibly have been dashed to pieces, had they not been attended
+to so carefully and diligently. Of the other smaller craft, some
+have been wrecked; and some men were drowned. It was God's pleasure
+to allow the wind's fury to last only four hours. Had it blown with
+the same violence during all the twenty-four hours while it lasted,
+no ship would have escaped, and not a house or church would have been
+left standing. Two hundred houses were overthrown in the village of
+the Indians. But what caused most fear to those natives (and the old
+men say that they have never seen such a thing, or heard it told by
+their ancestors), is that the hurricane carried into the air the small
+boats that they use, which are called bancas and resemble canoes. It
+is said that they were blown about like paper, and that when they
+fell again they were broken to pieces. The hurricane blew with the
+same violence in all the surrounding villages, and caused the same
+damage; it blew down one hundred and seventy houses in Palanaque.
+
+Since July 7 there have been very severe storms of wind and rain. On
+the nineteenth the passage boat [36] was wrecked in the bay and
+it is said that eighteen persons were drowned. Many illnesses have
+occurred during that time, in which a great number of people of all
+nations have perished. Because of this, and because many have been
+persuaded that the two ships of the past year have been wrecked--not
+only because of the signs that the sea has thrown up, but because
+news of their arrival is so belated--there is a universal gloom and
+sorrow over all the country, such as it has never had before. May
+God in His mercy console the land.
+
+On July 19, a letter was received from the alcalde-mayor of Nueva
+Segovia, which states that two English galleons had anchored in a
+port of that coast, and that they are coming to this port of Cavite
+to trade; if the weather permits them to reach this place, their
+intentions will be known.
+
+In the afternoon of July 24, six of the men who had sailed in the
+flagship of last year, which was wrecked September 20, 1638, by the
+fury of a tempest in the Ladrones Islands--on an island thirty-five
+leguas away from the islands where our ships generally land on the
+voyage--arrived here. Besides those who were drowned, many were killed
+by lance-thrusts from the natives. Those who escaped went from island
+to island to those of Uan and Harpana, [37] where they have been
+well treated. The reason alleged for that was, that the Spaniards
+are good men, and leave them iron when they pass there. From the
+island of Uan the natives despatched six Spaniards and two Indians
+in two boats, furnishing them with food from what they had. They
+commended themselves to God, crossed the open stretch of more than
+three hundred leguas, which they did in but one fortnight--a wonderful
+thing, if one will but consider those small boats which are of much
+less burden and steadiness than pirogues and canoes, and even smaller
+than they. They arrived almost dead with hunger, thirst, and lack of
+sleep. Our fathers of the Society of Jesus received them in Palapag,
+and cared for them for several days; after that they recovered,
+and immediately set out in a champan with a good supply of food. The
+Indians of Uan sent those Spaniards, so that they could give the news
+and send a boat for the other twenty-two Spaniards who are there alive,
+with some Indians and negroes, and carry them iron, etc.
+
+As soon as the tidings were told in this port of Cavite, the sobs
+and cries were so many that all were stunned, for there is no one
+who has not lost a son, a father, a brother, a brother-in-law,
+a father-in-law, a son-in-law, or a husband. The loss has been one
+of the greatest that has ever visited these islands, because of the
+loss of men and the poverty of the islands. [38]
+
+Good news is received of the almiranta, for they say that they saw it
+but shortly before they were wrecked, sailing on a good tack; and that
+it was a swift sailer, and seaworthy. Consequently it is thought that
+it has arrived at Nueva Espana. May God grant that it has so happened.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LETTERS FROM CORCUERA TO THE HOLY MISERICORDIA
+
+
+Gentlemen of the financial board of holy Misericordia: Although
+we must always have recourse to God in our troubles, the necessity
+for so doing that offers itself to me at present, in the expedition
+that I shall commence on the day of our Lady of the Conception, is
+very urgent; and obliges me to avail myself not only of the regular
+and ecclesiastical communities, where we are all friends, but also
+of that holy house. [39] Therefore, I beg your Graces, with all the
+persuasion in my power, that you cause God to be petitioned with all
+earnestness in your holy Confraternity of La Misericordia and in your
+residence, to give me favor and good success in this expedition; for,
+besides its being for the common service of God and of the king our
+sovereign, I shall, in so far as pertains to me, if it be the will
+of His Divine Majesty that I return with life, demonstrate my thanks
+and favor to that holy house, as far as may be possible to me. And
+in order that this petition may carry some merit, I send to that
+house one hundred pesos in alms, as an aid in the many alms that it
+distributes among the poor. I would be very glad were I more wealthy,
+in order that my affection and good-will might be seen. May our Lord
+preserve your Graces as I desire. The palace, December 4, 637.
+
+
+Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera
+
+
+
+
+To the purveyor and deputies of the financial board of the holy
+Misericordia: Of the hostages brought from Jolo by General Don Pedro
+Almonte, twenty-odd Moros with their servants live here, and the
+others are going [back] with the conditions for the peace that they
+have made and the tribute which they are to pay. I have thought it
+best to petition your Graces to be pleased to receive two of those
+chiefs in the house of the holy Misericordia, in order that they may
+be instructed in the Christian doctrine, and be gradually converted
+and become Christians. This is a work that is befitting to that house,
+until the time when all the other inhabitants of Jolo become quiet and
+are reduced to obedience. Two or three will be assigned in the same
+manner to the orders. If any needs arise with the lapse of time, I
+beg your Graces to have me advised, so that I may have them supplied;
+and also to entrust the instruction of those chiefs to a careful
+person. May our Lord preserve your Graces as I desire. The palace,
+October 26, 1639. [40]
+
+
+Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+THE UNIVERSITY OF SANTO TOMAS
+
+
+Letter to the Spanish ambassador at Roma
+
+The King. To the illustrious Marques de Castel Rodrigo, my cousin,
+member of my Council, and ambassador in Roma: the bearer, Fray Mateo
+de Villa, of the Order of Preachers, procurator of the province of
+Santo Rosario of the Filipinas Islands in my Western Yndias, has
+informed me that his province has a college called Santo Tomas in
+the city of Manila, of which I am the patron, where there are thirty
+secular collegiates; that for some years past that college has been
+a university through royal permission; that bulls have been conceded
+twice for its conservation; and that grammar, rhetoric, the arts,
+and moral and scholastic theology are studied there, with especial
+profit to the children of that community. He petitions me to issue
+a royal decree authorizing the said college to become a university,
+with the same qualifications and [right of] perpetuity as the others
+of his order in the convents of Santo Tomas in Avila and Santiago at
+Pamplona, in these same kingdoms. The matter having been examined
+by the members of my royal Council of the Yndias, in consideration
+that the city of Manila of the Filipinas Islands is more than three
+thousand leguas from the nearest universities--namely, those of Lima
+and Megico--and that the said university suffers some restriction,
+I have considered it fitting to lend my royal consent for this case;
+and this concession shall continue, for the present. Consequently,
+if in the future there should be a disposition to found a separate
+university, it may be done, as in the cities of Lima and Megico,
+so that it may be a general university, in order that students may
+be graduated from it in all branches, and that its degrees may be
+recognized everywhere. Accordingly, I charge and order you in my name,
+and in virtue of the letter of credit that I am writing, to supplicate
+his Holiness to be pleased to concede a bull, so that the said college
+may be a university with the same qualifications and [right of]
+perpetuity as those of Avila, Santiago, Lima, and Megico; for there
+is not a university of that rank in those islands and provinces, and
+this is therefore expedient for my service and the general welfare of
+those regions. You shall give the matter the care that I expect from
+you, so that the said bull may be immediately drawn up; and therein
+you will render me a service. Madrid, November nine, 1639.
+
+
+I the King
+
+By order of the king our sovereign:
+
+Don Graviel de Ocana y Alarcon
+
+Signed by the members of the Council.
+
+
+[Endorsed: "Duplicate. College of Santo Tomas of Manila. To the
+ambassador at Roma, ordering him to petition his Holiness to concede
+a brief so that the college of Santo Tomas of Manila of the Order of
+Preachers may become a university."]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LETTER FROM FELIPE IV TO URBAN VIII
+
+
+Most Holy Father:
+
+I am writing to my ambassador, in that court, the marques de Castel
+Rodrigo, to petition your Holiness in my name to concede a bull, so
+that a college of the Order of Preachers in the city of Manila of the
+Philipinas Islands, in my Western Yndias, may become a university, with
+the qualifications and [right of] perpetuity of the others which that
+order possesses in Avila and Pamplona in these my kingdoms, as well
+as those of Lima and Megico; and so that, if there be a disposition
+to found a separate university in the city of Manila, it may be done,
+because there is a distance of three thousand leguas to the other
+nearest universities, which are Lima and Megico. I petition your
+Holiness to grant him audience, and to give entire credit to what
+he shall say about this matter and propose in my name; and that you
+order his affair to be despatched with all promptness and with entire
+fulfilment [of the petition]. Thereby I shall receive a special favor
+from your Holiness, whose very holy person may our Lord preserve,
+and may He increase your life for the good and prosperous government
+of His universal Church. Madrid, November nine, 1639.
+
+[Endorsed: "College of Santo Tomas of Manila. To his Holiness,
+petitioning him to concede a brief so that the college of
+Santo Tomas of Manila of the Order of Preachers may become a
+university. Duplicate."]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ROYAL ORDERS AND DECREES, 1639
+
+
+MISSIONS IN MINDANAO
+
+The King. To Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera, knight of the Order of
+Alcantara, my governor and captain-general of the Filipinas Islands,
+and president of my royal Audiencia therein: a letter of August 21,
+637, has been examined in my royal Council of the Indias, in which
+you advise me that you have stationed ministers of the gospel in the
+islands of Mindanao and Bacilan--not only for the instruction of the
+infidels who are in those islands, but for administering the holy
+sacraments to the Castilian soldiers whom you leave there--and that
+you have assigned them such stipends as you considered necessary. I
+approve what you have done in this matter. Moreover, to provide for
+future increase [in the number of infidels converted], the necessary
+mission stations [doctrinas] will have to be established; but in this
+you must avoid unnecessary expense, and, conformably to my royal
+patronage, confer regarding such establishments with such persons
+as you should consult. I trust in you that you will carry out my
+intentions. [Madrid, February 3, 1639.]
+
+
+I the King
+
+By command of his Majesty:
+
+Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon
+
+
+
+
+IN BEHALF OF GRAU Y MONFALCON
+
+The King. To the council, magistracy, and municipal body of the
+city of Manila in the Philipinas Islands: Don Juan Grau y Monfalcon
+has reported to me that in the past year, one thousand six hundred
+and thirty, you appointed him as your procurator-general; and that
+during all that time he has attended to your business affairs,
+with the utmost intelligence, personal attention, friendly interest,
+and promptness (as is generally known). He states that you assigned
+him a salary of a thousand pesos a year, paid in that city, which
+was to come here, invested, at his account and risk; but that, even
+when it arrives in safety, he can realize very little from it that
+remains free from the costs. He regards a thousand pesos as a very
+small salary for his continual occupation [in your affairs], and on
+this account claims that it be increased. Moreover, besides the many
+negotiations that he has despatched, he has been occupied nearly
+two years in preparing and composing the printed memorials which
+he has presented, and which have been examined in my royal Council
+of the Indias; and has given them much labor and solicitude, since
+they embrace so many, so diverse, and so important considerations
+for the conservation of those islands and their commerce, in order
+that they may be presented clearly and distinctly. He has furnished
+from his own funds all the money that has been spent for these books,
+and has never received one real on account of that expense. This sum
+amounts to much more in times so straitened as these, and should be
+highly esteemed. It would be a great disappointment to him if, after
+he had proceeded in all matters with the greatest tact and discretion
+possible (as is proved by the many negotiations which he has concluded
+for the benefit of that city), the powers which he has held from the
+city should be revoked--as usually happens, and as has been done with
+others, his predecessors, solely through interested motives and for the
+personal ends of some of the governors who go to that country. They,
+being well-affectioned to the correspondents whom they leave here,
+urge that city to entrust its affairs to those persons--for which
+no opportunity should be given, since that advice is influenced by
+various motives and considerations. To obviate this, and because it
+is not right that some other person should secure that for which he
+has toiled and incurred expense with so much zeal and solicitude, he
+has entreated me that I would be pleased to command you not to revoke,
+without legitimate cause, the powers that you have given him; and that
+you shall, before enforcing such revocation, state what reasons you
+have for doing so. The matter has been examined in the said my Council,
+where have been and are very evident the personal care, interest, and
+solicitude with which he has been and is attending to your affairs
+aforesaid--as also you will have understood by my decrees of the
+ninth of October in the year one thousand six hundred and thirty-six,
+and the twenty-first of October in six hundred and thirty-seven,
+to which I refer you for all this; together with what you wrote me
+in regard to this in a letter of the fourteenth of June, six hundred
+and thirty-six. In that letter you express your satisfaction with the
+promptness and care with which he furthers your affairs, and ask me to
+confirm the salary which you assign him of the said thousand pesos a
+year, from the funds belonging to that city. I have thought it best to
+issue the present, by which I approve and confirm the salary which you
+have assigned to the said Don Juan Grau as your procurator-general,
+in order that it may be paid to him from the day when it was voted
+to him. And it is my will that this salary be not revoked, either
+now or at any time, while he shall attend to your affairs at this
+my court, unless there be legitimate and sufficient cause for doing
+so; also that the said my Council be first notified of such cause,
+so that, having considered it in their sessions, they may declare
+whether or not it is legitimate; and the said salary shall always be
+paid to him, until some other decision be made. I also command my
+governor and captain-general of those Philipinas Islands, both him
+who now is and those who shall hereafter be in that office, and the
+president and auditors of my royal Audiencia which resides there,
+and yourselves, that you all observe and execute, and cause to be
+observed and executed, exactly and inviolably, the commands contained
+in this my decree, without contravening or exceeding its tenor and
+form in any manner; for such is my will. [Madrid, March 29, 1639.]
+
+
+I the King
+
+By command of the king our sovereign:
+
+Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon
+
+
+
+
+RESTRAINING THE AUGUSTINIANS
+
+The King. To Don Diego Faxardo, whom I have appointed as my governor
+and captain-general of the Filipinas Islands, and president of my
+royal Audiencia therein. It has been reported in my royal Council
+of the Yndias that the religious of the Order of St. Augustine are
+trading in merchandise with whomever they please; and that they make
+use of the natives of the regions and districts wherever they are and
+reside, for whatever they need, without paying the poor men who work
+in their service, or giving them anything else (employing violence
+for this), and thus obtain great wealth for [their houses in] these
+my kingdoms. This is all considered to merit severe correction, both
+because of the traffic and trading that they openly engage in, and
+because of the oppression that many of the said natives receive. I have
+thought best to tell you to be very careful in this, and to provide,
+by the most gentle and prudent measures, all that may be necessary for
+the correction of those transgressions. You shall regulate yourself
+by the decrees and orders that have been issued in this regard; and
+you shall cause those decrees and orders to be observed according to
+their tenor. Madrid, June 2, 1639.
+
+
+I the King
+
+By order of the king our sovereign:
+
+Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon
+
+
+[From another transcript made from the copy of this decree in the
+Archivo general de Indias--its pressmark, "Audiencia de Filipinas;
+registros de oficio; reales ordenes dirigidas a las autoridades del
+distrito de dicha Audiencia; anos 1635 a 1672; est. 105, caj. 2,
+leg. 2, libro 4, folio 122 verso" we take the following endorsement:
+"To Don Diego Faxardo, whom your Majesty has appointed governor of
+the Filipinas Islands, advising him of certain things touching the
+religious of the Order of St. Augustine, which require a remedy;
+so that he may know them, and take what measures are advisable, in
+accordance with the orders and decrees that have been issued regarding
+it." This transcript states also that the decree was signed by the
+members of the Council.]
+
+
+
+
+REGARDING ECCLESIASTICAL DISTRICTS
+
+The King. To Don Diego Faxardo, knight of the Order of Santiago, whom
+I have appointed as my governor and captain-general of the Philipinas
+Islands: report has been made to me, on the part of the archbishop
+of that city of Manila, that Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera,
+your predecessor, gave the district of Quiapo (which belonged to the
+seculars), and the Indians who were reserved for the service of the
+cathedral and of the archiepiscopal house (which was the sustenance
+of the cathedral), to the fathers of the Society of Jesus, because
+of the great pressure that they exerted on him for it, on account of
+the advantages that would follow to them, as they have many estates
+of importance near that district. One of the conditions of their
+removing the said archbishop's exile, was that he must consent to
+have that district given to the fathers of the Society. In order to
+relieve himself from his distressed condition, the archbishop feigned,
+under compulsion, assent to this--regarding it as certain that, as
+such action was to the prejudice of my royal patronage, I would not
+consent to it. He also petitioned that I would be pleased to have
+my royal decree issued, ordering that the fathers of the Society be
+despoiled of the said district of Quiapo, and that it be restored
+to the seculars, together with the adjoining districts of San Anton
+and Santa Cathalina--which the bishop of Camarines separated from
+the said district, in the time while he governed the archbishopric
+during the exile and absence of the said archbishop; and which he
+gave to the cura of Santiago, who was his creature; also the district
+of Nauhang, on the island of Mindoro, which has always belonged to
+seculars. By negotiations effected by the fathers of the Society,
+those districts have been set aside for them, to the prejudice of so
+many poor seculars. The matter having been examined by my royal Council
+of the Yndias, as well as what was written to me concerning the same
+matter by the said archbishop, I have considered it fitting to issue
+this my decree. By it, I order you, immediately upon its receipt,
+to place those districts, exactly, and without admitting any excuse
+or other reason, in the same condition that they always had and have
+had, notwithstanding the contract signed by the said archbishop, at
+the instance and petition of the said my governor and of the auditor
+then in my Audiencia. You shall advise me at the first opportunity
+that you have carried out my order. Madrid, July 8, 1639.
+
+
+I the King
+
+By order of the king our sovereign:
+
+Don Gabriel de Acana y Alarcon
+
+
+
+
+REBUKING THE BISHOP OF CAMARINES
+
+The King. To the reverend father in Christ, bishop of the church
+of Camarines of the Filipinas Islands, and member of my Council:
+I have been informed that you are not living in your bishopric, [41]
+and that you are residing in the city of Manila, where your free life
+is giving offense; and that you have attempted to erect a tribunal of
+appeals, without leave, declaring yourself to be an apostolic judge
+by a brief from his Holiness. Inasmuch as your residence outside of
+your church may occasion troubles, besides your necessary obligation
+to live there, I have decided to charge you (as I am doing), to leave
+the city of Manila or any other place where you are residing, as soon
+as you receive this decree, and to go to govern your church. If you do
+so, I shall consider myself well served by you. In order that you may
+not offer any excuse in this matter, I am ordering the royal officials
+of my royal treasury not to pay you any of your stipend from my royal
+treasury so long as you do not comply with what I here order you. I
+have been surprised that you should have attempted to hold a tribunal
+in the said city of Manila, under pretext or title of appeals. Madrid,
+July 8, 1639.
+
+
+I the King
+
+By order of his Majesty:
+
+Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon
+
+
+The King. To the officials of my royal treasury of the Filipinas
+Islands: inasmuch as it was reported in my royal Council of the Yndias
+that the bishop of Camarines resides in that city of Manila, where he
+attempts to hold his court under pretext of certain appeals, I charge
+him, by another decree of the date of this, to go immediately to his
+own church, because of the deficiency that his person may cause in
+its government. In order that he may offer no excuse in this matter,
+I order you to grant him nothing from my royal treasury on his
+salary, unless he shall obey my orders; for so is my will. Madrid,
+July 8, 1639.
+
+
+I the King
+
+By order of the king our sovereign:
+
+Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon
+
+
+
+
+INSPECTION AT ACAPULCO
+
+The King. To Marques de Cadereita, my relative, member of my Council
+of War, and my viceroy, governor, and captain-general of the provinces
+of Nueva Espana: in a letter written to me by the royal officials of
+the port of Acapulco under date of last February 24, of this year,
+[they stated] that you sent the auditor [contador], Christoval de
+Medina, to that port with a salary of twenty-three ducados which
+was distributed among himself, the constable, and the notary, to
+investigate the merchandise that came from Philipinas this year in
+the patache that was sent from those islands; and that my royal
+duties scarcely amounted to four thousand ducados. Since I have
+three satisfactory and trustworthy officials in the said port, they
+have petitioned me to have the above three men removed from that
+place. They say that by the going of such judges they themselves
+serve only as witnesses of what is public, since no other thing is
+permitted them; and that such an action deprives them of the authority
+and exercise of their offices, and they are disaccredited and left
+without respect and reputation, as all think and believe that you
+did it because of some incapacity in them. The matter having been
+examined in my royal Council of the Yndias, together with what you
+wrote me in regard to it, I have considered it fitting to issue
+the present. By it I give you authority to send such ministers to
+Acapulco whenever any extraordinary causes shall arise; but that,
+if there are no such causes, this may be dispensed with, because of
+the expenses that are incurred by my royal estate, especially since
+Don Pedro de Quiroga was there so short a time ago. Inasmuch as the
+commerce of those islands has been reported to be in great distress,
+I charge and order you to try to encourage and aid it by all possible
+means. Since some change has been made in the amount permitted to
+them, you shall see what can be done for their greater relief, until
+the arrival at those kingdoms of Don Juan de Palafox y Mendoza, [42]
+of my royal Council of the Yndias, to whom the settlement of those
+matters is committed. Madrid, September 16, 1639.
+
+
+[I the King]
+
+
+
+
+COLONISTS NEEDED IN THE ISLANDS
+
+The King. To Marques de Cadereyta, my relative, member of my Council
+of War, and my viceroy and governor and captain-general of Nueva
+Espana, or the person or persons vested with its government: in a
+letter written to me by the city of Manila, under date of August two
+of the past year, six hundred and thirty-eight, in regard to various
+matters, and which has been examined in my royal Council of the Indias,
+there is a section of the following tenor:
+
+"This kingdom finds itself in great need of inhabitants at the present
+time, as a result of the said campaign; for they are dying off, and
+it is many years since people have come to live in these islands
+as citizens. That has been understood to arise from the loss that
+the citizens have experienced, both in the affairs of this commerce
+and in the execution of the favors and rewards that his Catholic
+Majesty Phelipe Second, our king and sovereign (who is in heaven),
+was pleased to grant to such citizens. For at present, with those of
+account in this community, the citizens do not number ninety. This
+is very pitiful, and it is fitting that your Majesty please to have
+it corrected by ordering the said viceroy to use all possible and
+effective efforts in sending as many citizens as possible every
+year. They should be persons of good standing and ability, both for
+the service of your Majesty and for the greater renown and authority
+of this kingdom."
+
+And inasmuch as it is proper that you attempt to relieve such
+necessity, I order you to try to procure this by all possible ways
+and plans, and with all the mildness and prudence that is fitting. By
+so doing I shall consider myself well served by you. Given at Madrid,
+October three, one thousand six hundred and thirty-nine.
+
+
+I the King
+
+By order of the king our sovereign:
+
+Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon
+
+Signed by the members of the Council.
+
+
+[Endorsed: "To the viceroy of Nueva Espana, ordering him to endeavor
+by all the means possible to send to Filipinas every year as many
+citizens as possible who should be of good standing and ability."]
+
+
+
+
+DIRECTIONS TO THE ARCHBISHOP
+
+The King. To the very reverend father in Christ, archbishop of the
+metropolitan church of the city of Manila: your letter of July 31
+of the past year, 1638, has been examined in my royal Council of the
+Yndias, and I shall answer you in the present in regard to some points
+that have been decided.
+
+You state that, although the mode of the presentations for the missions
+has been resolved upon and determined, the decrees are not obeyed;
+that there is a very great need of seculars for those missions, and
+those who are there are but youths who do not understand the language
+[of the natives]; and that hence you have deemed it advisable not
+to assign any mission to seculars: You state that having conferred
+on this point with the Audiencia, they resolved that no innovation
+should be made until the arrival of the governor, who had gone on
+the Jolo expedition. It has been deemed best to tell you that when
+the governor shall arrive, and shall come to a decision, you shall
+advise me of the results of it. In the meanwhile you shall observe
+the decrees, unless serious troubles result from doing the contrary.
+
+The prebends that you state are vacant in that church have been
+provided with incumbents, as you will have heard. My royal Council
+of the Yndias will take care of the names which you present to me,
+for the occasions that arise.
+
+In regard to the property of Don Fray Francisco Zamudio, bishop
+of Nueva Caceres, who died on the twenty-seventh of last April,
+you shall cause the orders that have been issued to be observed, so
+that his creditors may be heard and paid, in accordance with justice,
+and upon legal proof of their claims.
+
+I have read what you wrote about the great exhaustion and distress
+experienced by the natives of those islands through the many
+assessments that are made continually, throughout the year, on all the
+products of the country. I am writing to the governor and Audiencia
+not to make any innovation in these matters, so that this evil may
+be corrected; and under no consideration to load any new troubles or
+burdens on the Indians. Madrid, December 16, 1639.
+
+
+I the King
+
+By order of the king our sovereign:
+
+Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon
+
+
+
+
+OPPRESSION OF THE INDIANS
+
+The King. To the president and auditors of my royal Audiencia of the
+city of Manila: in a letter written to me by the archbishop of that
+church, July 31 of the past year, 638, he states that the natives
+of those islands are greatly exhausted and burdened by the many
+assessments made on them every year, in all the products of the
+country, by my governors. The latter take the products from them
+at a loss, gathering and collecting them with great trouble to the
+natives, and no money is given them; while they are seized and beaten,
+and thrust into prison for many days, because they do not give what
+they do not possess--although the goods can be bought at a somewhat
+higher price in the market-place. On account of this, and by the
+hardships consequent on sending them to the forests to cut wood, the
+natives are being exterminated, and are dying off. The matter having
+been examined in my royal Council of the Yndias, I have considered
+it fitting to issue the present. By it I order you not to make any
+innovation; and you shall not, under any consideration, cause new
+troubles or burdens to the Indians. Madrid, December 17, 1639.
+
+
+I the King
+
+By order of the king our sovereign:
+
+Don Gabriel de Ocana y Alarcon
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+EVENTS IN THE FILIPINAS ISLANDS
+
+FROM AUGUST, 1639, TO AUGUST, 1640
+
+
+On the fourth of August, 1639, orders were given that the ship
+"Concepcion," built in Camboja, should leave the port for her voyage
+to Nueva Espana; and in the afternoon of that day began a furious
+vendabal, which lasted three days. This compelled the ship to ask
+for aid by firing two cannons, as its people feared some danger;
+but when the storm was over, the ship began its voyage.
+
+At that very time, five large ships had sailed from Manila, on
+their return to Great China; and two of these were driven ashore by
+the great force of the wind, four leguas from Manila. Six hundred
+China-men were drowned, although a still larger number escaped [to
+land]; for, on account of the lack of succor in these two years,
+[43] many were returning, leaving their houses and shops deserted.
+
+On the seventh came the unexpected news of the relief-ships; their
+arrival was celebrated with the utmost joy, and all the bells were
+rung. The people were revived by this news, all the more because
+these ships were the almiranta of last year, and the patache of two
+years ago--which, with so great injustice and excessive harshness,
+had been detained at Acapulco--the [sort of] injury of which this
+country has complained to God and to the king for many years. Wives
+who had put on mourning for their husbands took off those garments,
+giving thanks to God and receiving from His hand their husbands,
+as it were, restored to life. The Chinese, who learned the news on
+board their ships, disembarked, and returned to their shops and their
+trading. There was also a circumstance in this coming of the ships,
+in which God displayed the providence that He exercises over this
+country; for they arrived at the port of Nueva Segovia, from which
+had just departed two hostile Dutch galleons, who had pretended that
+they were English and friendly [to us].
+
+On the eleventh of August arrived from Maluco Father Manuel Carballo,
+rector [there] of the Society; he came on behalf of the governor,
+Don Pedro de Mendiola, to ask for aid, because the kings of Tidore and
+Terrenate had formed an alliance--a thing which we had never expected,
+because those peoples were more hostile to each other than dogs and
+cats. The reason which the king of Tidore gives for this unfriendly
+act against the Spaniards is, that the present which the governors [of
+Filipinas] were wont to send every year, in the name of his Majesty,
+to the kings of Tidore his ancestors, has not been sent to him for
+the last four years. The father rector of Maluco says that this may
+be true, and is perhaps the ostensible reason; but that the king has
+other and hidden reasons, which go deeper and give more cause for
+anxiety. Now Francisco de Figueroa is going [there] as proprietary
+governor, and he will aid in soliciting the proper assistance for
+any emergency.
+
+On the fifth of August, Captain Cristobal Marquez set out for Hermosa
+Island; he is going as successor to Sargento-mayor Pedro Palomino, who
+is governor there. The warder of this port of Cavite is Sargento-mayor
+Alonso Garcia Romero, of the Order of Santiago; [he fills that office]
+to the great satisfaction of all.
+
+On the twenty-first of August, at daybreak, a Spaniard arrived here
+from Nueva Segovia; he says that the two relief ships from Mejico
+were wrecked at that port, and one hundred and fifty persons were
+drowned, which has been a severe punishment from God upon the past;
+[44] and with this news the people have returned to their former
+sadness. The ships were lost on the fifth of August. It was afterward
+learned that the succor despatched by the king had been taken out
+of the ships before they were wrecked; but that the property of the
+citizens that has been lost will amount, in luxuries [45] and money,
+to five hundred and fifty thousand pesos.
+
+At the end of September, General Don Pedro de Almonte arrived from
+Jolo, where our affairs have been steadily improving. The natives of
+the island remain subdued; almost all their chiefs who would undertake
+to defend themselves are dead; and even those who never paid tribute
+to the king of Jolo are now registered and are our subjects. All
+the pirates have fled, and the king is hiding in the mountains; and
+our men have taken more than three hundred captives during the last
+three months.
+
+On the sixth of October, the cho (craft) which came last year arrived
+here from Macasar. It came loaded with slaves, and pepper, and various
+kinds of cotton cloth. Its people say that the king was sorry that
+he had not put to death those of his vassals who fought against
+the Spaniards in Jolo; and that if any of them should go there,
+the king would take his life. Knowing that Malaca was expecting
+to be blockaded by the Achenese and the Dutch, and that the city
+had not sufficient provisions, the king had ordered his people to
+collect a quantity of rice--two hundred coyos, each coyo containing
+thirty-two fanegas--and had sent it [to Malaca] in his galleys; it
+is not yet known what success they had. Those people say, moreover,
+that in Macasar they have heard the English and the Dutch themselves
+say that in the independence and strength of Holanda there are solid
+foundations for believing that that state will make strong efforts
+to extend its power from the year 1640 on.
+
+They also relate, as news, that the Dutch were at the entrance to Goa,
+with fourteen ships; and the Portuguese came out in staunch galleons
+to fight them, sending eleven of the Dutch vessels to the bottom;
+while two of their own were sunk. It is also stated that the patache
+which was purchased at Macao from the English, and despatched from
+here for Yndia, was seized by the Dutch in the strait of Sincapura;
+its captain, one Carballo, remained in Macasar, and it was he who
+related this misfortune.
+
+Ytem: [it is said] that a man named Caldeira went from Malaca as an
+envoy to the king of Achen, regarding himself as quite safe; but that
+the king gave orders that his men should arrest the envoy as soon as
+he should enter the palace. When they tried to carry out this command,
+this man and the other Portuguese placed themselves on the defensive;
+all the men on the ship hastened to their aid with fire-balls, [46]
+and with these they killed many Achenese; and the palace was set on
+fire, being entirely consumed. They estimate the losses of the king
+at five millions. All the Portuguese there were killed.
+
+On the last day [of October], a ship from Terrenate arrived at
+Manila. Its people say that the Tidorans and Terrenatans, aided by
+the Dutch, had put to death Cachil Naro, the former king of Tidore--a
+very regrettable event. He was deposed by the master-of-camp Pedro
+de Heredia; and recently had come an order from his Majesty that our
+people should restore Naro to power, because he had given more evidence
+of friendship to us than had the present king. Indeed, the authorities
+were endeavoring to accomplish that change, even if this order had
+not arrived. Extensive revolts are feared there; and on this account
+reenforcements are being sent, together with galleys, which are very
+effective in those islands. It is also said that the Dutch will lie
+in wait for these reenforcements; so, in order to circumvent them,
+we shall endeavor to send the relief earlier than ever before.
+
+By this ship comes some news from Mindanao: that Moncay had
+captured a brigantine from our then and slain all the Spaniards
+(who defended themselves bravely)--except their commander, who was
+soon laid low by them, and remains a captive. Ytem: they say that
+Moncay is making great efforts to form an alliance with Corralat;
+who has answered Moncay that he must try to gain over Manaquior, and
+that, if the latter shall declare himself against the Spaniards, he
+[i.e., Corralat] will garrison his forts against them. Those chiefs
+have assailed Manaquior with their entreaties, urging him to desist
+from aiding the Spaniards; and it is reported that he already shows
+himself lukewarm in his friendship to us.
+
+From Jolo we are informed that the islanders are in such haste to be
+enrolled for paying tribute that now very few of them are missing
+from the list. The rest of the news will be told by extracts from
+the following letters.
+
+In one from Father Alejandro Lopez, of the Society of Jesus, dated
+at Jolo on August 9, 1639, sent to Father Luis de Pedraza of the same
+Society: "On the second of August, I baptized two women--one a Lutao,
+the other the slave of another Lutao," etc.
+
+In one from Father Andres de Zamora, of the Society of Jesus, in
+Mindanao, at La Sabanilla, August 13, 1639, to the same father Pedraza:
+"In Buhayen, thanks to our Lord, our affairs are prospering. On the
+occasion of an expedition which Lucero made to Taulan, the Spaniards
+obtained by a clever plan and stratagem a crowd of captives, both men
+and women. Part of them are going in this champan, and the rest will
+go with the brigantine--which Captain Lucero sent, in order that some
+reparation might be made to them; I baptized them all. The Spaniards
+who were with Manaquior went down to the lake with the dato; and
+Balatamay was there with five hundred Moros, waiting for the Spaniards,
+to fight against them. But they did not remain there, recognizing that
+our troops were stronger than they. Our men killed twenty-five of
+the Moros, and carried five to the fort. One man, who came mortally
+wounded, asked for baptism, and died within twenty-four hours. On
+the eighth of October, Captain Don Pedro Bermudez set out with fifty
+Spaniards, in two champans, to be stationed in the presidio at the
+lake of Malanao in Mindanao; Father Gregorio Belin goes with him. At
+the same time, Don Pedro will pursue the Camucones, who have appeared
+on a piratical expedition with sixty boats. It is known that they
+have captured some vessels and the licentiate Raymundo de Quinones."
+
+In this month of October came from Hermosa Island Sargento-mayor
+Pedro Palomino, who was governor there and goes with the same office
+to Samboangan. Of the two champans that went with Captain Cristobal
+Marquez, one foundered in mid-ocean, with its men and the money. On the
+return voyage of those who came with Palomino, one was separated from
+the rest by a storm, and up to this time has not arrived at Manila.
+
+The patache "San Nicolas" is going with the relief for Terrenate;
+its chief pilot is Captain Machado, a pilot of long standing and
+great experience. This vessel has orders to go, on the return voyage
+from Terrenate to the Ladrones Islands, in order to carry away the
+Spaniards and other people from the wrecked ship who are there.
+
+On the fifth of November the relief for Terrenate left this port;
+it carries an abundant supply of men and provisions, and is under
+the command of Captain Andres de Urbina. On the same day we learned
+of the depredations committed by the Camucones; and it is believed
+that Dato Ache is coming, who was in Borney, urging the king to send
+a large armed fleet against these islands.
+
+On the twenty-first of November, in the morning, confused reports
+reached us that the Sangleys had revolted at Calamba; and all the
+rest of the day they spent in strengthening their forces. They
+killed the alcalde-mayor and two priests, and burned the church;
+and destroyed other churches in neighboring villages. Don Sebastian
+received the news on the twentieth, at night; he had the gates of
+Manila opened, although keeping them under close watch, in order
+that the people living outside the walls might take refuge within,
+with their goods. That very night, he despatched by land Captain
+Pedro Martin de Aduna with his company of horsemen, in order to find
+out how the matter stood, and punish the insurgents. On the morning
+of the twenty-first, they encountered the Sangleys, who, they said,
+amounted to three thousand men, while the Spanish cavalry numbered only
+thirty. The captain and three others carelessly advanced into a marshy
+place, where they could neither extricate themselves nor be aided,
+and were slain. The rest, after killing some Chinese, retreated,
+as they were so few and their horses were tired out, to Paranaque,
+to await the orders of the governor; and this was the condition in
+which affairs remained yesterday. It is said that the Sangleys attack
+like mad dogs, and that the weapons that they carry are the sickles
+with which they cut their rice, fastened to poles, and some lances.
+
+At this port of Cavite the Chinese have remained peaceable, and with
+the Indians and Japanese they very willingly dragged out some pieces
+of artillery, with which Sargento-mayor Alonso Garcia Romero, who is
+in command of the port, armed two small forts, which are at the end of
+the village. With these and other precautions of an excellent soldier,
+we all consider ourselves very safe. The natives, although they have
+not forsaken their village, have sought shelter, as far as possible,
+with the religious orders. The Japanese, blacks, and Indians are
+full of courage, whatever be the outcome; I believe that they will
+rejoice, if the opportunity arise, to satiate themselves for once
+with killing Chinese.
+
+In order that the origin of this disturbance may be understood, it
+must be noted that Don Sebastian, desirous of augmenting the estate
+of his Majesty, set a great number of Chinese at work in some large
+meadows which are watered and rendered fertile by certain rivers,
+and are called Calamba. Many of these men were levied by force,
+and entirely against their will; many of them fell sick during the
+past months, and it is said that more than three hundred of them
+died. Accordingly, they became desperate; and it is well known that
+the season is an unwholesome one. The time came for the Chinese to pay
+their license money and rent, which in all was more than twenty-five
+pesos for each one. The officials harassed them for the pay, and they
+had not the means to pay what was due; accordingly they have broken
+loose in this revolt. The rents from the lands, too, have proved to
+be unprofitable, from the manner in which they have been let; while,
+if they belonged to individuals, they would be a source of gain.
+
+Since the twenty-second of November, when I wrote the above, I have
+purposely omitted to write an account of current events, for along with
+the facts were reported a thousand lies; but today, the twenty-eighth
+of the same month, everything is now known and manifest.
+
+After the Chinese killed Captain Martin de Aduna, they came close to
+Manila, rousing to revolt all the Sangleys whom they encountered. They
+arrived at San Pedro de Macati, the novitiate's residence of the
+Society of Jesus. As the church there was strongly built, and vaulted,
+Father Francisco Vicente and the brothers Esteban de Oliver and
+Raimundo Alberto, who were the only inmates of the house at that time,
+went up into it. Some mulattoes and house-servants had also taken
+refuge there, as well as over one hundred persons from the native
+village. These made some resistance to the enemy, but, as they had
+no other weapons than tiles and bricks, finally the multitude of the
+Sangleys (who numbered more than three thousand) broke down the doors
+of the church and the house, and set fire to the buildings. Those
+who were in the church, tormented by the smoke and flames, within
+twenty-four hours came to an agreement with the insurgents, who
+assured them of their lives and kind treatment. Some of the mulattoes
+and natives came out with the father and the brethren; the Chinese
+treated the father well, and manacled the brethren, but they killed
+all the rest (fifteen in number), on the spot. At this sight, those
+who had not come out of the church held back, and refused to leave
+it; and this saved their lives, for at that time the sargento-mayor,
+Don Juan de Arceo, arrived, with two hundred Spanish infantry and
+eighty horsemen. He also had a hundred Pampango and four hundred Tagal
+Indians, all carrying firearms; and two field-pieces. These began to
+do damage to the enemy, but only for a short time; for the Sangleys
+asked for a truce, which was granted them. The Sangleys sent Father
+Francisco Vicente to negotiate a peace for them with the Spaniards. By
+a special providence of Heaven, at that very time arrived, by way of
+the river, Adjutant Benavides with twenty-five men. He dashed upon
+them like a lion, and with his men made so fierce an attack upon
+the crowded Sangleys that many of the enemy were slain. The Sangleys
+who were engaged in discussing a peace sent Brother Alberto to tell
+the Spaniards who had come from the river not to do them any harm,
+because they were already making an agreement for peace. Arriving, he
+saw that some of the enemy were beginning to make some resistance, and
+he called aloud, "Spaniards, at those who are fleeing!" But they had
+no need to do so, for the enemy were already in flight; the Spaniards
+followed them and dislodged them from the church, and all the Sangleys,
+in confusion, began to disperse. In this confusion, Brother Esteban
+was able to make his escape, and those who were in the church could
+now leave it. The troops of Don Juan de Arceo seized their weapons,
+and also fell on the conquered ones; and the latter were quickly
+dispersed through the fields, leaving some three hundred Sangleys
+dead. The mulattoes and Indians from Manila killed many, and captured
+more than three hundred; most of these are here in the galleys. More
+than a thousand Sangleys must have been killed in these encounters.
+
+Don Juan de Arceo, thinking that most of the enemy would go back
+toward Calamba, went after them. At this time Don Fernando Galindo,
+who was then at Los Banos, assembled five hundred Indians, to fall
+on the Sangleys. But the sargento-mayor arrived, and learned that
+fifteen hundred Sangleys had fortified themselves on a lofty hill
+[47] that is above Calamba; and they agreed that their men should
+ascend this hill, the Indians on one side, and the Spaniards on
+the other. This was accordingly done; the Spaniards reached the top
+first, and overcame the enemy, killing more than thirteen hundred
+Sangleys. The rest broke away on the side where the Indians were,
+and have been driven into the mountains; a company of Spaniards and
+some Indians have gone in pursuit of them. With this encounter, which
+was on Saturday, the whole affair has come to an end; and therefore on
+yesterday, which was Sunday, the Te Deum laudamus was sung in Manila.
+
+Among those who distinguished themselves in this last combat were Juan
+de Montoya, Lezcano, and Ugalde. This last one came here this year;
+although he had received three lance-thrusts, he pursued the enemy,
+fighting valiantly. Don Fernando Galindo, moreover, did valuable
+service in urging forward the men to the attack.
+
+Among those whom we mentioned above as being killed with Aduna in the
+marshes of Vinan was Alferez Don Antonio Tornamira, who fell senseless
+when they attacked him with clubs, and they left him for dead. Later,
+he came to himself, and while he was looking for some place where
+he could hid himself he came upon a Sangley, who also had hidden in
+a thicket; he did not wish to go with the insurgents. They agreed
+together to seek for some way of escape, and the Sangley advised the
+Spaniard to dress himself in Chinese garb; he did so, and finally
+the two reached Manila. The governor, Don Sebastian, gave Alferez
+Tornamira a suit of his own garments; and to the Sangley he granted
+an exemption [from tributes?] for several years. The latter declared
+that he wished to be baptized.
+
+Yesterday and day before yesterday, the entire revolt was regarded as
+suppressed and ended, without there having been any disturbance on the
+other side of the river. This morning, the twenty-ninth of this month,
+we saw many large fires toward Manila; we knew not what to think, until
+we received a letter in which we were informed that from the other side
+of the river from the river San Mateo, many new insurgents had come,
+who were burning everything; and the fires that we saw were Meyhaligue
+[48] and Santa Cruz, on opposite sides of the river. From the Parian
+alone different troops of soldiers, both foot and horse, have sallied
+out against them; we are hoping for their entire success. We are
+informed that people are talking very earnestly of taking steps to
+prevent such things from ever happening again; for this purpose there
+was held yesterday a general conference of all the civil, military,
+and religious. [49]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+RELATION OF THE INSURRECTION OF THE CHINESE
+
+
+Its causes and beginning
+
+Desires for the increase of the royal revenues, which Don Sebastian
+Hurtado de Corcuera, governor of those islands, always tried to carry
+out, with greater exactitude in intention than success in the outcome,
+gave occasion to the Chinese of the city of Manila and its environs
+to attempt an insurrection, the destruction of that country, and
+the complete extermination of the Spaniards there. I do not mention
+other causes, [50] in order to reduce them to those that have existed
+and those which the Sangleys have tried to assign as a pretext for
+their insurrection. That which surpassed the others, as being the
+greatest in their estimation, was that many laborers saw that they
+were obliged to live in a new village which the governor built in the
+lands of Calamba, [51] for certain advantages to the royal service;
+the object was, to produce there the rice sufficient for the presidios
+of these islands, by which his Majesty would be spared a great expense,
+and the government employees the neglect and difficulty [usual] in its
+provision. The good intention of the one who made this arrangement was
+recognized, if it had also been so on the part of those on whom its
+fulfilment depended. Its execution was not without hardships, which
+occasioned all the more resentment the more the comforts experienced
+in their old villages, attracted them. The exemptions promised by
+the government, with the desire of keeping the Chinese contented,
+because of the advantage that accrued to his Majesty in obtaining
+the necessary food from those lands--by which the Chinese could gain
+greater profits, and the Indians, being exempted from such burdens,
+could make extraordinary gains--were sufficient to overcome those
+difficulties. Attention was given to both of those peoples in the
+change. But as it caused many of them to fall sick in a short time,
+and more than three hundred died because of the unhealthful climate, a
+great disturbance was caused in their minds--which was greater because
+they were oppressed by the alcalde-mayor with continual extortions and
+punishment. Consequently, desirous of lifting so heavy a yoke from
+their necks, they rushed on to the last risk, whether to themselves
+or to others; and determined to kill him who ruled them there, and
+to go ahead, committing all the damage possible in all the Indian
+villages, and on the possessions of the Spaniards, until they came
+in sight of Manila, where they would call out the other Chinese from
+the Parian and the villages round about--if they did not rise before,
+of which it has not been possible to gain certain information; for,
+the cause being their own, they all would force the governor, who
+had but few infantrymen, to pardon their deed; and, if they did not
+succeed in this, confident in their multitude, they would go forward
+to besiege the city. Then, in conformity with the resolution adopted,
+they assaulted the house of the alcalde-mayor [52] on November 19. He
+was entirely unguarded, the more for [having no] fears of so fatal
+an outcome. They treacherously killed him, manifesting their cruelty
+against him, as in revenge for the cruelties that they were shortly
+before lamenting as caused by him on themselves. They burned the
+village, ordering their wives to hide in the mountains, while they
+went to try their fortune--saying that, if they found a good one, and
+gained the victory over the Spaniards, they would return for them;
+or, in case of adverse fortune and their own defeat, their families
+would remain alive and safe in their place of retirement.
+
+
+
+
+Advice is given in Manila. First assault of the enemy, and its result
+
+News of the insurrection reached this city on the night of November
+20; and warning was given to the entire city and its environs by two
+cannon that were fired. The gates were opened, although with care
+and caution, so that those outside could seek shelter, and those
+who wished could guard their property. Inasmuch as the importance
+of the matter did not admit of any delay, the governor despatched
+Captain Martin de Aduna that same night overland, so that with his
+company of cavalry, he might go to see what was being done, and mete
+out the suitable punishment to the enemy, since people here were on
+the outlook because of the news with warning. The governor also sent
+advices to the castellan and chief magistrate of the port of Cavite,
+namely, Sargento-mayor Alonso Garcia Romero, so that he might be on
+the watch. Captain Aduna left Manila immediately, and taking thirty
+horsemen with him, he came within sight of the enemy on the morning of
+the following day, to the number of more than three thousand. All were
+armed with spears, or with bamboos hardened in fire, and on these were
+fastened the blades with which they harvest their rice. They defied
+the Spaniards to come on and fight. Their own guilt, the number of
+men, and the fortified position that they were occupying--which was
+certain swamps in the lands of Vinan, whose houses and churches they
+had burned--caused them to be bold. Our captain attacked them with
+greater valor than prudence, for, not heeding the danger, [53] he
+advanced into the swamp, where, finding it impossible to manage his
+horse, he and three others who followed him in the same enterprise
+were killed. The others having killed more than two hundred Chinese,
+and being but few in number, retreated (since the horses were tired,
+and they were in a position where they could not be aided) to the
+village of Paranaque, to await the governor's orders to whom a
+father of the Society, who had accompanied the captain to confess
+and encourage our men, went to give advices.
+
+
+
+
+The enemy advance to San Pedro. They are pursued, and are defeated
+in Calamba
+
+The news of the death of Captain Martin de Aduna caused disquiet and
+sadness in the city, for he was well liked there. Greater damages
+were feared if they did not immediately summon all their forces,
+in order to deprive the enemy of their strength and hobble their
+feet. In order to do that the governor sent out his sargento-mayor,
+Don Juan de Arceo, with two hundred infantrymen, eighty cavalrymen, one
+hundred Pampangos, and four hundred Tagal Indians, all with firearms,
+and two pieces of cannon. They were being prepared with all possible
+rapidity in Manila, when the enemy began to march toward San Pedro,
+the house of the novitiate of the Society of Jesus, doing all the
+harm possible along the way. They had about four thousand men,
+and were joined, either through force or willingly, by those of
+Calamba and the farm-lands round about. That same day, November 21,
+they reached San Pedro, where a father and two brothers were then
+living. The father confessed all the people of Pasay, a village
+whose people had, in order to escape the danger, taken refuge in
+that house. The brothers, with some of the more courageous Indians,
+tried to put themselves in a state of defense; and, although with only
+tiles and bricks, they wounded many Sangleys, and killed some. However,
+the fury of the multitude was greater than that of the resistance; and
+accordingly, the doors of the church having been battered down, the
+Sangleys entered it, whence they penetrated into the house, to which
+they set fire. Thereupon those above, in sore straits, surrendered
+after twenty-four hours with assurance of their lives and of good
+treatment--although, not trusting to the promises of the enemy, many
+remained upon the vaulted roof of the church. On account of the fire,
+in a short time these could not descend, nor could the insurgents
+climb to the roof; consequently the former escaped with their lives,
+which [otherwise] they would have lost through the barbarous cruelty of
+the infidels. This was further displayed [by the Chinese] in breaking
+the promise that they had given; for they put to death those who had
+descended with the father and the brothers, who numbered some fifteen
+persons. They bound the father securely, carrying him to their own
+camp, and manacled the brothers--the chief leaders of the Sangleys
+not daring to treat them more severely, as others claim, in order
+not to provoke further the anger of the governor and the Spaniards
+against themselves. By this time the Spanish forces, not only troops
+of infantry but horsemen, had reached the enemy's camp, and began to
+skirmish with them; the Chinese lost some men on their side, but we
+none. An entire stop was put to this presently, by the arrival of a
+great number of Sangleys from Manila to treat for peace. In order
+to settle the terms of peace, the insurgents sent to the governor
+the father of the Society. The suspension of hostilities lasted but
+a short time; for the adjutant Benavides (now captain), having no
+knowledge of it, or of the discussion that was going on, arrived
+at San Pedro by way of the river, with twenty-five Spaniards. These
+attacked with such fury that, suddenly falling upon the Chinese where
+they least expected it, the latter immediately fled; the Spaniards went
+in pursuit of them, and the enemy left three hundred dead [scattered]
+through the fields, while as many more were captured by the Indians
+who were scouring the country, and were taken to the galleys at the
+port of Cavite. On account of the Chinese being surprised by this
+unexpected attack, the brothers of the Society who were their prisoners
+had an opportunity to regain their liberty; they took refuge among the
+twenty-five Spaniards, and coming with them reached that same night
+their college at Manila, both wounded, although not dangerously. When
+the governor knew that the enemy were marching back to Calamba,
+he ordered the sargento-mayor to go there with his men in pursuit
+of them. By this time Admiral Don Fernando Galindo, who was at Los
+Banos, seeing how the country was disturbed, collected five hundred
+Indians to attack the Sangleys. But when the sargento-mayor arrived,
+and learned that two thousand of the latter had fortified themselves
+on a hill, in the ruggedness of which they placed their main hope
+of defense, [the two Spanish leaders] determined to attack them in
+various places [at once]--sending by some paths troops of Indians,
+by others Spanish infantry and Pampangos, and horsemen with both
+these parties. As soon as our men came in sight of the enemy, they
+saw how difficult was the task; but Spanish valor conquered it. The
+Spaniards arriving first, with the Pampangos, began to climb the hill
+so courageously that the Chinese, although at first they thought to
+beat back our men with stones and lances from the ascent, finally,
+losing courage and judgment, rushed down from the hill, those who
+escaped from our infantry encountering our horsemen. Thus some one
+thousand five hundred of them were killed in a short time; and those
+who remained alive tried to escape into the most hidden ravines and
+passes of the mountains, but even there they did not find themselves
+safe from the Spaniards and the courage of the Indians. This was the
+first victory that was obtained over that enemy; and it was generally
+understood that it had put an end to the insurrection, and taken away
+the courage of those who had caused these first disturbances. It
+was proposed to sing the Te Deum at Manila, by way of thanksgiving
+that a fire which threatened so great destruction had been so easily
+extinguished, by means of the company and soldiers of Sargento-mayor
+Don Juan de Arceo, to whom the Lord had given so brilliant a victory
+without any cost. This result was greatly aided by the experience and
+courage of Don Fernando Galindo and of the captains who took part in
+the combat--Don Rodrigo de Guillestegui, Juan de Montoya, [Francisco]
+Lezcano, [Esteban] [54] Ugalde, and Don Martin de Ocadiz. The Pampangos
+behaved nobly and courageously. [55]
+
+
+
+
+The Chinese of Sagar and Santa Cruz rebel
+
+In proportion to the satisfaction which the news of this victory
+caused in Manila was the resentment of the Sangleys when they heard
+of the death of their comrades. Eager for revenge, those on the lands
+of Sagar [56] rose in arms, and hurried that establishment; and then
+they summoned [to join them] the Chinese who were scattered among
+the other estates, as far as Manila. A large number of them arrived
+at daybreak on Tuesday, November 29, at the residence of Meyhaligue,
+to which they set fire. At the same time when we heard of this new
+enemy, we learned of the arrival of Sargento-mayor Don Juan de Arceo,
+victorious, with all his men; and orders were immediately given to
+him that, without entering Manila, he should proceed to Santa Cruz,
+to occupy that post and check any commotions among the Sangleys who
+were there or those of the Parian--preventing them from joining and
+uniting their forces by way of the river.
+
+In order to be ready for everything, the governor also went to Santa
+Cruz with Master-of-camp Don Lorenzo de Olaso, on the possibility that
+the enemy (who were running, not marching) would attempt an entrance
+by way of Santa Cruz--as they actually did, not having had warning of
+the arrival of our troops, or knowing how ready the city was to resist
+them without the soldiers. The Chinese at Santa Cruz who were friendly
+were told that they might go down the river, with their vessels, to
+the shelter and protection of the fort; and those who were not were
+told to do as they pleased, so that they might be thoroughly aware how
+little importance was attached to their revolt. Many others went on
+board their boats, to the number of some two hundred; professing to be
+loyal, they asked permission to go out and fight their own countrymen,
+in order to drive them back. Those who had charge of them had strong
+suspicions of their undertaking and intentions, but the governor gave
+his consent; and in his very sight those Chinese approached and joined
+the traitors, and began with them to take possession of Santa Cruz--now
+declared enemies to us, although they had a little while before been
+pretended friends. Half the street they held as their own, the careful
+arrangements of the governor giving them all this space so that our men
+might manage their guns more safely. The Spaniards began to fire these
+so skilfully, and to oppose the enemy so valiantly that, many of the
+Chinese being killed, they found themselves compelled by the force
+of our resistance to turn and run, displaying no little swiftness
+in their flight. The governor left their punishment to General Don
+Juan de Esquerra and his brother, Admiral Don Francisco--the first
+with some horsemen, the second with his infantry company and some
+other footmen, who intercepted the enemy on the rear--at the same
+time ordering the master-of-camp to fortify himself in the church of
+Santa Cruz, planting in it some strong artillery, so that he might
+be well prepared for resisting the insurgents, and for checking
+the designs, suspected although not manifest, of the Chinese in the
+Parian. Immediately all that company [of infantry] fell apart, so as
+to give room for the free handling of the cannon; and, the village of
+Santa Cruz being set afire, the Spaniards and Indians pillaged it. [57]
+In it were the troops from Manila; and when they reached the lands of
+Meyhaligue the horsemen, infantry, and Japanese attacked the Sangleys;
+the latter fighting with barbarous desperation, were aided by the
+great number of their men in stations and ambuscades. They killed
+some of our men, among these Captain Agustin Tenorio, Captain Juan
+Martin[ez] de Avendano, Adjutant Cristobal de Saldado, and Alferez
+Pedro de Soria; and others were wounded. Thirteen [58] Japanese
+were killed, who could not be relieved [in time] by the valor of our
+horsemen--which, although great on all occasions, in this one even
+surpassed itself. Those who died sold their lives dearly, and those
+who survived risked their lives nobly. The danger was alike for all,
+and their courage equal; but their fate was not the same. Finally,
+those who remained alive thought themselves fortunate that they could
+retreat, considering the great number of those who attacked them,
+the exhausted condition of their horses, little used to such raids,
+and the advantage of position which the insurgents had over them. The
+latter, although they saw many of their men stretched on the field,
+held that loss as gain--since they were so numerous, and constantly
+saw more men joining them--on account of the decrease of the Spaniards'
+number by death, of which they made haughty boasts, cherishing hopes of
+greater successes. The governor commanded that the troops and artillery
+that were in Santa Cruz should that night be withdrawn to the city,
+in order not to leave Manila in danger from a sudden insurrection
+in the Parian, which was momently feared; also to leave the enemy
+in perplexity--having seen that fortification by day, and not being
+aware of the [Spanish] retreat so that they might not dare to approach
+the river, or attempt to pass it, in the night. He commanded that the
+bridge over it should be removed, and the boats that were there broken
+up, so that the Chinese [of Santa Cruz and the Parian] might not cross
+to each other; at the same time he gave orders that, if there should be
+any tumult in the Parian, it should be demolished by the artillery on
+the city walls. The whole city remained in suspense and uncertainty,
+which was greatly increased by seeing how numerous grew the forces
+of the insurgents. These, made arrogant by their recent exploit,
+roamed through all the [surrounding] districts, nothing escaping their
+cruelty. Several times they attacked the church and convent of Tondo,
+[59] which was fortified; but our people in it were prepared for them,
+so that, having lost many men, they saw themselves obliged to desist
+for the time from their intention. They undertook to make themselves
+masters of the church at Binondo, [60] but with the same result;
+for the Sangley mestizos who were in the church, desirous of giving
+proof of their loyalty, resisted the enemy, who accordingly regarded
+their attempt as impracticable, or [at least] exceedingly difficult.
+
+
+
+
+The Sangleys of the Parian revolt
+
+From the twenty-sixth of November to the second of the following
+month the insurgent Sangleys continued to be so elated that every
+day we saw them from Manila, on the other side of the river, with
+many little banners which they proudly waved, daring the bolder of
+our men to fight; for they thought that even if every Spaniard cost
+them fifty of their own men, they would finally remain conquerors, and
+masters of the country, on account of the smallness of our numbers,
+the many men in their camp, and the accession of those who were
+continually joining them. Our artillery quickly made them disperse
+and retreat; but the decision was reached that it was not expedient
+to sally out against the enemy, on account of the little confidence
+that was felt in the Sangleys of the Parian, and because our army
+could not hold these in check [no les cogiesen por las espaldas]
+if it were engaged in a campaign. But on the second of December,
+the day of the great apostle of India, St. Francis Javier, between
+ten and eleven o'clock in the forenoon, the suspense came to an
+end, and our uncertainty regarding the fidelity of the Parian was
+cleared up. For those Sangleys, seeing that the insurgents had more
+troops than on former occasions, and that they were more daringly
+undertaking to make an attack at one side, also raised the banner
+of revolt, and sallied out from the shops in which they were; and
+they killed some negroes and Indians, and a few soldiers who were
+stationed near the church of the Parian itself. They raised an outcry,
+"For the bridge!" and "To arms against the Spaniards!" desiring to
+join their countrymen by way of the bridge, which for this purpose
+had been replaced. The sargento-mayor went out against them with the
+infantry which were in garrison on that side, and made them turn back,
+retreating toward the church of the Parian; and because the greatest
+danger was at the bridge, the master-of-camp, Don Lorenzo de Olaso,
+went to defend that passage. Although his men were few, with gallant
+defiance he repulsed the main body of the enemy; but he saw that he
+was in great danger, and his very courage extricated him. Immediately
+they began to demolish the Parian, and to throw down their houses on
+the land side. The governor went to the walls, to give orders as to
+what must be done in view of the present necessity; and, since there
+was so great need of men, all the ecclesiastics and religious were
+obliged to go with arms to guard the walls, as it was suspected that
+the enemy might attempt to scale them. At that time the city was full
+of confusion and tumult; for as there were even in the [Spanish] houses
+so great a number of Sangleys, the people within these saw that they
+were in danger if the Sangleys escaped outside. To free themselves
+from this, the cry was made, I know not by whose order, that, under
+penalty of treason all should kill the Sangleys whom they kept, [61]
+which immediately rendered active the indignation or the hatred against
+them. Through all the streets the Sangleys were seen lying dead; and
+everywhere were heard their outcries or their weeping, causing in all
+natural compassion, [even] in the midst of the general danger. In the
+fort were many Sangleys who had been seized in various sallies, who,
+seeing death so near, tried to escape it, defending themselves even in
+the place where they were imprisoned; but they all died there, slain
+by arquebus-balls. The artillery continued its fire from the walls,
+killing thus a great number of the Sangleys. Others flung themselves
+into the river, but immediately fell into the hands of some of our
+men who were guarding it in boats, and perished miserably. Fire was
+set to the Parian; it immediately began to burn, and a great quantity
+of wealth was reduced to ashes by the flames. [62] Many persons who
+had concealed themselves were burned to death; others, who thought
+it a less evil to be the object of our men's harshness than to become
+the prey of the flames, rushing from the buildings, threw themselves
+upon the sharp swords. Thus in a few hours the costly structure of the
+Parian [perished], and its beautiful church alone was left [63] as a
+memento of what had been there--the pillars of stone which remained
+standing being monuments, as it were, which proclaimed, "Here stood
+Troya." The number of those who died that day in the city and fort,
+in the Parian, and in the river, amounted to three thousand, according
+to the statement of those who make the most moderate estimates. On the
+morning of the following day, some two hundred traders came out from
+some marshes and miry places that were behind the Parian; they had
+buried themselves in the mud there, in order to preserve their lives
+in the general misfortune of their countrymen. All came with crosses
+in their hands, entreating mercy; this could not be denied to them
+by Christian charity, all the more when it was known that these men
+were not accomplices in the insurrection. Command was therefore given
+that they be conveyed to the fort, where they were kept under guard;
+and they were aided with their support in a time of so great need,
+in which they were utterly destitute. Many of those who died had time
+[allowed them] to become Christians first, and those who already
+were such, to make their confessions; others were deprived of this
+by their own obstinacy, or by the sudden anger of our people.
+
+
+
+
+Events at the port of Cavite and other places at this time
+
+There was anxiety at the port of Cavite when they heard the cannon
+from Manila, and saw the clouds of smoke from the Parian; then news
+of the result arrived, with an order to the warden of the fort,
+Sargento-mayor Alonso Garcia Romero, to put to the sword all the
+Sangleys who were in that port. [64] Hardly was this information
+guessed at when all the people--Spaniards, Indians, Japanese, Sangleys,
+and mulattoes ran in dismay through the streets; all suspected one
+another, and all tried to secure their own safety. The women and the
+more valuable articles of property were collected in the churches;
+and there prayers were offered aloud, entreating God for mercy. In
+the present tumult, the prudence with which the warden acted was of
+great value; for he restored tranquillity among all, especially the
+Sangleys, who were most disturbed. Within half an hour he gathered
+about a thousand of them in the royal buildings, making it known that
+this was for the purpose of securing them from the public fury. They
+were satisfied with this, closed their houses, and proceeded to take
+refuge in the buildings assigned to them. While the Ave Maria was
+ringing, the warden went to all the religious orders, requesting that
+priests should go to baptize the infidels and hear the confessions
+of the Christians, since all of them must die. They went immediately;
+and the warden commanded that the Chinese should be taken out by tens,
+on the pretext that the governor had summoned them to Manila. In this
+way, they cut off the heads of as many as three hundred Sangleys,
+many of them receiving the sacrament of baptism, and many who were
+Christians that of penance. At this time a Spaniard made the mistake
+of cutting off the purses which the Sangleys always carry with them;
+this was seen by some, who immediately called out that they were
+taking the Chinese away to kill them, and that the rest would better
+put themselves on the defensive, and either save their lives or sell
+them dearly. The Spaniards who were inside at once tried to escape, and
+did so, although with some wounds from stones, taking the precaution to
+close the gate of exit--a prudent act of great importance, because the
+rest of the Spaniards, running up to that place, began to fire their
+arquebuses wherever they could. The Sangleys then set fire to the royal
+building, close to the gate, in order to make an opening by which they
+could escape; others, climbing above, began to throw stones and tiles
+at the Spaniards, and broke in pieces an ivory image of the blessed
+Christ, with which they wounded some of our men. Many Indian women
+had been sheltered in these buildings the day before, thinking that
+they would there be safe, and seeing themselves suddenly in extreme
+danger. Only three of these, with one child, died on this occasion,
+at the hands of the Sangleys; another woman and another child flung
+themselves down from the windows, but, falling upon some dead Sangleys,
+they received no injury of importance. Nor did the rest of these women,
+who, seeing their danger, did the same; they threw themselves down
+and remained safe, although bruised by the fall. The fire was now
+seizing on the entire building; [65] and those within, with death
+so near and in their sight, broke down the wall on two sides, and as
+many as four hundred flung themselves through this opening, the rest
+remaining among the flames. Here they were opposed by the Spaniards
+and Japanese, whom the Sangleys confronted with such mad fury that,
+although armed only with stones and clubs, they strove to make way
+for themselves, wounding some of our men (among these the warden),
+and killing two Japanese. Finally they took the road to the beach,
+and, being pursued thither, many of them continued to fall until,
+being hindered by a fishing corral in which they were crowded together,
+they were a mark for the bullets of our soldiers, and for the balls
+from a blunderbuss which was fired from the fort of La Magdalena,
+and thus thirty of them died. Those who remained alive went out into
+the country, continually pursued by our soldiers at short range,
+so that few escaped; and most of those were caught next day by the
+ranchmen. Others hanged themselves from the trees; and, according to
+the best information that can be obtained, only twenty three were left
+who could carry the news to those in Manila. The slaughter continued
+on the following day, since there were many who were hidden in the
+houses. This success was a great mercy of God; for it was afterward
+known that the Sangleys of the port had agreed upon an uprising
+for that very night; they had planned to set fire to the village in
+all parts of it, which they could have executed all the more easily
+because their houses were very near to those of the Spaniards. In the
+house of a rich Chinese Christian was found the banner to which they
+were to rally. Many kept hidden in the fireplaces pincers with which
+they intended to torture certain Spaniards by tearing away their flesh
+piecemeal, in revenge for the Sangley pirates who were punished by that
+torture in Manila in the past year. [66] The number of those who died
+in the port of Cavite reached one thousand three hundred. Immediately
+afterward all the Sangley laborers on the lands in that district
+revolted, of whom some five hundred perished at the hands of the
+Indians and ranchmen--not to speak of others who were scattered in
+Maragondon and Silan, probably four hundred and fifty. Many were also
+killed in the neighboring jurisdictions: in Bulacan, three hundred;
+in Pampanga, six hundred; in Pangasinan, two hundred; in Taal and
+Balayan, five hundred. Besides this, the corpses of more than six
+hundred Sangleys have been encountered in the villages and coasts of
+Zambales, the coasts of Maderas, and other places. [67]
+
+
+
+
+Encampment of the insurgents; damages which they inflict; levies of
+men to oppose them
+
+The damages which the Sangleys continued to commit--which were
+especially seen among the recent arrivals in the Parian--have been very
+heavy. They set fire to many houses of Spaniards and of religious;
+and they burned the villages, with the churches, profaning all
+that was sacred [68]--hacking the images with knives, wearing the
+chasubles, and making from the altar-coverings garments to cover
+themselves, and flags. Some of these articles were taken from them,
+in encounters which the Spaniards had with them. The villages which,
+with their churches, were burned were: Santa Cruz (although they did
+not entirely destroy it), Quiapo, Meyhaligue, Sampaloc, San Sebastian,
+San Francisco del Monte, and part of San Juan de la Penitencia. They
+also burned the ranches of Santiago Castelu (or Gastelu), General
+Asaldegui, Admiral Ezquerra, and others; and a large part of the
+villages of Tondo and Binondo.
+
+They arrogantly continued these forays, and they were further
+confirmed in their notion that they were masters of the field by
+having therein more than twenty-six thousand fighting men, and knowing
+that the Spaniards who could be assembled hardly amounted to three
+hundred. Accordingly they formed their encampment opposite Manila,
+with fortifications at intervals, where they remained about twenty
+days, without our men crossing the river to attack them--the Spaniards
+contenting themselves with depriving the Sangleys of boats, so that
+the latter might not cross from the other side; and they waged war on
+us in two directions. It was our prudent decision, and its importance
+was recognized by the insurgents, not to let our force of soldiers be
+weakened; and they exerted all their strength to overcome it, sparing
+no effort in order to carry out their intention, and in one case
+almost succeeding. Only by their great [number was it] [69] possible,
+and their natural ingenuity; they undertook to intercept the river,
+although it was so broad and deep, with a causeway of stone--a work
+which they were able to complete in a short time, by each Sangley
+carrying only one stone. With this they were masters of the river
+as regards its passage, which they prevented to the boats which were
+coming down with provisions from Laguna de Bay; but they were checked
+in this by the diligence of those who had in charge the safety of
+those supplies. These were General Asaldegui and Captain Ugalde, who
+had various skirmishes with the Sangleys to keep them back from the
+passage of the river, killing many of them without serious loss of our
+men. By that time, recognizing the dangerous character of the war,
+and that it would apparently be a long one, the governor continued
+to make provision of all sorts of munitions and food; and raised
+levies of men from Pampanga [70] and other jurisdictions--not only
+arquebusiers, but Indians armed with arrows, lances, and shields. At
+this summons, all showed their fidelity to the king, their affection
+for the Spaniards, their hatred to the Chinese, and their promptness
+in obedience. The Pampango Indians quickly rallied, constrained
+not only by their ancient loyalty but by the present need; in this
+they were not a little encouraged by seeing the spirited conduct of
+their women whom they left behind, who offered to come with them to
+fight. As it was impracticable to accept this offer, they were ready,
+even at the cost of their lives, to defend their homes and villages,
+in case the insurgents should undertake to enter these.
+
+
+
+
+The enemy are dislodged, and pursued as far as Bocaue
+
+The new soldiers who had come to the succor of Manila, desirous
+of encountering the enemy--for which there was not yet opportunity,
+according to the arrangements of the governor--made forays through the
+open country, in small bands, always with good success. [71] They were
+encouraged to these sallies by the reward which the governor offered
+to any one who should bring in the head of an enemy; as a result,
+many heads came in to the city every day. A large number of men having
+been collected, the governor resolved to post troops close to the very
+camp of the insurgents, in order to surround them; and although they
+tried to prevent this, they were unable to do so. Instead, they found
+themselves, in all the attacks that they made, compelled to retire with
+losses always of many men--although on one occasion, when the governor
+with the master-of-camp and some Spaniards undertook to reconnoiter a
+position, the Sangleys came about them, placing them in such evident
+danger that they were very fortunate in being able to escape. This was
+secured by the coming, with succor, of Captain Sebastian de Gastelu,
+who was stationed at a neighboring post, with his men. Some took
+the governor for the master-of-camp. The sargento-mayor, Don Pedro
+de Jara, and Captain Gastelu peppered them well with the artillery,
+which caused them so great loss that even within their very camp
+they were not safe. Preparations were now made [on our side] for
+attacking them on a set day; but it seems that the enemy, guessing
+this plan, and the disastrous result which they might expect from
+it, since they were surrounded on all sides by towers and redoubts,
+concluded to take flight. This they did on Thursday, December 29,
+at night, with so much silence (since the [word in MS. missing] was
+so great) that there was no indication or suspicion of their resolve
+until, on the morning of the next day, certain knowledge of their
+departure was furnished by our noticing that they did not sally out
+into the open country. The governor, who was in our camp, immediately
+commanded that the enemy's camp be delivered over to pillage; in it
+they found more than ten thousand fanegas of rice, by which not only
+the Spaniards but the negroes and Indians of the surrounding villages
+profited. The governor went in pursuit of them with his men, and got
+sight of them between the villages of Pasig and San Mateo, to which
+they had gone with the intention of crossing the river on rafts, for
+which purpose they had cut there twenty thousand bamboos. They were
+prevented from this, and our people prepared to give them battle on
+Saturday, December 31; but the Chinese did not wait for them, but took
+to flight that night also. Our troops continued to pursue them, [72]
+and reached them at nightfall, finding them encamped in the village of
+San Jose, a visita of Bocaue, which is a mission village of the fathers
+of St. Francis. When the governor was asked there where our men were
+to be lodged, he replied, "Where the enemy are." Our soldiers were
+so honorably obedient that, crossing a stream that separated the two
+forces, they dislodged the Sangleys from their camp, compelling them
+to flee; the enemy left behind the supper that they had prepared, as
+spoils [for our men, disregarding] the opportunity, and its importance
+for the hungry and needy condition in which they were. [73]
+
+On the first of January, 1640, in the morning, the Sangleys were
+attacked by our men, and forced to do as they had done the night
+before--although with greater loss, since many in their flight rushed
+head-long into the river, where they perished. The rest took the road
+to Pampanga, intending to secure through that province a passage to
+that of Pangasinan; but, after fighting their way, and receiving damage
+on all sides, they fell back to Bocaue. This move caused anxiety among
+our people, who feared that the Sangleys did this with the intention of
+again crossing the river of Manila, in which case they would destroy,
+as they had already done on the side opposite [Manila], the churches
+and villages on the other side. Seeing, then, the danger at this time
+of need, and considering that the soldiers were with the governor
+and the citizens acting as garrison, and that in no place could the
+forces be divided, since everywhere they were so small, father Fray
+Juan Ramirez, the Augustinian provincial, offered to keep guard over
+the river with his religious, and asked the other religious orders to
+help him in this with such men as they could spare. All willingly gave
+their aid, and the governor also sent the commander of the galleys,
+Andres Lopez de Asaldegui, for the same purpose; and, aided by so many
+religious, he kept the river safe for our trade, and prevented the
+enemy from crossing it. At Bocaue the governor was confronting the
+enemy, and having various skirmishes with them, being sometimes the
+attacker, sometimes the attacked; and although usually these occasioned
+loss to the enemy, sometimes also our people lost--especially one day
+when a large troop of Indians, with a number of Spaniards, sallied out
+against the Sangleys. The latter resorted to the artifice of setting
+fire in all directions to the patches of sedge (or rather the fields
+of cogon [74]), which were a great cause for fear; and the Indians,
+unexpectedly surrounded by fire, took to disorderly flight. This was
+the cause of some few Spaniards being left there dead; their firearms
+were seized by the Sangleys, who with these did considerable damage
+to our men. On this occasion the governor was in notable danger; for
+he, considering that the enemy's encampment was in an advantageous
+location, convenient to food-supplies, and having plenty of water
+(which our camp lacked), determined to dislodge them from it. For
+this purpose, on the night of January 9 he erected a tower near the
+enemy's camp, defended by ditches, spikes driven into the ground
+[empuyados], and a stockade, and well furnished with artillery. He
+appointed as its commander the chief captain of the artillery, Juan
+Bautista de Molina, with Captain Gastelu [as second]; and placed in
+it two artillerists, twenty soldiers, and a hundred Indians armed with
+arrows and arquebuses. When the Sangleys, in the morning, saw the new
+fort, so unexpected to them, they rushed with great fury to carry it
+by assault; but those within defended it valiantly, making great havoc
+among the enemy. Hearing the report of the cannon, the governor and
+the master-of-camp hastened to give them aid. Before they could arrive,
+the enemy turned their backs and fled to their camp; the governor and
+those who accompanied him therefore returned to their quarters. At one
+o'clock the Sangleys again endeavored to seize the fort; they found
+the same resistance and valor among our men as in the morning, and
+many of their people were killed, without any loss to us, except that
+a bullet wounded Captain Gastelu in the knee. At the time, this injury
+was not considered dangerous or likely to last long; but finally,
+at the end of five months it caused his death, to the sorrow of
+every one that his Majesty should lose in him a valiant and energetic
+officer. The governor and the master-of-camp came, as in the morning,
+to the aid of the fort; but the enemy were now retreating, and, the
+governor sending four men on horseback to reconnoiter their course,
+God inspired such fear in those who were retreating that they began
+to flee in a disorderly crowd, leaving in their camp their weapons
+(lances and arquebuses) and a large quantity of provisions. Some of
+our men followed them for the distance of half a legua, and in that
+space killed more than one thousand five hundred of them; and when
+the soldiers of our force were called together, the affair could
+be considered by them all as concluded. It was regarded as a great
+victory, on account of the great fear which had filled the minds of
+the Sangleys, the utter disorder and confusion with which they fled,
+and our having gained from them an encampment so convenient, with the
+death of so many and the booty of so many weapons; and the news of it
+was sent to Manila at ten o'clock that night. It was received with
+general satisfaction and the ringing of bells; and on the following
+day in all the churches solemn masses were said before the most holy
+sacrament, by way of thanksgiving for so fortunate a success, and in
+supplication to that same Lord that He would continue that favor to
+our forces.
+
+
+
+
+The enemy return to Sagar and San Mateo
+
+The governor had no information of the road that the enemy took
+in their flight; accordingly, while he was waiting for this,
+he endeavored to have his army take some rest in the village of
+Bocaue. But little rest did the insurgents have; for, seeing the
+misfortunes that pursued them, and so many of their men (in whose
+numbers they were trusting to make themselves masters of the country)
+dead, or wounded, or disheartened, they resolved to remove from [the
+vicinity of] our camp. Returning to their familiar haunts of Sagar and
+San Mateo--which is a visita of the village of Pasig, belonging to the
+fathers of St. Augustine--desirous of avenging their defeats and the
+loss of their dead, and feeling safe on account of our troops being
+so far away, they sent some bands of their people to burn the church
+and village of Pasig, which they did. Other Sangleys, roaming through
+the hills, found among them some tiny hamlets of the natives, where
+they had concealed their valuables, and their children and wives, to
+save them from the common danger; and these were in very great danger
+of falling into the hands of these enemies. Our Lord delivered these
+people, although the Sangleys took possession of what they found in
+the huts. Then their scattered bands being reunited with those whom
+they had sent to hunt for provisions, they formed their camp on a hill,
+and the various bands built shelters for themselves.
+
+As soon as the governor knew where the enemy were now encamped, he
+went in pursuit of them, and on the twelfth [of January] he halted
+on the river San Mateo. The next day he went in person, with some
+few horsemen, to reconnoiter, and on the way encountered a troop of
+about a hundred Sangleys; fifty of them were armed, and the rest
+were laden with rice and other provisions. Our men attacked them
+and killed twenty or more of the Sangleys, without any loss on our
+side--although Captain Juan Fiallo found himself in great danger. On
+this as on other occasions he displayed honorable proofs of his valor;
+for, having wounded a Sangley in the forehead with a lance-thrust,
+and felled him to the ground, the latter, suddenly raising himself
+from between the horse's feet, slashed at him with a Japanese catana,
+with which at one thrust he wounded both the captain and the horse. The
+captain quickly turned his horse about, and securing room for using
+his lance, ran it entirely through the Sangley's body, at one side;
+it pierced so deeply that it was impossible to pull out the weapon,
+so he had to leave it sticking in the body. But the Sangley, with the
+anguish or the desperation of death, eager to avenge it rather than
+endure it, with his own hands drew out the lance, and, bracing himself
+with it on the ground, attempted to attack the man who had wounded
+him. But at this moment he was himself attacked by a lay religious
+belonging to the Society of Jesus, who rendered good service in the
+war throughout its active period--and at this time with especial good
+fortune, since he freed the captain from danger by completing the
+killing of the Sangley. All the rest of the Sangleys fled, and the
+governor returned to his camp, to give orders for the attack on the
+enemy, who during all the time while they remained in the hills never
+ceased from inflicting damages. They burned the church of San Mateo,
+and that of Taytay, a house and church of the Society of Jesus, and a
+visita of Antipolo; also Santa Cruz and Mahayhay. According to what
+many of them said, their chief incentive to setting these fires was
+what happened to a certain Sangley. Desiring to become a Christian, he
+buried an idol which he had, of which they relate fables very similar
+to those about Mars, calling it "the god of battles." This Christian
+Sangley was one of the insurgents, and, desiring to appease this god,
+managed with others to disinter it, entreating its protection on the
+present occasion. They say that the idol spoke to them, saying that
+it considered itself appeased and satisfied for the previous injury
+done to it; and promising them, besides this, its favor, provided
+that they would burn all the churches, profane all that was sacred,
+and inflict on the Christians all the harm that they possibly could.
+
+
+
+
+Success of our troops, and defeat of the enemy in Antipolo
+
+The enemy, not regarding themselves as safe in the mountains where
+they had hidden, managed to retreat to those of Antipolo, as being more
+suitable for the fortified post which they built there. On account of
+the extent of the place, the greater part of their people had gone
+into it, after burning the village and the residence of the Society
+of Jesus; they attempted to do the same with the church, but could
+not accomplish this, as it was built of stone. Some remained behind,
+and, desirous of reconnoitering the place, and doing the enemy some
+damage, Captain Juan Fiallo went out with as many as thirty horsemen,
+and a large number of Indians with lances and bows. The roads were
+exceedingly rugged, and both footmen and horsemen had to trust to their
+own exertions for success. They commenced to make their way through
+the mountains, with more spirit than reflection, for at the middle of
+their journey they found themselves unable to go on. The enemy were on
+their rear, and at either side were precipices and deep ravines--all
+the fault of ignorant guides. It was impossible either to advance or
+to retreat; and so they fell in death, one after another, their courage
+ineffectual, and without room in which to make resistance. Accordingly,
+they rushed to fling themselves down the precipices, abandoning some
+their horses and some their weapons, and all in this danger losing
+their presence of mind. The enemy had the opportunity to put an end
+to all of our men, if God had not blinded their eyes. Five or six
+Spaniards, with their arms and horses, returned to the camp and gave
+news of this disaster; and within a few days some others returned,
+unarmed and on foot; as for the rest, the Sangleys disposed of them
+as we shall see later.
+
+The governor, grieved at this result, collected more horses from the
+neighboring ranches, and, sending to Manila for saddles, equipped his
+men anew, all eager for vengeance. This consumed much time, which gave
+the enemy leisure to fortify themselves in four places, in the village
+of Antipolo and in the mountain region thereabout; but it deprived
+our troops of [the opportunity of] marching against the enemy until
+they arrived in sight of the new fortifications. The difficulty of
+the attack was very evident, for the enemy held the heights, and had
+stones with which they had built their enclosures, by hand-work, very
+strong and well-arranged, as was remarked by our men. In this work,
+the great number of their men, and their strenuous efforts, had made
+up for the lack of time. No less active were our men in making ready
+[for the attack]; and the more difficult the undertaking, the more
+their courage rose. The Indians displayed great gallantry, with a
+few Spaniards making themselves masters of the first two strongholds
+or intrenchments--from which the enemy retreated with the loss of
+some of their men; the rest, a crowd of armed men, taking refuge in
+the other two defences, at the highest part of the fortification,
+regarded these as impregnable, and accordingly kept in them provisions
+of all kinds, enough to last a long time. There they awaited our men,
+who marched in good order, and attacked the first intrenchment on
+three sides. They were everywhere preceded by Indian shield-bearers,
+in order that these might with their shields stop the stones and
+other missiles that the Sangleys were throwing; the Indians did this
+valiantly, being thus very helpful to the rest of the army; for the
+Spaniards, being able to use their firearms without hindrance, with
+them everywhere drove back the enemy. The latter, discouraged at the
+death of so many of their number, and seeing our soldiers ascending
+the hill, took to flight. This gave new energy to our victorious men,
+who in order to complete their conquest at once continued their
+march, with the same good order and precaution, to the innermost
+fortification, the strongest and most difficult of all, and the most
+skilfully built and best provided with supplies. Nothing withstood
+the perseverance of our men, flushed by their recent success, and
+stimulated by the sight of their governor, who was present throughout
+the action; they eagerly attacked the enemy, who valiantly resisted,
+replying with their firearms to the volleys from our arquebuses, and
+with stones to the javelins and arrows [of our Indians]--relying on
+these weapons alone, as they had the advantage in position. But their
+courage alone could not equal that of our men; and, seeing that ours
+were now pressing them hard, and, almost on their hands and knees,
+steadily gaining possession of their last height, the Sangleys,
+having little strength to defend it, turned their backs and began
+to flee. Our men kept up the pursuit of the enemy for more than a
+legua, until they drove out the fugitives from their hiding-places,
+and many of the latter flung themselves over the cliffs in those
+mountains--where the enemy, although at the outset he had been well
+defended, was on this occasion thoroughly defeated.
+
+Those [of the Spaniards] who were killed in this combat and assault
+were about twenty; and as the victory had been so glorious, not only
+by the strength of the enemy but by the valor of our soldiers, all the
+bells were rung in Manila, and on the following day, at the governor's
+request, solemn mass was said in all the churches, and the most holy
+sacrament was exposed, in thanksgiving for so fortunate a success.
+
+In the enemy's camps were found large quantities of supplies and
+arms; and on the ground were many books which they had taken from the
+religious houses that they burned; from these they made breastplates
+and other defensive armor. In the cemetery of Antipolo, which was the
+quarters of their leaders, were found several of their proclamations,
+in Chinese characters; these were fastened to the trees, to serve
+for the proper government of their forces. There were twenty dead
+horses who had fallen into the ravines, with their saddles broken;
+and three Spaniards were found whose heads had been cut off. These
+were part of those who had flung themselves from the precipices; among
+them was a lay religious of the Augustinians, who had accompanied
+the soldiers on that expedition. These bodies, although they were
+putrid, were so tightly bound that the cords had cut into the flesh,
+all indicating the cruelty of the Sangleys. Although this moved our
+men to deserved compassion and just indignation, they felt much more
+keenly the discovery of many fragments of holy images that lay on
+the ground. In especial, there was found a carved figure of the holy
+Christ, three palmos in height, among the embers and ashes of a house
+which the Sangleys had undertaken to burn; the fire had been content
+to blacken the image a little, in order that it might testify to the
+miracle--since all regarded it as such, that the image should remain
+unhurt in the midst of so hot a fire. The soldier who found the image
+presented it to the governor, who at sight of it was deeply moved,
+as were the army also when it was raised on high, [made] by him who
+had abased it more glorious than before; and all entertained hopes
+that the army which should fight under such a banner would annihilate
+the enemy by a signal victory.
+
+
+
+
+Injuries which the enemy committed during their flight
+
+It is characteristic of cowards to affect courage when they meet no
+opposition or do not fear resistance; the enemy did not encounter
+this in the ranch of Antipolo, whither he went when he emerged
+from the mountains and hollows in which he had taken refuge from
+our attacks and the slaughter which he could not make among our
+troops. For the latter were marching accompanied by the governor,
+who was desirous of catching the enemy in the flat country that he
+might offer them battle there, when they would not be able to avail
+themselves of the ruggedness of the mountains or the depth of the
+ravines; the armies faced each other, now ready to come to blows, and
+the enemy were almost surrounded by our troops on all sides. Although
+without realizing how little they could depend upon their hands, they
+trusted to their feet; they now placed their main defense in flight,
+burning the village and church of Baras--valiant for only such acts
+of cowardice. Our men kept at the heels of the enemy, although it was
+one of the greatest hardships of this war to have to march so long
+through very rough roads amid the inclemencies of heat and rain. The
+insurgents pursued the route toward the village of Tamar, whither also
+our army proceeded, in order to compel them to give battle, or else to
+harass and disturb them by never allowing them opportunity to have any
+rest. Our men reached the flat top of a hill, and halted on the summit,
+without having any knowledge of the enemy--who were so near that even
+their voices could soon be heard. When our men perceived the enemy,
+and saw how few they were (for at that time they did not number two
+thousand), they began to surround the Sangleys in order to attack them;
+and the battle began with such fury that the enemy, in desperation,
+came close to the mouths of the Spanish arquebuses. Our men defended
+themselves valiantly, at little cost to themselves but with much
+loss to the enemy; since, although the battle began with great risk
+[to us] on account of their multitude, our weapons were well plied
+on both sides [of them]. When the enemy had attacked our position and
+would have gained the advantage, Don Rodrigo de Guillestegui arrived,
+whom the governor had sent with a company of horsemen and five hundred
+Indians, sounding the alarm to them through the rearguard. At the sound
+of the drums, and when the enemy saw themselves attacked on both sides,
+and knew that the rest of our army (which had been absent) was there,
+they already used their weapons with less spirit; and, their hopes of
+gaining the victory being dashed, they began to retreat, so as not
+to give it to our men--but with much loss of their own--and as they
+were in a place where the cavalry could range freely. The damage that
+they received was much greater [than what they inflicted], and was
+sufficient to enable those of their number who had more prudence to
+urge more strenuously, from that time on, negotiations for peace--of
+which they had begun to talk a few days before, but with little,
+if any, effect.
+
+
+
+
+Garrisons are placed in the churches, and peace is discussed
+
+When the governor saw the destruction that the enemy had wrought in
+the churches, and that he could not check it because the army that was
+fleeing always had the start of the other, he determined to put the
+churches in a condition of defense, and accordingly assigned to each
+one a number of soldiers who should confront the Sangleys--so that,
+since the people of the villages could not deliver themselves from
+the enemy's fury, the temples and the dwellings of the religious,
+which were most important, might be saved. The governor also sent
+them word, threatening that he would put all the Sangleys that were
+left in the country to the sword, if they did any more damage to the
+villages or the churches, since it was a token of cowardice to wreak
+vengeance on him who was not to blame, or who made no resistance. They
+replied that they did no harm where they were not harmed, and that
+they would leave the villages in peace if the roads were left free
+to themselves by which they were intending to pass to Los Limbones,
+in order to build champans there to make ready for [their return to]
+China. This reply was less haughty than the tone of their earlier
+bravado. From that time they did not burn any church, although they
+burned the village of Santa Maria and that of Siniloan, with a visita
+of Pangil, because the Indians had been stationed there and many of
+the Sangleys slain. After this, they continued their march to Cainta,
+and the governor in pursuit of them to the post of Mahayhay--a place
+through which the enemy must necessarily pass if they would go to Los
+Limbones--in order to fight there with the enemy the battle which
+was impossible in the mountains which the enemy had selected for
+their encampment. Many from the enemy's camp came every day to ours
+asking for mercy, alleging [that they had been coerced by] violent
+measures on the part of their leaders in the revolt. They readily
+found mercy, and with this and kind treatment they were sent back to
+Manila. The opinions of the rest were as vacillating as their courage,
+many of them lacking confidence in the governor. Thinking that they
+did not deserve pardon for their offences, they preferred to persist
+in these obstinately, rather than to yield to the governor's mercy
+and surrender; and although there were embassies from one side to
+the other, this intercourse was carried on with little confidence
+on either side. On ours, negotiations for peace were carried on by
+a father of the Society of Jesus, [75] who was a minister to the
+Sangleys, and General Geronimo Enrriquez, their alcalde-mayor of
+the Parian, for whom they had the utmost affection; on their side,
+by some of their leaders, with the mandarin--although not with so
+much privilege, [76] on account of having been created for their
+purpose--the lieutenant-commander of the Sangley forces. He was a
+boastful and audacious man, who resisted the negotiations for peace,
+and had with his own hand killed several men because he was suspicious
+of their being concerned therein. But the father of the Society,
+anxious that peace should be secured, in order that the shedding of
+so much blood might be stopped--especially for the sake of the many
+Sangleys who were there more because they trusted others than to
+carry out their own purpose--laying aside any consideration of his
+own life, went many times, at the evident risk of death, to confer
+with the mandarin and the leaders, assuring them, on the part of the
+governor, of pardon and kind treatment to those who laid down their
+arms and surrendered themselves to him. He answered their complaints,
+the chief of these being that the governor had commanded that their
+comrades who were scattered through the provinces should be slain,
+when they had committed no offence. The answer was that the very
+people in their own camp who had been caught by our men had revealed
+that those others were accomplices in their guilt, and cognizant of
+the revolt; for they had confessed that it was general throughout the
+provinces. He said that there was therefore no wisdom in leaving some
+of the Sangleys free while we were fighting others in the field, since
+the former would take up arms against us at the first opportunity; and
+finally that they should avail themselves of the present opportunity,
+as being invited to make peace, and should not constrain the governor
+to an extreme demonstration of his anger, as that would result in
+the entire destruction of them all--as they themselves could see by
+the few who had been killed on our side, and the thousands that had
+fallen on theirs. Persuaded by these arguments, they undertook to
+hold another council and give an answer on the following day.
+
+
+
+
+Peace is concluded, and both armies return to Manila
+
+After thorough reflection, while those of our camp were waiting for
+the enemy to submit and give up their arms, the latter saw that the
+conditions demanded for making peace did not depend on him whose
+strength had been broken, but on him who was able to boast of his
+advantage and superiority; and how, if the negotiations for peace
+arose more from the needs of the case and from our strength than from
+mercy and compassion, the governor would have closed, as it were,
+the gates of mercy with the determination to destroy them, if he had
+not checked his anger, and given to the religious in whose hands was
+this affair time for endeavoring to convert them to a more prudent
+decision. Finally, they agreed that all should surrender themselves
+and give up their weapons. A place was appointed at a little distance
+from our camp, between which and theirs was a river; at its crossing
+stood our men in two ranks, before whom the Sangleys passed, laying
+down the weapons that they carried. As soon as all of them, some
+eight thousand in number, had reached their station, arrangements
+were made for their return to Manila, the governor charging the
+master-of-camp to set out with the two armies. This was done, and
+they marched until they arrived in the parade-ground at Bagumbayan,
+opposite the city, on the evening of Friday, March. 15. The governor
+arrived that same evening, and the two armies encamped there for the
+night. At dawn of the following day, the drums sounded for the march,
+which was conducted in this order. In the vanguard went Captain
+Juan Fiallo with the cavalry, to the sound of trumpets; next some
+companies of Pampango infantry, those of the Cagayan Indians, the
+Zambal archers, and the Indians who carried javelins and shields in
+the battalion. Next came all the Sangley forces, and in the rearguard
+the Spanish infantry, with the master-of-camp. The halberdiers of
+the governor followed, and in their midst was one on horseback, who
+carried as a standard the image of the blessed Christ from Antipolo,
+mounted on a staff. Last of all came the governor, accompanied by his
+suite, and by many volunteer horsemen who had gone to the war. In this
+order they proceeded along the causeway to the bridge over the river,
+and across it to Tondo; and there our troops left the Sangleys inside a
+stockade which they had built as a precaution, with soldiers guarding
+them on all sides. The governor went thence to his palace by water,
+and the master-of-camp marched with his soldiers to the city. The
+people received them with great joy at seeing the war ended, as it
+had caused them so much anxiety and lasted so long a time--for it
+began on November 20, 1639, and came to an end on March 15, 1640.
+
+
+
+
+The slain in both armies; the enemy's weapons and mode of warfare;
+and the damage committed by them.
+
+Those who make the most careful estimate of the deaths on both
+sides state that the number of Spaniards who died in the war,
+from its beginning to its end, were about forty or forty-five, and
+of Indians three hundred; and it was always the main care of the
+governor to watch over his men. On the side of the enemy, they make
+the number of deaths approximate twenty-two thousand to twenty-four
+thousand--including therein those who died in the provinces. [77]
+Thus is made very evident, by the unequal and disproportionate number
+[of deaths] on both sides, the special protection of our Lord over
+our army--a fact acknowledged even by the very infidels.
+
+The weapons that the Sangleys collected, besides some few firearms,
+were: javelins and Japanese catanas, fastened to poles (and some were
+made in Manila), some of these weighing more than an arroba, which
+will indicate the force with which they could be used; sickles and
+pruning-hooks, also fastened to poles; iron tridents; and bamboos with
+sharp points hardened in fire, four or five brazas in length. They
+also carried away the iron from the houses and churches that they
+burned, and whenever they were left undisturbed in any encampment,
+they set up their forges and made weapons, in order that no one might
+he unprovided with them. The men were divided into tens, like [the
+Roman] decurias, so that the exact number of their men was known; and,
+of each ten, six fought, and four were responsible for their food,
+in order that the fighting men might be entirely relieved from that
+work. [78] They did not fight all at one time, but only three from
+each decuria, in order that while these were fighting the others
+might rest, and thus always they could have men who could enter the
+battle in fresh condition. They employed stratagems in fighting--in
+the beginning, when they had not so many arms, they made sham weapons,
+covering these with cloth, so that they looked like steel. In their
+camp near Sanpaloc, [79] in some towers that they built they placed
+straw figures of Sangleys, so that our infantry might fire at these
+and use up their bullets, and then the Sangleys could, without risk
+of being hit, rush to attack our men.
+
+The damages which they committed throughout the period of the
+insurrection are very great. They made havoc among the sacred images
+and utensils, besides which they burned the village of Calamba and
+its church; the village of Taluco, [80] in charge of secular priests,
+with a wooden church and a stone clergy-house; houses and property
+in Vinan; the house of San Pedro, belonging to the Society of Jesus;
+the house and church at Meyhaligue and Santa Cruz; the village and
+church of Quiapo, belonging to the Society of Jesus; many houses in
+the villages of Tondo and Binondoc; the village of Sanpaloc, with a
+house and church of stone belonging to the fathers of St. Francis;
+the village of Taytay, with house and church of stone belonging to the
+Society of Jesus; the villages of Mahayhay, Santa Cruz, Antipolo, and
+Baras, belonging to the Society of Jesus; the villages and churches
+of San Mateo and Pasig, belonging to the fathers of St. Augustine;
+the villages of Santa Maria and Siniloan, and some visitas, belonging
+to the fathers of St. Francis. They also burned ranches and country
+houses belonging to [the fathers of] St. Augustine, the Society of
+Jesus, Captain Gastelu, General Don Juan Claudio, Alferez Medrano,
+General Azaldegui, Admiral Ezquerra, and Admiral Juan Alonso; besides
+other stone houses and property belonging to private persons.
+
+
+
+
+The persons who most distinguished themselves in our army
+
+From the very outset of the war the governor was active in it, not
+sparing himself from any of its dangers, which were very great. If
+any proof were needed of his energy, valor, executive ability, and
+military circumspection, the present emergency would have furnished
+it. Distinction was honorably gained by the master-of-camp, Don
+Lorenzo de Olaso; he was always the first in dangers--none of which
+he shunned, although he experienced several attacks of illness,
+and even lay stretched at the foot of a papaw tree--escaping from
+them, or being drawn out of them by his brave heart and valiant
+spirit. Many personages of Manila in private life displayed their
+courage, adding merits to their former ones by their service in
+the army, and causing the enemy to recognize their bravery in the
+skirmishes and assaults, that they might relate how they had conducted
+themselves in these; it is sufficient to mention who they are. The
+commanding officer of the artillery, Juan Bautista de Molina, was
+present in some of the engagements, and the rest of the time he was
+directing his artillery in the city. General Geronimo Enrriquez,
+lieutenant of the master-of-camp, and general in the army, having
+been appointed on New Year's day alcalde-in-ordinary, preferred to
+fight in the campaign rather than to remain in Manila in the quiet
+and repose of his house, although opportunity to do so was given him
+by so honorable a title. General Don Juan Claudio de Verastegui, who
+fulfilled the obligations that he had inherited by birth and acquired
+by military service. Admiral Don Francisco Ezquerra, who, sometimes
+accompanying his brother, General Ezquerra, and sometimes following
+the army, everywhere gave proof of his valor. Captain Don Rodrigo
+de Guillestegui, his deeds making him appear like a veteran soldier,
+although he was so young. All the encomenderos and citizens of Manila
+also played the part of veterans, either guarding the city by day and
+by night, or serving in the camp, being present in various notable
+encounters, wherein the cavalry distinguished themselves. The company
+of Captain Juan Fiallo, who with his men was the terror of the enemy;
+Captain Juan de Montoya, and Alferez Alfonso Gomez. The ranchmen and
+mulattoes, as being accustomed to the management of horses and skilful
+in hurling javelins, caused the greatest losses to the enemy on all
+occasions. The Spanish infantry, with their captains Don Manuel de
+Rivera and N. [sic] de Ugalde (who are worthy of the highest praise),
+always fulfilled their duties with good results. The Pampango infantry
+was not without glory--the archers and shield-bearers from Pampanga,
+whose leader besides their captains was father Fray Juan de Sosa, prior
+of the convent of Betis, always as thorough a religious as he was,
+on occasion, valiant and courageous; they never returned to our camp
+without leaving tokens of their presence in that of the enemy. The
+Zambal archers, who went under the orders of Fray Antonio de las
+Misas--a Recollect religious, and a person who was in all respects
+such as the emergency required--always endeavored to win a reputation;
+and if they were previously known by report, they were now by their
+deeds. The companies of Cagayans and Terrenatans, as war was not a new
+thing to them since they were born and trained in it, did not hesitate
+to risk their lives, at the cost of a great number of enemies whom
+they left dead behind them. The Tagal Indians of all this province
+accompanied their valor with their loyalty, which was so great that,
+although their losses had been so considerable in villages, houses, and
+possessions, forgetful of all these, and remembering only the treason
+plotted, the sacrilege committed, and the design of the Sangleys to
+make themselves masters of the country, [81] these Indians took up
+arms against them most of the villages serving in their companies,
+and by so honorable an act giving proof of their fidelity toward God,
+and of their affection for the Spaniards, tokens also of their loyalty,
+subjection, and obedience to the king our lord and his officials.
+
+
+
+
+The activities in Manila during the time of the war, not only in
+defense of the city, but in prayers
+
+In proportion to the anxiety which the war occasioned was the
+solicitude that was felt in the city for its protection; no citizen
+shunned the performance of the duty that was allotted to him, and
+all were [in turn] continually serving on the walls. The direction
+of the fort [82] was in charge of the commander and castellan,
+Don Fernando de Ayala; the cavalier [i.e., tower] of San Gabriel
+was in the keeping of General Don Juan de Ezquerra; and the gate
+of the Parian, in that of Sargento-mayor Don Pedro Jara, until he
+had to take his station and plant artillery against the enemy at
+Sanpaloc. At the new gate, Captain Don Gregorio Mujica commanded;
+at that of Dilao, Sargento-mayor Palomino--and afterward Captain Mena
+of the cavalier, whom they call De Carranza; in charge of San Pedro,
+Captain Lorenzo Lopez. Admiral Luis Alonso de Roa attended to the
+foundry [for artillery]; and Captain Aumada, to emergencies [del
+inmediato]. Alferez Orgaz was in charge of the gate of Santa Lucia;
+and Alferez Bernave Martinez and Sargento-mayor Don Marcos Zapata
+of that of Santo Domingo. But, as the Spaniards were few in number,
+it was necessary that they should be aided by the ecclesiastics
+and the students. The clerics were placed in charge of a cavalier;
+the students or collegians of Santo Tomas were under the orders of
+the fathers of St. Dominic; those of the other, San Jose, under the
+[fathers of the] Society of Jesus. They wore the clerical garb all the
+time while the war lasted, with that of the military. The religious
+hastened to take arms and defend the walls on the day of the attack;
+and, every night when there was cause to suspect another, they were
+found at the posts assigned them.
+
+The city was provided with a new moat, which continuing with the
+old one by the side of the foundry, extended almost to the sea--a
+celebrated work which was completed in a very short time, all due to
+the assiduity and personal attention of the master-of-camp of the
+artillery. Its commander, General Don Juan Zapata de Molina, gave
+much attention to this work; it was greatly aided, and new inventions
+and devices for [the use of] fire were furnished, by the solicitude
+and experience of Captain Geronimo de Fuentes [Cortes]. There was
+no one who did not, on occasion, render all kinds of service. A
+company of free negroes [83] was formed, who were very useful within
+the city, being distributed through the cavaliers for the effective
+management of the artillery. Duties were assigned to the slaves, but
+with discreet caution, on account of rumors which had been current
+(although without foundation) that they were making great plans
+when they saw the Sangleys in revolt; this was done partly [to give
+them] occupation, and to deprive them of any notions of undertaking
+another insurrection to the injury of the colony. But as its citizens
+recognized that its main defense must come from the Supreme Power,
+they did not neglect to raise their hands toward heaven, everywhere
+offering continual petitions to our Lord for the fortunate result
+of the war, and for the repose and pacification of these islands. In
+the cathedral was begun a novenary [i.e., nine days' prayer] to the
+glorious St. Joseph, all the [religious] communities repairing thither,
+each on its own day, to recite solemn mass to him. The fathers of
+St. Dominic, at the request of the city, celebrated another mass to
+our Lady of the Rosary, all the religious orders also going thither
+to say mass before her image. On the last day, [the image of] the
+glorious patriarch St. Francis, who so loved this city, was carried in
+procession to the cathedral, with supplication for favors through his
+agency--which have been received heretofore, as is acknowledged, in the
+first insurrection; and finally a procession was made in honor of the
+immaculate conception of the Virgin, and other prayers were offered.
+
+[The following additional points regarding the Chinese insurrection are
+taken from a pamphlet entitled Relacion verdadera del levantamiento
+de los Sangleyes (i.e., True relation of the Sangley insurrection),
+which was printed in Madrid, by Catalina de Barrio y Angulo, in
+1642 (our transcript of the same having been made from the original
+existing in Biblioteca y Museo de Ultramar, Madrid): "Calamba is
+twelve leguas from Manila. The Chinese corresponded with a Chinese
+pirate named Yquan Sanglus; it was arranged that he should come to
+aid them on Christmas Eve, 1639 (the day set for the treason), and
+to capture the galleons from New Spain. There were 35,000 licensed
+Sangleys in Manila and its vicinity, besides 10,000 more in remote
+provinces. In Manila at this time there were thirty foot-soldiers,
+thirty horsemen, fifty Japanese, and seventy Siyaos. The value of the
+goods destroyed in the Parian was 5,000,000 pesos; and the houses
+(built of molave wood), with the church and the stone houses, all
+together were worth 2,000,000. Twenty champans brought to Mariveles
+the Sangleys from neighboring provinces, to join the Manila insurgents;
+but a Spanish and Pampango force went out against than, who sank eleven
+of the champans and killed six hundred and fifty men. Among the troops
+levied by the governor were a company of Japanese, and two of Sangley
+mestizos. Chinese prisoners confessed that their general had offered,
+to each Sangley who should bring in a Spanish head, a large reward,
+including a Spanish woman to be his wife. A body of religious from all
+the orders, aided by some Indians and ten soldiers, undertook to defend
+the passage across the river, and killed many of the enemy. On February
+24, 1640, the starving Sangleys surrendered, to the number of 7,793."]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ECCLESIASTICAL AND AUGUSTINIAN AFFAIRS, 1630-40
+
+
+[In VOLS. XXIII and XXIV of this series was presented the history of
+the Augustinian order to the year 1630, as written by Fray Juan de
+Medina. Continuing that history to 1640, we give (mainly in synopsis)
+the most important matter on this subject in the Conquistas of Fray
+Casimiro Diaz (Valladolid, 1890), book ii, pp. 267-444. As usual, the
+parts synopsized or merely referred to are printed within brackets;
+these will be readily distinguished from words or phrases supplied
+in translation, which are printed in the same manner.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+After the death of the lord archbishop Don Fray Miguel Garcia Serrano,
+the ecclesiastical cabildo of Manila attempted to interfere in
+the government of the vacant see--alleging for this purpose that
+the brief of Paul V, and the royal decree, had been obtained by
+underhand means and misrepresentations. The bishop of Cagayan, Don Fray
+Hernando Guerrero, also brought forward his claim to the vacant post;
+accordingly, both parties presented the arguments in behalf of their
+respective claims. The decision thereon was deferred for some time,
+the cabildo always resisting Don Fray Hernando Guerrero's efforts to
+take possession of the see, and denying not only the claim which he
+preferred, but also the right which the bishop of Cebu, Don Fray Pedro
+de Arce, had--which he, moreover, had yielded to Senor Guerrero. This
+contest lasted two years in the royal Audiencia; then, the auditors
+having declared that the government of the archbishopric belonged to
+Don Fray Pedro de Arce, the cabildo appealed to the Council of the
+Indias. Nevertheless, the royal Audiencia and the governor sent for the
+bishop of Cebu, who reached Manila on the twenty-second of January,
+1630. The cabildo having been commanded, by a royal decree, to hold
+a session, Don Fray Pedro de Arce presented himself at that meeting,
+and made the following proposition: "Sirs, it is well understood, as
+you will satisfy yourselves, that my coming to this city, and just
+now to this cabildo, is quite contrary to my own inclinations; for
+I desire and love a quiet life, and I hold very dear the sheep of my
+bishopric. The example [of this that I have given] is very evident;
+for Fray Hernando Guerrero having gone to my diocese so that I might
+confer upon him the orders for which he had been consecrated, I also
+transferred to him the right to the government of this archbishopric
+that I hold in virtue of a brief from his Holiness Paul V, issued
+by him on January 7, 1612. But the claim of the said bishop of Nueva
+Segovia was not allowed, for reasons which you know. After that, Don
+Juan Nino de Tavora, governor and captain-general of these islands,
+wrote to me so urgently in the name of the gentlemen of the royal
+Audiencia, sending me his Majesty's royal decree, and laying a burden
+upon my conscience if I did not accept this duty, that I could not
+refuse it; accordingly, I come to this city, certainly against my own
+wishes, and to the injury of my health in my advanced years. But, sirs,
+it has seemed to me expedient to come, as a measure of peace and love,
+to expostulate with you, and ask that you carefully consider all these
+motives and reasons. I ask that, without delay or opposition, you at
+once admit me to the government of this archbishopric, to which his
+Holiness and his Majesty call me, considering that my earnest desire
+and intention is to strive to labor in the service of both Majesties,
+and to promote, for yourselves and all this commonwealth, the welfare
+and harmony which should prevail, and which are right." Thus spoke
+Don Fray Pedro de Arce; and answer was made to him by the dean,
+Don Miguel Garcetas, in behalf of the cabildo. He said that they all
+fully appreciated the bishop's kindness, and that all were entirely
+satisfied of his good intentions in this matter, and of his great
+virtue, prudence, and learning; but that, in order that they might
+proceed in this matter with all harmony, certainty, and deliberation,
+it was necessary that all the members of the cabildo should assemble
+(for some were not present at this meeting). The dean added that in all
+their acts they would follow the rulings of the sacred canons and the
+constitutions of the cathedral church, and that his Lordship might be
+certain that all of them confessed themselves to be his affectionate
+children, and desired to render him service; and that they entreated
+him to show them the bulls and other documents that he possessed,
+in order that all these might be duly fulfilled. To this the bishop
+replied that the bulls were already before the cabildo, and by virtue
+of them he had been admitted to the government of the archbishopric
+by the death of Don Diego Vazquez Mercado; accordingly, they must
+settle the matter without delay because, if they did this amicably,
+they would find in him a father and protector; but if not, he would
+enforce his claims by the severe measures which he could by law employ.
+
+The cabildo met on the twenty-ninth of January, and decided that,
+after having consulted learned persons, they were of opinion that the
+cabildo ought not to surrender the government; but that, on account of
+the many and serious difficulties [that might arise from this], they
+would yield under protest. Accordingly, they received Don Fray Pedro de
+Arce on the same day as ruler of the vacant see, although the cabildo
+took much umbrage at it; and from this affair originated continual
+strife and dissensions. At the outset, they denied to Don Fray Pedro
+the seat in the choir, the cabildo asserting that the bishop was not
+competent to possess it because he was not a proprietary bishop; and
+that, although he had been consecrated, it was in another diocese, and
+one suffragan to that of Manila. The prudent bishop felt this slight
+keenly, for they had given him this seat when he first administered
+the vacant see; but finally they gave him the seat (to which he was
+legally entitled), as they had done before. Don Fray Pedro de Arce
+ruled with the prudence and uprightness which in him were so eminent,
+which together with his virtue and piety, made him a most accomplished
+prelate, and truly a father to all. In the course of his government
+he made enactments very important for the conduct of the church;
+in especial, he imposed the cuadrante [84] for the choir in the
+cathedral of Manila with great exactness--aiding the prebends with
+great readiness in their choir, the subsidy that they receive being
+still so small that some of them have hardly enough for their support.
+
+[The rest of this chapter is mainly occupied with secular occurrences,
+which we omit here because they have already been fully related in
+other documents for that time--the fruitless expedition against
+Jolo under Lorenzo de Olaso, shipbuilding in Cambodia attempted,
+the despatch of an envoy to India to secure Portuguese cooperation
+against the Dutch, the coming of the royal visitor Don Francisco de
+Rojas, and the death of the governor Nino de Tavora--and the relation
+of various miraculous cures and deliverances performed through the
+Santo Nino (or image of Christ) in the church of Cebu. The following
+paragraph states the proceedings at the meeting of the Augustinian
+provincial chapter of 1632:]
+
+The year 1632 having arrived, the provincial chapter was convened
+in the convent at Manila, on the first day of May; the president at
+this session was father Fray Juan de Tapia, and the election [for
+provincial] resulted, with the general consent of the entire province,
+in the choice of father Fray Geronimo de Medrano--a very courteous and
+discreet religious, who governed this province well. As definitors
+were chosen the fathers Fray Juan de Montemayor, Fray Francisco de
+Mercado, Fray Luis Ronquillo, and Fray Juan Ramirez; and as visitors,
+the fathers Fray Alonso Carbajal and Fray Antonio de Porras. They made
+regulations very useful for the proper government of the province;
+and as its procurator for Espana was appointed father Fray Diego de
+Ordas, at that time prior of the convent of Santo Nino at Cebu. He
+made the journey that year, and, having performed it very successfully,
+returned [to the islands] in the year 1635.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTERS VII-XIV
+
+[These chapters are occupied with accounts of the persecutions in
+Japan, and the biographies of Augustinian priests who were martyred
+therein.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTERS XV-XXXIV
+
+[These chapters relate the coming of Corcuera as governor,
+his controversies with the bishop, and the exile of the latter;
+biographical accounts of various noted Augustinian missionaries,
+some of whom were martyrs in Japan; and the final incidents of the
+persecution in that country, so far as Diaz could learn of them, up to
+about 1715. Nearly all of this matter is either a repetition of what
+we have already presented in previous volumes, or irrelevant to our
+purpose; but we select occasional passages which properly belong to
+the history of the islands, especially its ecclesiastical aspects. In
+our VOL. XXV may be found extracts from Diaz's work regarding the
+contest between Corcuera and Guerrero (chapters xv-xviii). Chapter
+xix is devoted to the opinion of "a learned auditor of Manila" on the
+banishment of the archbishop; the editor of Diaz, Father Tirso Lopez,
+prints this opinion, in order to reproduce all of Diaz's history,
+which is his only reason for not suppressing "this conceited, most
+tedious, and ill-digested document." Chapters xx and xxi are devoted
+to the biographies of two Augustinian missionaries, Fray Alonso de
+Mentrida and Fray Juan de Medina respectively. The former excelled
+as a linguist.]
+
+[Pp. 353-355:] He composed a curious and ingenious grammar [arte], by
+which the main difficulty in [learning] those languages was surmounted
+in a short time. He also composed a copious vocabulary of the languages
+of the two islands, Panay and Cebu, which are quite distinct. In the
+mountain region of Ogton a very harsh language is spoken, which they
+call Halaya; and along the coast another, more polished and elegant,
+which is called Hileygueina. This work [i.e., the vocabulary] cost him
+much labor, and is very useful to the ministers. He left it complete,
+and after his death it was published by father Fray Martin Claver. [85]
+He [Fray Alonso] composed a brief catechism, accurately written,
+in the Bisayan language, which is very useful for instructing those
+natives in the mysteries of our holy faith; this was printed twice,
+in order that there might be an abundant supply of a work so important
+for the welfare of souls. He also published the ritual by which the
+holy sacraments are usually administered in these islands; and this
+work is deserving of esteem, since one finds therein a compilation of
+what is strictly necessary for the more safe administration [of the
+sacraments]. It is so highly regarded by the other religious orders
+that, although two large editions of the work have been printed,
+it is now necessary to issue a third, since all are trying to obtain
+this book. [86]
+
+Father Fray Alonso de Mentrida spent many years in the provinces of
+Ogton and Panay, [87] where he gathered much fruit in the conversion
+of those souls, especially in the district of Ogton--which in those
+times was, in the greater part of its mountain region, shrouded
+in the darkness of error. There the devil was well entrenched in
+those rugged mountains, having solidly established his kingdom and
+worship among those simple natives--who, influenced more by fear
+than by any other consideration, prostrated themselves before that
+demon, and gave him their worship and adoration. His crafty designs
+were successful among them through the agency of many priests and
+priestesses (in the Bisayan idiom called babaylanes), who, being
+especially assisted by that infernal spirit, concoct certain frauds
+and delusions, with which they deceive the simple Bisayans. These
+priests, moreover, secure much advantage from this mode of life,
+since by it they make their living, and are feared and looked up to;
+for most of them have a compact with the devil, by means of which
+they wreak such evil as they can on those persons on whom they try
+to be revenged, or whom they wish to injure because some one else
+has done them harm. Against this infernal horde father Fray Alonso
+de Mentrida waged continual battle, roaming through those mountains
+on foot, and accompanied only by one servant, a very good Christian,
+who aided him much in his work. This man died at a great age (more
+than one hundred and ten years); he lived in the village of Guimbal,
+of which he was a native, and his name was Vilango. They journeyed
+so destitute of human aid that they carried in their pouches only
+some roots, cooked, which in that country are very common, called
+camotes, with a little rice, eaten cold and half-cooked. This sort of
+abstinence was so continual in Father Mentrida that he ate nothing
+else than the vegetables and pottages of the country, with a little
+fish when he wished to appease his more pressing hunger; and it is not
+known that he ate meat until, in his old age and in several attacks
+of illness that he suffered, the duty of obedience compelled him to
+moderate so austere a diet. In such a mode of life this apostolic
+man wandered through those mountains, preaching to the infidels the
+word of God, and persuading them to leave their straggling hamlets
+[rancherias] and settle in some small villages, that he might more
+advantageously call them together and instruct them, separating them
+from their errors and blindness. With great benefit to their souls
+the simple mountaineers of Ogton received the gospel preaching,
+as they all are gentle and well-inclined people; the father's only
+opponents were those ministers of Satan and children of perdition,
+the babaylanes, who with their lies sowed their diabolical tares
+upon the grain of heaven, and easily smothered the seed that took
+root in piously-inclined hearts. Those priests artfully suggested
+to the natives the anger which their divatas (thus they name the
+spirits to whom they give adoration) felt against them, and on
+their own part uttered threats against them, menacing either their
+lives or their poor property--which is a scanty grain-field of rice;
+and by these shameless acts they terrorized the people, and caused
+some of them to lose their solicitude for attending church. Father
+Fray Alonso de Mentrida spared neither hardship nor effort to bring
+back to the fold of the Church those whom these malicious ministers
+had, through their crafty methods, caused to backslide; and he held
+with those priests extraordinary discussions, from which, in place
+of gaining good results, he obtained only their plots. With these
+they tried, on several occasions, to deprive him of life by their
+arts and witchcraft; but the Lord, who watched over His servant,
+did not permit them to succeed in their damnable attempts, and,
+for the greater humiliation of the common enemy [i.e., the devil],
+held back the father from the greatest dangers.
+
+During the time when this apostolic minister was preaching in the
+mountains of Ogton, there were visible apparitions of the devil,
+standing upon a rock and teaching superstitions and giving laws
+to a great multitude of Indians, who, deceived by him, followed
+him. Moreover, in those mountains are many demons, who appear to the
+natives in horrible forms--as hideous savages, covered with bristles,
+having very long claws, with terrifying eyes and features, who attack
+and maltreat those whom they encounter. These being are called by
+the Indians Banuanhon, who are equivalent to the satyrs and fauns of
+ancient times. Even at this day these hideous monsters are wont to
+appear to the Indians, some of whom remain in a demented condition for
+months from the mere sight of them; others go away with these demons,
+and are lost for a long time, and then will return in a terrified
+and fainting condition, few of them failing to die soon afterward. I
+would have much to tell and relate if I should stop to mention what
+has occurred with such monsters, who have been seen not only in the
+mountains of Ogton and Panay, but very frequently in the province
+of Taal. They are called in the Tagal language Tigbalang; and many
+persons who have seen them have described to me, in the same terms,
+the aspect of the monster. They say that he has a face like a cat's,
+with a head that is flattened above, not round, with thick beard, and
+covered with long hair; his legs are so long that, when he squats on
+his buttocks, his knees stand a vara above his head; and he is so swift
+in running that there is no quadruped that can be compared with him.
+
+[Diaz proceeds to relate several incidents connected with these
+demons, and the difficulties encountered by Mentrida, caused by the
+hostility of the native priests--who much resembled the "medicine-men"
+of the North American Indians; and adds (p. 356): "In these holy
+occupations he passed much time in that mountain wilderness, as his
+companion Vilango has told me; and gradually those hearts, hard as
+diamonds, were softened, and they were converted to our holy faith. He
+proceeded to gather those people into villages, founding those of
+Agra (with the advocacy of St. Nicholas), Baong, Santiago, Limao,
+San Pedro, Taytay, and Catingpan--which remain to this very day,
+and in my time preserve the memory of this apostolic man, to whom,
+as they recognize, they owe the knowledge of the truth." Mentrida
+remained in the missions until 1618, when he was summoned to Manila,
+to become prior of the Augustinian convent there; and in 1623, he was
+elected provincial. The rest of his life he was afflicted by age and
+broken health; and he died at Manila, March 22, 1637.]
+
+[Diaz sketches the life and labors of Juan de Medina (whose history
+of his order in Filipinas we publish in VOLS. XXIII and XXIV of this
+series), giving the following summary of his achievements: "It is
+not easy to relate in full the great labors of this religious in the
+conversion of the Indians in the province of Ogton, when they all,
+on account of the coming of the Dutch the first time to the point
+of Iloilo, took refuge in the mountains, forsaking their villages,
+so that it was difficult for several years to bring them back to a
+sedentary life. During that time, this religious traveled, carrying
+little more than his staff, through all the mountains of Ogton,
+preaching to the people that they might be converted, and maintaining
+a continual battle with the devil--who had, through the agency of his
+ministers the babaylanes, persuaded the people that the Spaniards could
+not deliver them from the Dutch. During that time he suffered many
+dangers through the plots of those infernal ministers, who at various
+times tried to take his life--divine Providence delivering him from
+them all, for the greater gain of those Christian communities. Amid
+those dangers did this religious convert most of the peoples in
+Ogton, Xaro, Baong, and Pasig. In all places where this minister
+went, he left an especial reputation for his virtue and apostolic
+teaching. He visited some nine times the entire province of Bisayas,
+and usually held the office of vicar-provincial--obedience obliging
+him to accept it, on account of the great importance of his direction
+for the greater glory of the order." After twenty years spent in these
+labors, he obtained permission (1631) to go to Spain, and miraculously
+escaped from the wreck of his ship in the very port of Cavite. He then
+returned to the Visayan missions, but again set out for Spain in 1635;
+while crossing the Pacific, he was carried away by disease. Chapters
+xxii-xxv are devoted to the persecutions and martyrdoms of Christians
+in Japan; chapter xxvi treats mainly of the controversy within the
+Augustinian order regarding the "alternation" of offices between the
+friars sent from Spain and those who had taken the habit in the Indias
+(already related in our VOL. XXVIII). The following paragraphs are
+of interest here.]
+
+[Pp. 386-388:] After the father provincial Fray Juan Ramirez (who
+was one of the best superiors of that time) had governed this
+province very successfully and judiciously, the time arrived for
+the provincial chapter; it was held at the convent of San Pablo in
+Manila, on the twenty-fourth of the month of April, 1638. Father Fray
+Jeronimo Cornuetano, the general of the entire order, presided over
+the meeting; and it resulted in the election, by unanimous consent,
+of father Fray Martin Errasti, a religious who was much endeared to
+all the rest by his many fine qualities. The definitors elected were
+fathers Fray Juan de Trexo, Fray Jeronimo Venasque, Fray Francisco
+de Madrid, and Fray Francisco de Villalon; and the visitors, father
+Fray Juan de Boan and Fray Jeronimo de Paredes--all being religious
+of recognized abilities, and men to whose care the interests of
+this province could be confided. It was decided to send to Espana a
+procurator to conduct a party of religious to this province, although
+the choice of one was not effected until the following year; this fell
+upon father Fray Pedro de Quesada, prior of the convent of Bulacan,
+who had recently arrived, driven back by stress of weather, from [a
+voyage to] the kingdom of Japon--whither he went with some religious
+of St. Dominic; but stormy head-winds obliged them to return to Manila,
+divine Providence keeping them in reserve for another ministry.
+
+The Moro pirates of Mindanao and Jolo did not cease to infest the
+Pintados Islands every year with their armed fleets--capturing
+the natives, burning the villages, plundering the churches of the
+consecrated vessels, and then destroying those temples by fire. So
+far had gone the boldness of Corralat--who came to those islands,
+subjected to his anger, without the Spaniards displaying any purpose
+to defend them, or going out to hinder those injuries--that he
+soon attributed this negligence to cowardice, and to the fear of
+him which the Spaniards felt. This so increased his boldness that
+his little fleets were daring enough to approach even the bay of
+Manila. They experienced no resistance, save only in the province of
+Caraga--[whose natives are] a warlike people--and this was due to
+the valor of its alcalde-mayor, Captain Don Francisco de Atienza y
+Banes, a native of Toledo; and to the great courage of a discalced
+Augustinian religious named Fray Agustin de San Pedro, who was very
+celebrated in those times, and feared by the pirates, [who was known]
+by the name of "Father Captain" [Padre Capitan]. [88] The exploits
+of this religious in defending the villages where he was a minister
+of religious instruction, and in going out to find the enemy in their
+own country, would be material for many chapters of history. He was a
+religious of great virtue, and of zeal for the welfare of souls; and,
+besides this, God had given him extraordinary courage, and a genius
+worthy of Scipio and Hannibal. Accordingly, seeing that those who ought
+to conduct military operations remained with folded hands, without
+going out to the defense of those harassed peoples, he determined
+to do so himself. On one occasion he went out from Butuan, where
+he was prior, with some Spanish soldiers, and men whom he gathered
+in Caraga; and with them he faced and put to flight an armed fleet
+of Corralat. When Don Francisco de Atienza saw what aid he had in
+the valor and experience of father Fray Agustin, the two laid their
+plans to perform an exploit that should do them credit; and, manning
+some caracoas with the best soldiers from the presidio of Tanda, both
+Spaniards and Caragas, and providing two boats which could be taken
+to pieces and carried overland in sections, and afterward be again
+put together and framed, Don Francisco, accompanied by father Fray
+Agustin, took the route to the lake of Malanao, [89] which was under
+the jurisdiction of Corralat. This lake is in the island of Mindanao,
+opposite the island of Bohol; from north to south it is eight leguas
+long, and it is four leguas wide. Its shores are thickly settled by
+several tribes, some Mahometan and others heathen (although all of
+them are vassals of Corralat); but they are people who are very poor
+in all except foodstuffs, of which they have a great abundance. Don
+Francisco de Atienza and father Fray Agustin de San Pedro arrived at
+this lake; and, as the water at its entrance was very low and there
+were many miry places, they took the four [sic] vessels to pieces and
+placed them on the lake, where they again [put them together and]
+manned them. By this means the Spaniards went through that region,
+carrying on hostilities among those tribes, and leaving them subjected
+to the crown of Espana--although this submission did not last long, for
+Corralat again reduced them, because the Spaniards had not left behind
+a fortified post. This conquest was not one of much profit; but it
+was enough to leave the Moros warned for some time by this punishment.
+
+[Chapters xxvii and xxviii are occupied with the expedition of
+Corcuera against Jolo, already described in our VOL. XXVIII. Chapters
+xxix-xxxiv are devoted almost entirely to the Chinese insurrection
+in Manila and its environs in 1639, and to an historical account of
+former disturbances caused by them in the islands, from the time of
+the pirate Limahon down. A brief paragraph mentions the death of
+the provincial of the Augustinians, and his temporary successor:
+"In the middle of the year 1639 occurred the death of the father
+provincial Fray Martin de Herrasti, a loss which was keenly felt
+by all the province on account of his many endowments and lovable
+qualities. He was a native of Guipuzcoa, and a son of the convent at
+Burgos. Having come to this province in the year 1617, he was assigned,
+by his obedience, to the ministry in Pampanga, where he remained, an
+excellent missionary, for a period of twenty years--until the province,
+satisfied as to his virtue and discretion, chose to employ so worthy
+a minister to govern it, and elected him provincial, although it
+enjoyed but little of the direction of so excellent a superior. The
+government of the province was assumed by father Fray Juan Ramirez,
+as the most recent past provincial; and thus was somewhat lessened
+the general grief caused by the loss of the deceased provincial."]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+RELATION OF THE FILIPINAS ISLANDS
+
+By a religious who lived there for eighteen years [90]
+
+
+The islands called Filipinas, because of having been conquered during
+the reign of Felipe II, were discovered in the year 1521, by Hernando
+Magallanes, a famous Portuguese, who gave his name to the strait. That
+great pilot, after having forever perpetuated his name by a navigation
+so new and so difficult, landed on one of the Filipinas Islands--a
+very small one, named Matan--where he was treacherously killed by
+the Indians. Ruy Lopez de Villalobos sighted the islands again after
+him in the year 1539. [91] Finally they were pacified in the year
+1571 by the adelantado Miguel Lopez de Legaspi. It is a cause for
+surprise that the Portuguese, who had discovered the Malucas, China,
+and Japon, some years before, and had made their homes there, did
+not know anything about those islands until long afterward, although
+they are, as it were, the very center and middle part of their other
+discoveries. They knew well the island of Borneo, which is the last of
+those islands toward the south, but they had never stopped there while
+en route to the Malucas--urged, perhaps, by their too great greed for
+the spices and drugs which are produced so abundantly in those islands.
+
+The geographies say that there are eleven thousand islands in that
+great archipelago of which the Filipinas are a part, and that they are
+adjacent to Asia as are the Canaries and the Terceras to Africa. They
+cross into the torrid zone and extend along the coasts of China and
+India. South of them lie the Malucas, and on their northern coast,
+Japon. More than forty of them are subject to the king of Espana,
+the largest and most important being Manila and Mindanao. Manila is
+the capital of all the others, the residence of the governor and the
+archbishop, and the seat of the royal Audiencia. Those two islands are
+each six hundred miles in circuit; they are full of mountains, have
+rivers and dense forests, and lie in thirteen and one-half degrees
+north latitude. The other islands are not so large, some being one
+hundred miles in circuit, some fifty, and some even less. Almost all
+of them are inhabited by Indians, and those which are not are used by
+the Indians for their crops, and for the chase of deer and wild boars,
+and for the gathering of wax, with which the islands most abound.
+
+The islands not yet under the dominion of the king of Espana have
+their own kings, who are Mahometans. The island of Borneo, three
+times greater than the whole of Italia, is the largest of all the
+islands. Those subject to the king of Espana are Manila, Zebu, Oton,
+Mindanao, Bohol, Leite, Samar, Mindoro, Marinduque, the island of
+Negros, the island of Fuegos, Calamianes, Masbat, Jolo, Taquima,
+Capul, La Paragua, the island of Tablas, Verde Island, Burias,
+Tiago, Maripipe, Panama, Panaon, Sibuian, Luban, Bantajan, Panglao,
+Siquior, Catanduan, Imaras, Tagapolo, Banton, Romblon, Similara,
+Cuio, Cagaianes, Marivelez, Poro, Babuianes, the island of Cabras
+(which is distant from the others), and other smaller ones.
+
+In the islands subject to the king of Espana, every married man pays
+ten reals of tribute, and he who is unmarried five. Nearly all of them
+have received the gospel, and hence there are few heathen. However,
+in the islands of Mindanao, Taquima, and Jolo, conquered but recently,
+most of the people are Moros or heathen; but it is hoped that the
+zeal of the missionaries will convert them very soon to Jesus Christ.
+
+Before the conquest of those islands by the Spaniards, the natives of
+the country were subject to the chiefs among them, who were recognized
+as nobles, and all the others obeyed them. Those chiefs possessed a
+great amount of gold, and slaves in proportion to their nobility. I
+knew two chiefs, one in Bohol, and the other at Dapitan, a village
+of Mindanao, who had more than one hundred slaves apiece. They are
+not foreign slaves, as those of Angola who are in Europa, but of the
+same nation. It was a lamentable thing to see with what violence and
+for how little a thing, these chiefs made slaves. For, however small a
+sum one owed to another, the interest, for lack of payment, amounted to
+so great a sum that it was impossible to pay it; and consequently, the
+person of the debtor being pledged for the debt, he became the slave of
+his creditor, together with all his posterity. They also made slaves,
+with unusual tyranny and cruelty, for crimes of slight importance,
+such as not keeping silent at the graves of the dead, and for passing
+in front of the chief's wife when she was in her bath. Those captured
+in war were also all made slaves. Now with baptism, all those acts
+of violence and tyranny have been suppressed--although there still
+remains one very peculiar custom among them, which does not follow
+that general rule, namely, Partus sequitur ventrem; [92] for there are
+some who are wholly slaves, and others who are only half slaves. The
+former are those born of a slave father and mother; the others who
+are born of a slave father and a free mother, or vice versa. In some
+villages it is the custom that, if the father is slave and the mother
+free, one of the children is free and the other slave. The privilege
+of those half slaves is that if they pay a certain sum of money to
+their master, they may oblige him to grant them their liberty--an
+advantage that is not possessed by those who are wholly slaves.
+
+All the religion of those Indians is founded on tradition, and on a
+custom introduced by the devil himself, who formerly spoke to them
+by the mouth of their idols and of their priests. That tradition is
+preserved by the songs that they learn by heart in their childhood,
+by hearing them sung in their sailing, in their work, in their
+amusements, and in their festivals, and, better yet, when they bewail
+their dead. In those barbarous songs, they recount the fabulous
+genealogies and deeds of their gods, of whom they have one who is
+chief and head of all the others. The Tagals call that god Bathala mei
+Capal, which signifies "God the Creator." The Bisayans call him Laon,
+which signifies "Time." They are not far from our belief on the point
+of the creation of the world. They believe in a first man, the flood,
+and paradise, and the punishments of the future life.
+
+They say that the first man and the first woman came out of a reed
+stalk which burst in Sumatra, and that there were some quarrels between
+them at their marriage. They believed that when the soul left the body,
+it went to an island, where the trees, birds, waters, and all other
+things were black; that it passed thence to another island, where all
+things were of different colors; and finally that it arrived at one,
+where everything was white. They recognized invisible spirits, another
+life, and devils hostile to men, of whom they had great fear. Their
+chief idolatry was in adoring and regarding as gods those of their
+ancestors who were most remarkable for their courage, or for their
+intelligence. Such they called humalagar, or, as is said in Latin,
+manes. Each one, as far as possible, ascribed divinity to his father
+at death. The old men even died with that conceit, and that is why
+they chose a remarkable place--as did one in the island of Leite, who
+had himself placed on the seashore, so that those who went sailing
+should recognize him as a god, and commend themselves to him. They
+also worshiped animals and birds. They regarded the rainbow as a
+sort of divinity. The Tagals worshiped a totally blue bird, of the
+size of a thrush, which they called bathala, which was a name of
+the divinity. They worshiped the raven, which they called meilupa,
+meaning "the master of the earth." They had a great veneration for
+the crocodile. [When] they saw it in the water, they called it nono,
+or "grandfather." They offered to it prayers regularly, with great
+devotion, and offerings of what they carried in their boats, in
+order that it might not harm them. There was no old tree of which
+they did not make a god, and it was a sacrilege to cut it. I have
+seen a very large one called nonog, [93] in the island of Samar,
+which a religious ordered to be felled, in order to destroy all those
+superstitions. He was unable to find an Indian who would undertake
+it for him; and it was necessary for some Spaniards to go to fell
+it. They also worshiped the stones, rocks, reefs, and promontories
+of land which jut into the sea; and made offerings to these of rice,
+fish, and other like things, or fired their arrows at them in passing.
+
+Between La Caldera and the river in the island of Mindanao, a great
+point of land runs into the sea, which makes the coast dangerous and
+very high. The sea beats violently against that cape, which is very
+difficult to double. The Indians in passing offered it their arrows as
+a sacrifice, praying it to allow them to pass. They shot them with so
+great force that they made them enter the rock, and hence it is called
+the Punta de Flechas. One day the Spaniards burned a number of those
+arrows to show their hatred of so vain a superstition; and in less than
+one year more than four thousand were found there. When Don Sebastian
+Hurtado de Corcuera conquered the island of Mindanao three years ago,
+[94] he ordered that that point be called no more Punta de Flechas,
+but San Sebastian. They had innumerable other superstitions. If they
+saw a snake or a lizard, or if they heard a bird that they called
+corocoro [95] sneeze or sing, they took it as a bad sign, and did
+not go farther. They had no remarkable temples, and no festivals of
+days of public sacrifices; but each one made his offerings to the
+humalagar or divata (which was the name of their god) in private,
+according to their purpose or need. Although they had no temples,
+they had men and women who acted as priests, who were called catolonan
+by some and babailan by others. Those priests were most inclined to
+allow themselves to be deceived by the devil, and to deceive the
+people afterward by a thousand tricks and inventions--chiefly at
+the time of their sicknesses, when they are depressed, lose courage,
+and crave a prompt remedy; and give all their possessions to him who
+promises it to them.
+
+There are some priests who have special communication with the
+devil. He speaks to them through the mouths of their little idols,
+and makes them believe that these are the voices of their ancestors,
+whom they worship. Sometimes the devil passes into the bodies of their
+sacrificers, and, during the short time of the sacrifice, he makes
+them say and do things that fill the bystanders with fear. They take
+that order of sacrificers from among their friends or their relatives,
+who wish to learn the mystery of it from them. Their blindness causes
+them to esteem that rank greatly, for besides the reputation and
+respect that that employment brings them, they also receive large
+offerings. All who have been present at the sacrifice make them gifts,
+one cotton, one gold, and one a fowl. The sacrifice takes place in
+their houses. The victim is now a hog, now a fowl, now some fish or
+rice; and the sacrifice is differently named according to the various
+victims. It is performed by the sacrificer stabbing the victim amid
+certain ceremonies, which he performs to a cadence marked by a drum
+or a bell. That is the time in which the devil takes possession of
+them. He causes them to make innumerable contortions and grimaces,
+after the end of which they tell what they believe they have seen
+or heard.
+
+As for their persons, those people are well built, have handsome
+features, and are light-complexioned. They are clad in a garment
+that falls to the ankles, which is made of striped cotton of various
+colors. When in mourning, they wear white; however, that mode of dress
+is not so general. Those called Pintados, and those of the island of
+Mindanao, wear short white, yellow, or red tunics, which hang to the
+knees, bound in by a girdle one vara wide and two and one-half brazas
+long; this is, as a general rule, white or red, and always falls
+to the knees. They wear neither stockings nor shoes; and instead
+of a hat they use a bit of cloth, which they wind twice or thrice
+around the head. Their whole adornment consists in having very rich
+and beautiful necklaces, earrings, and gold rings or bracelets. They
+wear those bracelets above the ankle; some wear these of ivory, and
+others of brass. They also have little round plates three fingers
+in diameter, which they pass through a hole that they make in the
+ear. In some of those islands, the men formerly marked all the body
+with figures, whence comes the Spanish name "Pintados" ["pictured,"
+i.e., tattooed]. That operation was performed in the flower of
+their age, and at the period when they had most strength to suffer
+that torture. They had themselves adorned in that way after they had
+performed some illustrious deed. The masters of that art first trace on
+their bodies the design of the picture, which they next follow up with
+pricks from very sharp points, and throw on the blood which comes out
+a powder which never fades away. The whole of the body is not pricked
+at once, but bit by bit; and formerly, in order that one might have
+the right of making it for each part, it was necessary to perform an
+illustrious deed, and to show new prowess. Those pictures are pretty,
+and well proportioned to the portions of the body on which they are
+made; and, although they are of an ashen color, they are nevertheless
+agreeable to the sight. The children are not tattooed at all. The
+women do not bear the marks of that adornment except on one hand and
+on some part of the other. In regard to their teeth, they imitate
+the men in everything. They file them from their earliest childhood;
+some making them even in this way, others filing them into points,
+thus giving them the appearance of a saw. They cover the teeth with
+a black, glossy polish, or one that is flame-colored; and thus their
+teeth become black, or as red as vermilion. In the upper row, they
+make a little covering which they fill with gold, which shows off to
+advantage on the black or red background of that polish.
+
+The women as well as the men are continually in the water, and they
+also swim like fish. They need no bridge to get over rivers. They bathe
+at all times of the day, as much for pleasure as for cleanliness. Women
+who have but recently given birth cannot be prevented from bathing,
+and bathe in the waters of the coldest springs. As soon as the child
+has issued from its mother's womb, it is placed in the water; and
+on taking it from the bath its head is rubbed with ajonjoli [i.e.,
+sesame] oil mixed with civet. They do that also on other occasions,
+and to show politeness, especially the women and little boys. They
+bathe also during their sicknesses, and have for that purpose springs
+of hot water, especially at the shore of Laguna de Bay, which is in
+the island of Manila. [96]
+
+There is no one language that is general for all the islands,
+but each district has a special one. True, they have some relation
+between one another, such as exists between the Lombard, Sicilian,
+and Tuscan. There are six dialects in the island of Manila, and
+two in the island of Oton; while there are some languages which
+are spoken in several islands. The most general are the Tagal and
+Bisayan. The latter is very rude, but the former is very polished,
+and most remarkable. Thus a religious, who was well versed in those
+islands, was in the habit of saying that the Tagal language had
+the advantages of the four chief languages of the world: that it
+was mysterious, like Hebrew; that it had the articles of the Greek,
+both for appellatives and for proper names; that it had elegance and
+abundance, like the Latin; and that it was not less suitable than
+the Italian for compliments and business. [97] They have only three
+vowels, but these serve as five. They have only a dozen consonants,
+which they express differently by placing a little dot above or below,
+as can be seen in the following figure.
+
+
+    Marginal note: "The consonants not marked with any point are
+    pronounced with 'a;' if they have a point above, they are
+    pronounced with 'e,' or 'i;' if the point is below, they
+    are pronounced with 'o' or 'u.'"
+
+
+They have learned to write from us [98] by making their lines from
+left to right, instead of their former way of writing from top to
+bottom. Reeds or palm-leaves serve them as paper, and the point of
+an iron style is used instead of a pen. They use their writing only
+to letters from one to another, for they have no histories or books
+of any learning. Our religious have printed books in the languages of
+the islands, concerning the matters of our religion. In the Malucas,
+they have a very pretty method of writing to their friends. They
+collect flowers of various colors, and make a bouquet of them; and
+he who receives the bouquet understands, on beholding the varieties
+of flowers and their colors, as if they were so many different
+characters, the thoughts of his friend. They have not sufficient
+capacity to apply themselves to learning, and they content themselves
+with being good carpenters, and with working gold and iron well. They
+have been employed during these last few years in making silk and
+cotton stockings; in writing and reading our characters; in singing
+and dancing; and in playing the flute, the guitar, and the harp. The
+strings used for those last instruments are made from twisted silk,
+and produce as agreeable a sound as ours, although quite different in
+quality. They formerly had an instrument called cutiape, which some
+of them still use. It bears a close resemblance to a hurdy-gurdy,
+and has four copper cords. They play it so cleverly, that they make
+it express whatever they wish; and it is asserted as a truth that
+they speak, and tell one another whatever they wish, by means of that
+instrument, a special skill in those of that nation.
+
+Most of those islanders have only one wife, but it is not true that
+there are not some places in the country where they have several,
+especially in the island of Mindanao. It may be said that the husbands
+buy their wives there, since they generally make some present to
+their parents according to their rank: that of dato, for instance,
+which signifies "a man of rank;" of tinaua, which signifies "free;"
+or oripuen, which signifies "a slave." The women in the islands
+of the Pintados are called binocot, or "woman who is in the room;"
+for bocot signifies "a room," and the women go outside but rarely,
+and even are carried then on the shoulders of their slaves. I have
+seen one woman of Dapitan, a settlement of the island of Mindanao, so
+delicate and so fine, that she always had herself carried to church
+on the shoulders of her slaves whom she best liked. It is a mark of
+politeness among those women always to keep the right hand in front
+of the mouth when they talk to a man. [99]
+
+Those people live in houses thatched with straw, with the leaves of
+trees, or with large reeds which, divided into two, serve them as a
+tiling. There is but little furniture to be seen in their houses. But
+rarely are chairs seen there, for they always sit on the ground, or
+on carpets made from reeds. They have neither beds nor mattresses, as
+their reed mats serve as both. They eat on the ground or on very small
+low tables, but the tables are used only among the chiefs. Banana
+leaves, which are one braza long and one-half braza wide, serve
+them as napkins. Their employment consists of agriculture, the very
+abundant fishing along their coasts and in their rivers, and hunting
+wild boars and deer with dog and spear--an employment to which their
+agility and their skill renders them very suitable. They also go to
+gather honey and wax in the mountains or in the trees, where nature
+has taught the bees to make both those substances.
+
+The arms of some are spears, of others arrows; the campilan, which is a
+large cutlass; the kris, or poniard; the zompites or blow-guns, through
+which they blow little poisoned arrows; and bacacaies, or little reeds
+hardened by fire at the end. To defend their grain from animals and
+from men who could harm it, they scatter caltrops, which the old men
+call tribulos, [100] made so that one of the four points of which they
+are composed is always up, and those who pass there get caught without
+perceiving the traps. But now the Spaniards have taught them how to
+use firearms, and they get along very well--especially a nation called
+the Pampangos, many of whom are enrolled in the Spanish troops. These
+men serve with great fidelity, and well second the courage of which
+the Spaniards set them an example in their combats by sea and land.
+
+They are very fertile, and I have seen but few married people without
+children. When these are born, they name them according to the
+incidents that happen at the time of their birth. One will be called
+Maglente, because of the thunder that sounded at the time of his birth;
+for lente signifies a clap of thunder. Another will be named Gubaton,
+because the foes appeared on the coast at that same time; for gubat
+signifies enemy. They esteem nobility; and I have known a woman
+called Vray--that is to say, "fine gold"--who had been given that
+name because of the nobility of her lineage. In some of the islands
+they were accustomed to put the head of a new-born child between two
+boards, and thus pressed it so that it would not be round, but long;
+and they also flattened the forehead, in their belief that it was a
+mark of beauty to have it thus. [101] At the birth of a child to one
+among them who is of the highest rank, they hold a festival of a week,
+during which very joyful songs are sung by the women.
+
+They lose courage when they are sick. They do not use either bleeding
+or other remedies, except certain medicinal herbs, of which there is
+abundance in these islands. They use the cupping-glass; but it is not
+made of glass, for there is no glass in that country, but of small
+shells or the small horns of deer. They drink the liquor of cocoanuts
+after it has been kept some time in the evening damp; and that liquor
+is so healthful that their continual use of it keeps them from gravel,
+a disease of which the name is unknown among those peoples.
+
+When anyone dies, the music of the mourning and lamentation begins
+immediately. Some weep because they are truly touched by their loss;
+others are hired by the day to weep. Women are usually chosen, as they
+are most apt for that music. They wash the body of the deceased to that
+sad cadence, and perfume it with storax, and other perfumes which are
+used among them. After bewailing the body for three days, they bury
+it. They do not place it in the earth, but in coffins of very hard
+and incorruptible wood, which they kept in their houses. The boards of
+the coffins are so well joined that the air cannot enter. They placed
+a piece of gold in the mouths of some, and adorned their coffins with
+precious gems. Moreover they were careful to carry all sorts of food
+to their grave, and to leave it there as if it were to be used by the
+deceased. Some they would not allow to go alone, and it was necessary
+to give them some male and female slaves to keep them company. They
+killed the latter after having given them a fine repast, so that they
+might go with the deceased. With one of their chiefs of the country
+they once encased a galley equipped with rowers, so that they could
+serve him in the other world. The most usual place of burial was the
+house of the deceased, in the lowest story, where they dug a hole to
+place the coffin. Sometimes the burial was in the open field; and in
+such case great fires were made below the house, and sentinels were
+posted there, for fear lest the deceased should come to take away
+those who were yet alive. The tears and lamentations were finished
+with the burial; but the feasts and orgies lasted a greater or less
+time, according to the station of the deceased. The Tagals wore black
+as a sign of mourning; the Bisayans wore white, and shaved the head
+and eyebrows. When a person of rank happened to die, silence was
+observed throughout the village, until that the interdict should have
+been removed--which lasted a greater or less time, according to the
+quality of the deceased. During that time not the least noise could
+be made. But the mourning of those who had been killed in war or by
+treachery lasted a longer time, and did not end until their children
+and relations had killed many others--not only those who were known
+as enemies, but even strangers or unknown men; for their fury having
+thus been assuaged, they thought that they could put an end to their
+mourning, and solemnize it by great festivities and prolonged feasting.
+
+They are for the most part good sailors--I mean for the navigation
+among the islands; for, as they do not use the compass, they do not
+get along so well on the open sea. They use various kinds of craft,
+which are propelled by sail and oar. The largest craft of the second
+class are called caracoas. Although these are not very large, they do
+not hesitate to put one hundred Indians in them; for there are three
+banks of rowers on each side. They make use of those craft for trading
+among those islands; and they lade them with dried fish, wine, salt,
+wax, cotton, cocoanuts, and other like merchandise.
+
+They are cowards naturally, and more apt to make an ambuscade than
+to face their enemies. Upon that is chiefly founded their submission
+to the Spaniards, for they do not serve them out of affection.
+
+They readily received our religion. Their meager intelligence does
+not permit them to sound the depths of its mysteries. They also have
+little care in the fulfilment of their duties to the Christianity which
+they have adopted; and it is necessary to constrain them by fear of
+punishment, and to govern them like schoolchildren. Intoxication and
+usury are the two vices to which they are most addicted. The piety
+and care of our religious have not as yet been able to make them lose
+those habits altogether.
+
+The climate of Manila and most of the other Filipinas Islands is very
+warm. The difference between the seasons is not perceived, for the heat
+is equally great all the year. The rains commence at the end of the
+month of May and last for three or four months without interruption;
+but beyond that time it rains but rarely. In the months of October,
+November, and December, the country is subject to hurricanes, which
+the natives of the country call vaguios. They are furious winds which
+make the entire round of the compass in twenty-four hours, commencing
+at the north. They break the palm-trees, uproot the largest trees,
+overthrow the houses, and sometimes carry persons into the air;
+and some have been seen which have hurled vessels a musket-shot inland.
+
+At the extremity of the island of Manila, near the Embocadero, where
+the vessels en route from Nueva Espana enter, there is a volcano or
+mountain whence often issue flames, and always smoke. [102] In those
+islands there is neither grain, wine, nor olive-oil, nor one of the
+fruits which we have in Europa, except the oranges, of which I shall
+speak later. Rice grows there in great abundance, and serves instead
+of bread. They have two kinds of it. One kind is sown in places always
+under water, and the other on the mountains, where it is moistened
+only by the water from the sky. Their drink also is made from rice,
+by soaking it in water; or it is taken from palm-trees, or cocoanuts,
+or from another variety of small palm called nipa. They keep those
+liquors in large crocks, and draw from them only on holidays and
+days of rejoicing. Those liquors mount to the head and intoxicate,
+as much as does the wine of Europa.
+
+The horses and cows in those islands have been carried thither from
+Mexico and China, for there were none there formerly. The flesh of
+swine is their most usual food, and there is a great abundance of it;
+it is very healthful and savory. There are also innumerable fowl,
+deer, wild boars, goats, and civet-cats; also plenty of beans,
+cotton, strawberries, and even cinnamon--which is found only in
+the island of Mindanao, and which does not begin to be as good as
+that of Ceilan. They have no silver mines in those islands, and the
+little silver seen there has been carried from Mexico, in return
+for the merchandise exported there annually. There are gold mines
+in the island of Manila, and on the river of Butuan in the island of
+Mindanao. There is truly not sufficient to satisfy the desires of the
+Spaniards; but the little that there is of it sufficed the Indians,
+who value it only for the little use that they make of it, since it
+does not enter at all into trade. There is a quantity of honey and
+wax in their mountains; and since the Spanish have lived there they
+have built many sugar mills; and sugar is so common there that one may
+buy twenty-five libras of sixteen onzas apiece for one teston. They
+have three varieties of fruit that are most common: bananas, santors,
+and birinbines. [103] There are fifteen or sixteen kinds of bananas,
+some of them are sweet, but that sweetness has an admixture of bitter
+in others. Some of them smell good, but all of those varieties are
+very agreeable to the taste. I know of no fruit in Europa to which
+to compare them, unless it be the musas which grow in Sicilia. The
+birinbines and santors are eaten preserved more often than in any
+other way, because of their tartness; when prepared in preserves,
+they taste like plums. If they are allowed to ripen on the tree,
+they smell like quinces, although they have no other resemblance
+to quinces at all. Those islands have many other trees which grow
+wild. Their mountains furnish them with roots, from which they draw
+their most usual nourishment; these are called pugaian and corot. [104]
+They have other roots which they cultivate, such as the apari, the
+ubi, the laquei, and others which they call camotes, which are the
+potatoes [105] of Espana. The Spaniards use the last named, as also
+do the Indians.
+
+But the most useful tree of all is the palm--not that which bears
+the date, for they do not have that species, but those which bear
+cocoanuts, of the size of an orange. Those nuts are filled with a very
+sweet liquor, which is very good to drink. They make wine, vinegar,
+and honey of it; and when that fruit becomes dry as it ripens, that
+liquor changes into white meat harder than an almond. It is from
+that meat that oil is extracted and a milk resembling that extracted
+from almonds. The cocoanut has two coverings. The first, which is
+less hard, is used for tinder when dried; also for the rigging and
+smaller cordage of the ships, or as tow for calking them. The other
+covering is harder, and is used for drinking vessels, or as dishes
+in which to prepare their food. The palm-leaves are the tiles with
+which their houses are thatched. The trunks of the same trees are
+used to support the houses, and in making the pillars. They have one
+other tree which is no less useful to them, for it serves them as a
+perpetual spring, and furnishes water to an entire village--which,
+being located on a very high and dry site, has no other water than
+what they get from that tree by making incisions in its trunk, and
+in its largest branches; for a clear sweet water flows out of it. The
+trees of those islands are always green, and there are only two species
+that shed their leaves, one called batelan, [106] and the other dabdas.
+
+The reeds [i.e., bamboos] of those islands have the following
+peculiarity, namely, that they are as much as three palmos
+in circumference and eight brazas in length. They are used as
+the materials out of which to build a whole house. The pillars,
+the lintels, the stairs, the floors, and the walls are made from
+them. They are used as rafters for the roof, and split into several
+parts, as tiles for covering the roof. They have no other saucepans in
+which to cook their food than those reeds, and no other wood to burn;
+for the trees serve them as material with which to build their little
+boats--or rather, rafts--with which they carry for traffic their rice,
+cocoanuts, and abaca, the hemp of that country.
+
+Those islands have a great abundance of various kinds of oranges,
+peculiar to those countries for their good taste. I have seen them so
+large that they were four palmos in circumference. Some were red as
+scarlet inside, and very sweet. There are some which contain another
+little orange in the place of the seeds; and these are called on that
+account "oranges which have children." [107]
+
+I will place in the list of vegetables a sort of leaf which serves
+them for nourishment, or rather for refreshment. It is used very
+commonly among the Indians, both Christians and Mahometans, and even
+among the Spaniards. A mixture is made of it which is called mamuen,
+into which three things enter: one is this leaf, which is called buio,
+which is smooth, and resembles in color and size a large ivy leaf,
+but it is not so thick. It smells very good, and is aromatic. It is
+planted under some dry tree, on which it climbs. The other fruit that
+enters into that mixture is called bonga, and it is as large as an
+olive. Lastly, they mix in a small quantity of quicklime. A little
+cornucopia is made of the leaf, the bonga and lime are placed inside,
+and it is all chewed together. That mixture colors the saliva as red
+as blood, and the lips the most beautiful vermilion ever seen. It
+preserves the teeth, strengthens the stomach, and produces a very
+good breath. Eighty of those leaves can be bought at Manila for one
+real. Nevertheless, so great a quantity is consumed that it has been
+ascertained that it was sold in one year to the amount of ninety
+thousand reals, of seven and one-half sols apiece.
+
+There are many snakes in those islands, which are very dangerous;
+some of them, when they have young, attack people. [108] The bite of
+those called omodro is very dangerous, and those who are bitten by
+it do not live one-half day. It is from that effect that it derives
+its name, for odro signifies one-half day. There is another very
+large snake called saua. I have killed one of that species which was
+two and one-half brazas long. The skin of another, which measured
+thirty-two [Spanish] feet in length, was brought to our residence
+at Manila. The sauas hang to the branches of trees along the roads,
+whence they dart down upon people, or deer, or on any other prey. They
+wind themselves three or four times around the body, and after having
+broken the creature's bones devour it. But God has provided a number
+of herbs in those islands which are used as antidotes to all kinds of
+poisons. Roots and herbs are found in the mountains, which are so many
+specific remedies against snake-bites; the chief ones are manongal,
+manambo, logab, boroctongon, maglingab, ordag, balucas, bonas, bahay,
+igluhat, dalogdogan, mantala.
+
+There are also animals in those islands of which I ought to give
+a description. The civet-cat is found in the mountains. Its skin
+resembles that of a tiger, and it is no less savage than the tiger,
+although much smaller. It is captured and bound, and, after its civet
+is obtained, which is contained in a little pouch under its tail,
+it is set at liberty to be caught once more. The crocodiles, of which
+their rivers are full, are so huge that when their jaws are open, a
+man of the largest size could stand upright between the two jaws. The
+crocodile is quite covered with scales; has scarcely any tongue; and
+its teeth are set closely together, and are very sharp, and arranged
+in several rows. The teeth of the middle lower row fit into holes
+or breaks in the others which correspond to them in the upper jaw;
+and consequently, when it seizes its prey, there is no force that
+can make it let go. It lays a great number of eggs. In the water
+it is furious, and attacks boats. It is not so greatly feared when
+ashore--where it goes sometimes to seize some prey, or to sun itself.
+
+The woman-fish [109] is so called because its face and breast are
+quite like those of women, whom it also resembles in its manner of
+copulation with the male. That fish is as large as a calf, and its
+flesh, of which I have eaten, tastes like beef. It is caught with lines
+as thick around as the finger, and when the line becomes fast within
+[its mouth] it is killed by javelin-thrusts. Its bones and teeth have
+great virtue against all sorts of dysentery, especially against bloody
+discharges. Some have tried to assert that those fish were the sirens
+of the sea, so celebrated among the poets; but they have nothing of
+the beauty of face and of the voice that is attributed to sirens.
+
+I will end [this account], finally by a description of the tabon, an
+ashen-colored bird as large as a hen, which lays eggs three times as
+large as those of hens, but which lays them in a peculiar manner. It
+chooses desert islands and those full of sand, where it first makes
+a hole one or one and one-half brazas deep; and after having laid its
+eggs, it covers them over with sand. The chicks break the shell, and
+gradually turn up the sand that covers them with their feet. If any
+of those chicks is so unfortunate as to break the egg at the lower
+end, it does not succeed so well, and dies for lack of strength to
+overturn the sand. Sometimes one hundred and fifty of the eggs are
+found in the same hole. I have eaten those eggs often when I have
+had occasion to stop at those islands during my voyages.
+
+There is cinnamon in the island of Mindanao; and pepper at Patani,
+and at Champan, a country lying on the mainland of China.
+
+The political government of those islands is the same as that of other
+provinces subject to the crown of Castilla. The governor resides at
+Manila, and is president of the Audiencia; while, as captain-general,
+he has charge of all the posts of peace and war, as well as of the
+encomiendas of one or two thousand Indians [each], who pay their
+encomendero the tribute that the other Indians pay to the king. But the
+encomendero who has been appointed by the captain-general is obliged
+to get the confirmation of his grant from Madrid within three years.
+
+The governor establishes the corregidors and alcaldes-mayor, or
+governors of the provinces into which these islands are divided. He
+appoints the captains and the admirals of the fleets which sail to
+Acapulco and Terrenate annually. He takes cognizance of civil affairs,
+on which the royal Audiencia pronounces the decisions or decrees. That
+Audiencia is composed of a president (who is always the governor), four
+oidores or auditors, and one procurator-fiscal. There are four cities
+in the Filipinas--Manila, Zebu, [Nueva] Cacares, and Nueba Segovia;
+and one town, called Arevalo. There is a garrison at Manila and at
+Cabite, which is the port where the warships enter, six miles from
+Manila. There are also garrisons at Zebu, Otong, Carouga, Lanbuangang
+[sc. Zamboanga], Jolo, Nueva Segobia, the island of Hermosa, and
+the Malucas. All those ports are fortified, and have their redoubts
+mounted with artillery. Whatever is necessary for those garrisons is
+sent from Manila. It would be a very difficult task to mention the
+names of all the different peoples among the Indians, and in those
+islands, who are subject to the king of Espana. There are fully three
+hundred thousand families, who might count one million souls.
+
+The archbishop of Manila has three suffragans, those of Zebu,
+[Nueva] Cacares, and Nueva Segovia. They have no other income than
+what the king gives them; that of the archbishop is three thousand
+ducados, while each of his suffragans receives one thousand five
+hundred. The city of Manila is small, but it is beautiful and well
+fortified. Its houses are all built of stone, and are spacious,
+and very airy. Its streets are long and straight, and one may walk
+in the shade all hours of the day. The churches are beautiful. There
+are five convents: that of the Augustinians (which is the oldest);
+that of the Franciscans, that of the Dominicans, [110] and that
+of the discalced Augustinians. There are two universities, one in
+charge of the fathers of St. Dominic, and the other in that of the
+Society. Those religious are also distributed among the islands,
+where they have charge of the instruction of the Indians. The city is
+enclosed by a fine wall and moat; and its redoubt and its ramparts
+are well garrisoned with artillery. At the foot of its wall flows a
+river, which is navigable; over this is a wooden bridge, with stone
+pillars. There are two thousand Spaniards in Manila (counting soldiers
+and inhabitants), and twice as many Indians. There are also twenty
+thousand Sangleys or Chinese, who practice all the arts needed in
+a community; and every year they pay nine escudos and six reals of
+tribute. Galleons much larger than those which sail the Mediterranean
+are built at Manila; for there is a great abundance of wood, pitch,
+and abaca--which resembles European hemp, and of which good rigging
+is made for the ships. The anchors are imported from Goa; and the iron
+for the nails comes from China in little bars, and is very serviceable.
+
+The Spaniards of the Manilas trade throughout the islands of that
+archipelago, at Borney and Camboa, whence they carry wax, butter,
+camanguien or storax, ivory, and bezoar. They formerly traded in Japon,
+before the persecution of the Christians was begun. Thence were carried
+iron, flour, all sorts of fruit, and little boxes, and cabinets,
+varnished [i.e., lacquered] and very well made. Nangoza [sc. Nagasaki],
+which was the port where that trading took place--and for which it was
+very suitable, because it is not distant from Manila--is now closed
+to us; for the emperor of Japon believes that people are entering his
+country, under pretext of that trade, to preach the gospel, the thing
+that he fears most of all. We trade also with the Portuguese of Macao,
+who come to the Manilas every year with two or three ships, and bring
+here silks, musk, precious stones, and eagle and calambac wood--which
+is a sweet-scented wood that is very valuable. The inhabitants of the
+Manilas also go to Macao sometimes, to carry their merchandise there;
+but their chief trade is with the Chinese, who come annually, at the
+end of the month of December and the beginning of January, with twenty
+or thirty vessels, laden with products and valuable merchandise. They
+sail usually from Ocho and Chincheo, ports of Anay, a province of China
+which faces the Filipinas. They carry small oranges, nuts, chestnuts,
+plums, raisins, and chicuei--a fruit resembling an apple, very round,
+transparent, and, when it is ripe, having the color of yellow amber;
+its peel is very loose, and its flesh very sweet and very pleasant
+to the taste. [111] They also bring all sorts of cloth stuffs, and
+some of these are as fine as those which come from France and the
+Low Countries; and many black stuffs of which the Indians make their
+clothes. They bring silk, plain and twisted, of all colors; damasks,
+velvets, tabbies, and double taffetas; cloths of gold and silver,
+galoons, and laces; coverlets, and cushions; and porcelain--although
+not the finest variety, as the trade in that is prohibited. They bring
+pearls and gold; iron, in little bars; thread, musk, and fine parasols;
+paste gems, but very beautiful to look at; saltpetre, and flour;
+white and various-colored paper; and many little fancy articles,
+covered with varnish, and gold in relief, made in an inimitable
+manner. Among all the silk stuffs brought by the Chinese, none is
+more esteemed than the white--the snow is not whiter; and there is
+no silk stuff in Europa that can approach it.
+
+The Chinese return in the month of March, and carry to China silver
+in return for their merchandise. They also take a wood called
+sibueno [112]--that is, brazil-wood, which is used in making their
+ink. Those Chinese merchants are so keen after gain that if one sort
+of merchandise has succeeded well one year, they take a great deal
+of it the following year. A Spaniard who had lost his nose through a
+certain illness, sent for a Chinese to make him one of wood, in order
+to hide the deformity. The workman made him so good a nose that the
+Spaniard, in great delight, paid him munificently, giving him twenty
+escudos. The Chinese, attracted by the ease with which he had made
+that gain, laded a fine boatload of wooden noses the following year,
+and returned to Manila. But he found himself very far from his hopes,
+and quite left out in the cold; [113] for in order to have a sale
+for that new merchandise, he found that he would have to cut off the
+noses of all the Spaniards in the country.
+
+Besides the Chinese merchandise that is brought into the islands,
+there is wax, cinnamon, civet, and a sort of very strong cotton cloth
+which is called campotes [misprint for lampotes]. All those goods are
+exported to Mexico, where they are sold at great profit, and on the
+spot. I do not believe there is a richer traffic in the world than
+that. The duties that the king gets out of it are large, and, with
+what he gets from the islands, amount to fully five hundred thousand
+escudos. But he spends eight hundred thousand in the maintenance of
+his governor, the counselors, the archbishop, the bishops, the canons,
+those who possess the prebends, and the other ecclesiastics. The
+greater part of that sum is employed in the equipment of the galleons
+that are sent to Mexico and to the Malucas, and of those which are kept
+in those seas to resist the Dutch. A considerable sum is spent on the
+maintenance of alliance with the kings of those districts--especially
+with the king of one of the Malucas, called Tidore. Consequently,
+the king of Espana rather holds those islands for the conservation
+there of the faith, as was stated by Felipe the Second in a certain
+council-meeting, than for the profit that is derived from them to this
+hour. The Dutch have been unable to get a footing on those islands,
+although they have attacked them many times. They have a considerable
+city [i.e., Batavia] on the island of Java Major, whence they send
+what their garrisons at the island of Hermosa, Amboina, and Terrenate
+need. They have made an alliance with the inhabitants of that island,
+and they secure the greater part of the cloves of the Malucas. They
+trade in Japon, in a port called Firando. The Chinese have refused
+to have trade with them, because of a tradition current in China,
+that blue-eyed men will some day conquer them.
+
+The voyage from Manila to Mexico lasts four, five, six, or seven
+months. Manila, which lies in thirteen and one-half degrees, is left
+in the month of July, during the vendavals. The course is taken to
+the north, until the ship reaches thirty-eight or forty degrees. The
+pilots take that course because they are more certain of finding
+winds; for otherwise they would run the risk of encountering calms,
+which are more to be dreaded in long voyages than are the most furious
+gales. From the time that the Filipinas are left until almost the coast
+of Nueva Espana is reached, no land is seen, except a chain of islands
+called the Ladrones, or La Sapana, [114] which lie three hundred
+leguas from the Embocadero of the Filipinas. The people who inhabit
+those islands are barbarians, who go quite naked. When our vessels
+pass there, those people carry to them fish, rice, and fresh water,
+which they exchange for neither gold nor silver, but only for iron,
+which they value much more, because of the use to which they put it in
+the manufacture of their tools, and for the building of their little
+boats. The first land sighted after that is the island of Cedros,
+quite near the Mexican coast. The open expanse between that island
+and those of the Ladrones is subject to great storms, which are to
+be feared especially near the Japanese Islands--which are passed,
+however, without being sighted. During the whole course of so long
+a voyage, scarcely a day passes without seeing a bird. There are
+usually some birds that live in the sea, and many large whales and
+porpoises are seen.
+
+As the [American] coast is neared, at a distance of sixty, eighty,
+or one hundred leguas signs are to be seen in the sea by which it is
+recognized that the ship is within that distance. Those signs consist
+of long reeds, brought down by the rivers of Nueva Espana, which being
+massed together resemble a kind of raft; and on those reeds are to be
+seen monkeys--another sign that they are approaching the coast. When
+the pilot discovers those signs, he immediately changes his course,
+and instead of continuing east he puts the nose of the ship south,
+in order to avoid getting caught in the land, or in some gulf whence
+he would have a hard time to get out; but, when he has sighted the
+coast of Nueva Espana, he follows it to the port of Acapulco, which
+lies in eighteen degrees.
+
+Acapulco is a fine port, well sheltered from all the winds, and
+defended by a celebrated redoubt. There the passengers and goods are
+disembarked, and are afterward carried by mules to the City of Mexico,
+which is eighty leguas distant thence. The way is desert and bestrewn
+with mountains; and the pest of mosquitoes is suffered, as well as the
+extreme heat. In order to go to Espana from Mexico one goes to the port
+of Vera Cruz, a journey of eighty-five leguas; en route is passed the
+city of Los Angeles, which has about six thousand inhabitants, and
+whose bishop gets a salary of sixty thousand escudos. The reefs and
+rocks at the mouth of the port of Vera Cruz defend the entrance better
+than the fortress that commands it, although that fort is an excellent
+one. At that port anchor the trading fleets that come from Espana,
+laden with wine, olive-oil, cloths, wax, cinnamon, paper, and other
+European merchandise. Those trading fleets formerly passed the winter
+there, as they arrived [formerly] in the month of June, and remained
+there until the same month of the following year. Now they reach that
+port in the month of May, and leave about the month of August. They
+take as a rule three months to go to Espana. For my part, I took
+one hundred days in making that voyage. The port of Havana in Cuba,
+which is the best port of the Western Indias--and which is very safe,
+and defended by three redoubts--is touched at. There the two trading
+fleets--that of Mexico and that of Tierrafirme--are united with the
+galleons. Thence, after having coasted along the shores of Florida,
+and of Nueva Francia, they make the cape of Fineterre [Finisterre]
+or San Vincent, in order to lay their course toward Cadiz, which is
+the end of their voyage. That will also be the end of this relation,
+which I have written in order to be obedient to a person to whom I
+earnestly desire that it may prove agreeable.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+BIBLIOGRAPHICAL DATA
+
+
+The following documents are obtained from MSS. in the Academia Real
+de la Historia, Madrid--in the collection "Papeles de los Jesuitas:"
+
+1. Events in Filipinas, 1637-38.--In tomo 84, no. 35.
+
+2. Fortunate successes, 1636-37.--In tomo 32, no. 17.
+
+3. Events in Filipinas, 1638-39.--In tomo 4, no. 34, fol. 268.
+
+The following documents are obtained from the Archivo general de
+Indias, Sevilla:
+
+4. Letter from Corcuera.--"Simancas--Secular; Audiencia de Filipinas;
+cartas y espedientes del gobernador de Filipinas vistos en el Consejo;
+anos 1629 a 1640; est. 67, caj. 6, leg. 8."
+
+5. Letter from treasurer.--The same as No. 4.
+
+6. The university of Santo Tomas.--"Audiencia de Filipinas; registro
+de oficio; reales ordenes dirigidas a las autoridades y particulares
+del distrito de la Audiencia; anos 1605 a 1645; est. 105, caj. 2,
+leg. 12." (In this same legajo may be found two of the decrees of
+1638, those of November 8 and December 8; and that of October 3,
+1639, has the same pressmark, save "leg. 2, lib. 4.")
+
+The following documents are obtained from the "Cedulario Indico,"
+in the Archivo Historico Nacional, Madrid:
+
+7. Decrees, 1638.--The first four, in "tomo 39, fol. 235b, 225b, 262,
+and 267," respectively; (the fifth and sixth, see No. 6, ante;) the
+seventh, in "tomo xxxi, fol. 144b;" the eighth, in "tomo 7, fol. 352b."
+
+8. Decrees, 1639.--In the same order as printed, these are found
+as follows: In "tomo 39, fol. 276b; tomo xviii, fol. 55; tomo 39,
+fol. 281; tomo 31, fol. 142b; tomo 39, fol. 285b and 285; tomo 2,
+fol. 315b;" (for October 3, see No. 6, ante;) "tomo 39, fol. 290b
+and 290."
+
+The following documents are obtained from the Ventura del Arco
+MSS. (Ayer library), vol. ii:
+
+9. Events in the Filipinas, 1639-40.--Pp. 167-184.
+
+10. Relation of the Chinese insurrection.--Pp. 185-250.
+
+The following document is obtained from a rare printed pamphlet in
+the Museo-Biblioteca de Ultramar, Madrid:
+
+11. Glorious victories against Moros.--Part of this is synopsized in
+translation. The pamphlet is designated in the Museo-Biblioteca by
+the number "111, 21-2a."
+
+The following document is obtained from a MS. volume in the possession
+of Edward E. Ayer, Chicago; the volume is undated, but is supposed
+to be written in 1835, and is entitled, Demostracion historica de
+cuantas depredaciones llevan cometidas las Moros, etc.:
+
+12. Letters to Misericordia.--In fol. 6b, 7, and 8.
+
+The following documents are taken from printed works:
+
+13. Relation by Banuelos y Carrillo.--From Thevenot's Relations de
+divers voyages curieux (Paris, M.DC.XCVI), tomo i, part ii; from a
+copy belonging to the Prescott Collection in the library of Harvard
+University. (The original printed pamphlet by Banuelos y Carrillo is
+supposed to be no longer extant.)
+
+14. Value of Corcuera's seizures.--From Pastells' edition of Colin's
+Labor evangelica, iii, pp. 528-533.
+
+15. Ecclesiastical and Augustinian affairs.--From Casimiro Diaz's
+Conquistas, pp. 267-444.
+
+16. Relation of the Filipinas Islands, by a religious.--The same as
+No. 13.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+NOTES
+
+
+[1] Spanish, buenas collas de bendabales. In August the prevailing
+winds at Manila are from the southwest, the vendavals. It often happens
+that in the months of June and July there develop in northern Luzon
+centers of minimum pressure so slowly that they appear to remain
+stationary for many days, followed, as is natural, by continuous
+currents and showers of rain from the third quadrant, known by
+the native-born residents as "collas" (Report of U. S. Philippine
+Commission, 1900, iv, pp. 229, 236; this chapter is furnished by the
+Jesuit fathers in charge of the Manila Observatory).
+
+[2] Juan Zubelzu, a native of Biscay, and a novice in the Dominican
+convent at Mexico, came to the Philippine Islands in the mission of
+1615. After his ordination, he ministered to the Indians in Bataan,
+and in Cavite and Manila--where he died, December 14, 1657. He built
+a stone church in Samal, for which, it is remarked, he did not harass
+the Indians, although they were few in number. (Resena biografica,
+i, p. 350.)
+
+[3] "Son of the devil, scourge of God, and other similar things."
+
+[4] Spanish, padres barbados; also known as Barbones, from their
+practice of wearing long beards; they came in 1635, with Corcuera,
+headed by Collado, and formed the congregation of San Pablo (for
+mission work only), by "warrants fraudulently obtained." A royal decree
+of February 21, 1637, commanded the Dominican provincial at Manila
+to suppress the Barbones; it is the execution of this decree which
+is described in our text. See Resena biografica, i. pp. 338, 391, 420.
+
+[5] This statement about the Sangleys is printed by Barrantes
+as a postscript to Lopez's letter of July 23, 1637 (q.v.,
+VOL. XXVII). Internal evidence indicates Juan Lopez as the author of
+the present document, and that it was written at Cavite, where Lopez
+was in charge of the Jesuit house.
+
+[6] Melchor de Vera was born in Madrid about 1585, and entered the
+Jesuit order at the age of nineteen. Two years later, he departed
+for the Philippine mission, and after his ordination labored in the
+missions of Visayas and Mindanao. He was for a time minister of Manila
+college, and afterward rector of Carigara, and superior at Dapitan and
+Zamboanga. He was well versed in architecture and military defense,
+and several forts were built (especially that at Zamboanga) under
+his direction. He died at Cebu, April 13, 1646. See Murillo Velarde's
+Hist. Philipinas, fol. 153 verso; and Combes's Hist. Mindanao.
+
+[7] Fernando de Estrada, a native of Ecija, Spain, was a missionary
+among the Bisayans and Tagals, and at Ternate. He died at Manila in
+1646, at the age of forty-five. See Murillo Velarde's Hist. Philipinas,
+fol. 193 verso.
+
+[8] Charles I sought at various times to play Spain against France,
+but his Spanish policy was, on the whole, a failure.
+
+[9] Morabites: the name of a Mahometan sect, founded by the son-in-law
+of Mahomet. The name was also used among Mahometans to indicate a
+wise man or a mystic.
+
+[10] Antonio Francisco Cardim was born at Viana, Portugal, in 1596,
+and entered the Jesuit order in February, 1611. Seven years later
+he went to India, and labored in Japan, China, and other countries
+until his death--which occurred at Macao, April 30, 1659. Sommervogel
+describes several missionary reports and other writings by Cardim.
+
+[11] That is, the small amount of their returns from Mexico prevented
+the Manila merchants from making their usual large purchases from the
+Chinese traders, and it was feared that the latter would not think
+it worth while to bring their goods to Manila.
+
+[12] This was Tsongching (VOL. XXII, p. 197, and note 44), the last
+emperor of the Ming dynasty; he was favorable to the Jesuits, but can
+hardly be called a convert to the Christian faith. By "Father Pablo"
+is probably meant Paul Siu (or Sin, according to Cretineau-Joly),
+a Chinese official of high standing, who was converted by Father
+Ricci, and served as an evangelist among his people, besides aiding
+the missionaries with gifts and his influence at court, and revising
+their writings in Chinese. See Cretineau-Joly's Hist. Comp. de Jesus,
+iii, p. 172; and Williams's Middle Kingdom, ii, pp. 302, 304.
+
+[13] A marginal note reads: "Translated from the Spanish relation
+printed at Mexico in the year 1638; dedicated to Don Garcia de Haro
+y Abellaneda, count of Castilla, president of the royal Council of
+the Indias."
+
+[14] Marginal note: "The rules of this traffic, which will be found at
+the end of the relations of the Filipinas, elucidate this point." This
+evidently refers to the Spanish originals.
+
+The "list of relations and voyages" at the beginning of Thevenot's work
+contains this title: "Three relations of the Philippine Islands, with a
+large map of China," etc. To correspond with this, the text contains:
+the "Relation" of Banuelos y Carrillo; the "Relation and memorial"
+by Hernando de los Rios Coronel; and a "Memorial in behalf of the
+commerce of the Philipine Islands," by Juan Grau y Monfalcon--all
+with consecutive pagination; and apparently abridged or paraphrased
+to suit the editor. These are followed by (Bobadilla's) "Relation
+of the Philipine Islands," and an "Account of the great island of
+Mindanao" (which contains a letter by Mastrilli)--also with their own
+and consecutive pagination; these, however, are not mentioned in the
+list above referred to. We translate from Thevenot the documents by
+Banuelos and Bobadilla; but for the others we have recourse to the
+Spanish originals.
+
+[15] Lope Diaz de Armendariz, marquis of Cadereita, the sixteenth
+viceroy of Mexico, was appointed (1635) to succeed the marquis
+of Cerralvo (who was removed at his own request, because of poor
+health). His term of office was quiet, and only marked especially by
+his quarrel with the archbishop, with whom the royal Audiencia seem
+to have sided. He was removed in 1640, his successor being Diego
+Lopez Pacheco Cabrera y Bobadilla, duke of Escalona and marquis de
+Villena. See Bancroft's Hist. Mexico, iii, pp. 93-98.
+
+[16] Marginal note: "Bartolome Tenorione."
+
+[17] The following letter from the Sevilla archives ("Cartas y
+espedientes del gobernador de Filipinas vistos en el Consejo; anos
+1629 a [1640]; est. 67, caj. 6, leg. 8"), contains an interesting
+reference to Banuelos's relation, and also suggests the well-known
+deficiencies in Thevenot's "translations." It is to be feared that
+he has omitted much valuable matter from Banuelos's account; but no
+other source is available:
+
+"I return the paper which your Lordship sent me, concerning the
+military exploit in Mindanao, which was written and sent, as appears,
+by Father Marcelo Mastrili. Although its contents must be true, and
+it is well written, yet as your Lordship knows, the Council thought
+it advisable not to have it printed until they could compare it with
+the letters that the governor had written about the same exploit,
+and with others written by various persons, which make it out to have
+been of little value and importance. They even attempt to say that
+we have lost rather than gained in that campaign--particularly in a
+discourse or treatise printed in Mexico by Don Geronimo de Banuelos
+y Carrillo, and addressed to your Lordship. In it he declares that
+those who were conquered were not Moros, but certain poor Indians;
+I do not know whether [he says this] from zeal for the truth, or
+because he has little affection for the governor. He wounds him quite
+to the quick in this and in other things. I was making an abstract of
+them in order to report to the Council, as I was ordered; but today,
+on going out, Don Juan Grao Monfalcon told me that he is at present
+printing another report, to oppose that of Banuelos. I do not know who
+has given permission for it, nor that, in the care of the relation of
+Father Mastrili, there is anything that is not well understood. What
+the Council discussed was (as I have said), only whether it is exact
+and faithful to what happened; and of this I have not yet been able
+to form a sufficient judgment or idea. I am getting new documents
+hourly from the secretary's office, and I shall detain them until
+the one that I am now enclosing is returned, if convenient. May God
+preserve your Lordship, as we your servants desire. Today, Tuesday,
+February eight, one thousand six hundred and thirty-nine.
+
+
+Don Juan de Solorzano Pereira"
+
+"The count, my master, has ordered me to send again to your Lordship
+the enclosed relation of his success from the governor of Filipinas,
+in order that there may be progress in the deliberations of the Council
+on this question. May God preserve your Lordship, as I desire. Buen
+Retiro, February 16, 639.
+
+Antonio Carnero"
+
+
+"I return these papers to your Grace, so that you may continue what you
+were doing. May God preserve your Grace. My house, February 16, 1639."
+
+[18] Referring to Sebastian Vizcaino (VOL. XIV, p. 183). The Englishman
+here referred to is doubtless Will Adams (VOL. XXII, p. 169, note 39),
+then high in favor with Iyeyasu. Regarding the expulsion of religious
+at that time, see VOL. XVIII, p. 81.
+
+[19] A marginal note reads as follows: "Ricca douro is an island which
+was discovered by a vessel from Macao. They landed there in order to
+repair their galley fireplace, and a week later they perceived that
+that earth had been converted into plates of gold. I suffered a violent
+tempest in the latitude of that island, as the maps show it; and there
+are few vessels that sail in that latitude, without having trouble."
+
+See also notes in VOL. XIV of this series, p. 183; and VOL. XVI,
+p. 204.
+
+[20] In the margin is the following note: "Tono in the Japanese
+language signifies a person who holds the rank that a duke of Cardone
+or a marquis of Carpio would have in Espana." This means a daimio,
+or feudal lord (see VOL. XVIII, p. 216).
+
+[21] Following is a translation of the title-page of the book from
+which this account is taken: "Relation of the glorious victories on
+land and sea won by the arms of our invincible king and monarch, Felipe
+IIII, the Great, in the Filipinas Islands against the Mahometan Moros
+of the island of Mindanao and their king Cachil Corralat, under the
+leadership of Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera, knight of the Order
+of Alcantara and one of his Majesty's Council of War, and governor
+and captain-general of those islands: drawn from various relations
+sent from Manila during this year (1638). 1638. With license. Mexico;
+at the press of Pedro de Quinones, opposite the Professed House."
+
+[22] Tulio (misprinted Fulio), for Tullius (Cicero). Apparently there
+is some error in the reference given in the text, for this citation
+from Cicero is not found in the place indicated by it, in the standard
+editions of his Epistolae.
+
+[23] Attached to the editions of Quintilian's works are 164
+Declamations, which remain out of a collection consisting originally
+of 388 of these compositions. It is supposed, however, that these
+were written by various persons, at different periods of time.
+
+[24] "It is believed that the number of islands exceeds 1,400, although
+thus far no one has stated their number with exactness." (Archipielago
+filipino, p. 6.) The latest information (Census of the Philippine
+Islands, Washington, 1905, i, p. 185), gives the total number of
+islands, however, as not less than 3,141, although the exact number
+is still unknown.
+
+[25] This is the literal translation; but it will be remembered,
+from previous accounts, that the figure of Christ here referred to
+was painted on a sheet of linen or cloth; it was this sheet which
+was used by the Moro as a garment.
+
+[26] Camaras were tubes or cylinders which received the charge and
+were introduced into the breech of the cannon, sometimes fitted by
+pressure, at other times by screwing (see Diego Ufano's Treatise on
+military; Brussels, 1617). Some of the ancient pieces of ordnance
+had these spare chambers, so that, after a charge had been fired, the
+chamber could be changed and operations carried on more rapidly. Thus
+they served as do the cartridges of modern breech-loading guns. Some
+camaras were used independently of the cannon, for firing salutes. See
+Stanley's Vasco da Gama (Hakluyt Society publications, London, 1869)
+pp. 226, 227, note.
+
+[27] Tawi Tawi is the largest island of a group having the same name,
+in the extreme southwest of the Philippine Archipelago, nearly 700
+miles distant from Manila. It contains over 100 islands, mostly
+very small; but five of these contain ten or more square miles of
+area. The island Tawi Tawi contains 187 square miles; its surface
+is one of fertile plains interspersed with forests, and broken by
+five peaks ranging from 736 to 1,941 feet in height. The islands
+are thinly populated (estimated at 1,815 fighting men) by Malayan
+tribes supposed to have migrated thither from Borneo--the Suluanos,
+Camucones, and Tirones. Navigation among the islands is difficult
+and dangerous, except for the small, light native craft; and they
+have been the hiding-places of pirates from the earliest times.
+
+[28] Referring to Captain Gines Ros y Aviles, who had been left by
+Corcuera as governor of Jolo. Combes gives a detailed account of
+all this affair (Hist. Mindanao, Retana's ed., col. 369-395). Ros
+applied himself, after Corcuera's departure, to the profits of trade,
+and was deceived by the Moros, who pretended submission but planned
+to surprise and kill all the Spaniards. The officer next in command,
+Gaspar de Morales, with the two Jesuits, finding their warnings
+unheeded, sent word to the governor's lieutenant at Zamboanga, Pedro
+de Almonte--who immediately went to Jolo, again subdued that island,
+and placed Morales in Ros's post as governor. Cf. La Concepcion's
+account, Hist. Philipinas, v, pp. 348-359, 412-427.
+
+[29] A village in Laguna, Luzon, on the southwest shore of Laguna
+de Bay.
+
+[30] The two Jesuits who remained in Jolo as missionaries, Fathers
+Alejandro Lopez and Francisco Martinez.
+
+[31] "Of these [Sangleys] several champan-crews armed themselves to
+infest the seas; and, occupying the narrow passages of Marivelez,
+they captured various vessels which came from Bisayas and other
+provinces to trade.... Armed ships were despatched against them from
+Manila, and, despite their resistance, several of their champans were
+seized; and the pirates were punished with death, as their insolence
+deserved--several of them being baptized, by dint of exhortations,
+just before their torture." (La Concepcion, Hist. Philipinas, v,
+pp. 429-431). One of these "rigorous modes of punishment" is mentioned
+post, on p. 226--that of tearing away the flesh with pincers.
+
+[32] Probably referring to the revolt of the Caragas, 1629-31, and
+their murder of several Recollect missionaries at Tandag.
+
+[33] Combes describes very fully this and another Spanish expedition
+into the region of Lake Lanao in 1639; and "a third and last one,"
+which was unsuccessful, and compelled the Spaniards to retreat,
+in 1640. See his Hist. Mindanao (Retana's ed.), col. 145-177.
+
+[34] Referring to the injury sustained by this chief in the explosion
+of a mine at the siege of Jolo; it is described by Lopez in his
+chronicle for 1637-38 ante, pp. 44, 45.
+
+[35] See Combes's description of Lake Lanao (Hist. Mindanao, Retana's
+ed., col. 145-147); lanao means simply "lake," and malanao, "people
+of the lake." Cf. A. H. S. Landor's description--in Gems of the East
+(New York and London, 1904), pp. 303-308--of the lake legion and
+its people. In 1902 the American military authorities constructed
+excellent highways from the seacoast to Lake Lanao, from Malabang on
+the south to Iligan on the north. A description of this work, with
+valuable observations on the character and habits of the Malanao Moros,
+appears in the Atlantic Monthly for December, 1903, from the pen of
+Major R. L. Bullard, U. S. A., who directed the building of one of
+these roads. The Malanaos were never conquered by the Spaniards or
+any other people. The present district of Lanao contains part of the
+Rangaya range of mountains, 5,000 to 8,500 feet in height; and its
+eastern part is traversed by the Pulangui River (Rio Grande). The
+lake is twenty-two miles long and sixteen miles wide, and its outlet
+is Iligan River.
+
+[36] Apparently referring to the boat which carried passengers from
+Manila to the port of Cavite.
+
+[37] Also Zarpana, the modern Rota. Uan apparently means the present
+Guam. The place where the ship was wrecked was, according to Diaz
+(Conquistas, p. 402), the island of Seypan.
+
+[38] Diaz states (Conquistas, p. 402) that this galleon ("Nuestra
+Senora de la Concepcion") was "the largest one built up to that time,"
+and that it contained the greatest wealth of the islands. The few
+men who escaped to land were afterward rescued by Spanish ships, and
+taken back to Manila--save one, a Chinese blacksmith, who spent the
+rest of his life there and acquired great influence over the natives.
+
+[39] La Concepcion states (Hist. Philipinas, v, p. 351) that
+when Corcuera returned to Manila in triumph, the Confraternity of
+La Misericordia gave him 100,000 pesos from its treasury, for the
+expenses of the Jolo campaign.
+
+"For Governor Corcuera to secure, even in part, the successful result
+that he desired in this conquest, he was obliged to resort, for the
+necessary succor, to the treasury of Santa Misericordia; for in this
+emergency he found closed on all sides the gates of resource for the
+accomplishment of his so laudable designs. He found this aid, as prompt
+as liberal, in the sum of 104,609 pesos, two tomins, and one grano,
+which the brethren carried to him at the royal offices, as a loan,
+to aid his needs and enable him to push forward this conquest, which
+depended on such aid." This statement is taken from the Demostracion
+historica (MS. in Ayer library; see following note), fol. 7 verso.
+
+[40] These two letters are obtained from a MS. volume in the library
+of Edward E. Ayer, of Chicago, entitled: Demostracion historica
+de cuantas depredaciones llevan cometidas las Moros desde que se
+incorporaron estas Yslas a la Monarquia Espanola; inedidas de toda
+especie tomadas por el Gobierno para contenerlos; y indicasiones que
+se presentan para hacerles la guerra con mejor fruto que hasta aqui,
+a fin de que las Visayas se vean libres de las continuas opresiones
+qe. sufren--"Historical exposition of the many depredations which
+the Moros have committed, from the time when these islands were
+incorporated with the Spanish monarchy; the measures, of all kinds,
+taken by the government for curbing them; and indications that
+suggest how war may be waged upon them with better results than have
+hitherto been secured, to the end that the Visayas may be freed from
+the continual cruelties that they suffer." This work (evidently
+intended for publication) is undated; but the conjectural date
+"1835?" appears on the fly-leaf, which is headed "1a. Parte." As
+appears by the introduction to the book, it was written by one of
+the members of the Sociedad Economica of the Philippines--founded
+by Basco y Vargas in 1780, and reestablished by Folguera in 1819;
+and his "only motive in writing it was to meet his obligations to
+that society." The MS. is contained in a plainly-bound volume of 291
+folios (582 pages), and displays fine, round, legible, and beautiful
+handwriting, from several different hands. Folios 1-11 cover the
+period antecedent to 1750; the rest of the book, that from 1750 to
+1806--more than two-thirds of this part being dated after 1788. The
+writer evidently had access to valuable original documents, some
+of which, as these letters to La Misericordia, he cites directly;
+and his narrative is well and carefully written.
+
+[41] This was Fray Francisco de Zamudio, who had come to Manila in
+1636, and acted as provisor-general during the temporary exile of
+Archbishop Guerrero.
+
+[42] The great visitor-general of New Spain and the bishop of
+Puebla. He had a "special commission to take the residencias of
+Cerralvo and Cadereita, and to investigate the commercial relations
+with Peru and the Philippine Islands." He was of noble family, although
+illegitimate, but was legitimized by his father. He was a man of great
+abilities, which won him speedy recognition and high offices until he
+decided to enter the priesthood (1629); and, after serving in various
+capacities in Spain, he went to Mexico in 1640. He was energetic
+and impartial in the exercise of his duties, and before long this
+embroiled him with the indolent and easily-influenced viceroy. Finally
+he was offered the archbishopric, and at the same time ordered to
+assume charge of the government. He refused the archbishopric, but
+accepted the latter, and in 1642 assumed that office--which he held
+for five months, during which he ruled well and impartially. After
+retiring to his bishopric he had various troubles with the Jesuits,
+the new viceroy, the archbishop, and others, until he was ordered to
+retire to Spain in 1648, where he died bishop of Osma in 1659, much
+regretted by the people of his bishopric. See Bancroft's Hist. Mexico,
+iii, pp. 98-136.
+
+[43] Meaning that the failure to receive the usual supplies of money
+from Mexico had rendered the Manila merchants unable to buy the
+goods brought by the Chinese traders--the latter being thus unable
+to maintain their shops in Manila, and obliged to return to their
+own country.
+
+[44] Apparently some words have been omitted in Ventura del Arco's
+transcription; probably it should read, "upon us for our past sins"--or
+possibly, "for the past two years."
+
+[45] Spanish, regalos; referring to the articles (mainly those of
+luxury) imported from Mexico by citizens of the islands.
+
+[46] Shells or hollow balls, sometimes of clay, sometimes of heavy
+canvas, which were filled with combustible substances; when kindled,
+they were shot or hurled against the enemy, either to cause injury
+by their explosion, or to set his works on fire.
+
+[47] "A mountain called Socol, distant from Calamba a short league"
+(Diaz, Conquistas, p. 406).
+
+[48] This was an estate belonging to the Jesuits (Diaz, Conquistas,
+p. 408).
+
+[49] Pastells' transcript of this document (Colin's Labor evangelica,
+iii, p. 129) contains a few lines of additional matter, as follows:
+
+"Of the whole affair a full relation will, I think, be printed; so I
+leave it here, entreating our Lord to look with pity on these islands,
+which are so full of misery and poverty."
+
+[50] In passing through Mexico Senor Corcuera found so much cloth
+from this [Chinese] commerce stored in the warehouses that, in
+consideration for the interests of the merchants, he thought it best
+not to send a ship [to Acapulco] that year; as a result, in this year
+of 1638 the Chinese found less silver [in the Philippines] than their
+business required. It also contributed [to their discontent] that,
+since the royal treasury was unable to meet the great expenses of so
+many armed fleets and wars, the contributions [levied] on the Chinese
+were greater and more exacting--not only in actual money, but in other
+necessary supplies." (La Concepcion, Hist. Philipinas, v, p. 429).
+
+[51] Diaz states (Conquistas, p. 403) that besides the Chinese of
+the Parian, who were chiefly traders, there were at the time of this
+revolt more than 20,000 others scattered through the islands, who were
+occupied in tilling the soil, and that of these more than 6,000 were at
+work on the rich lands of Calamba. La Concepcion says (ut supra) that
+there were 33,000 Chinese living in the islands--too large a number
+for safety, after the warning furnished by the insurrection of 1604.
+
+[52] This was Luis Arias de Mora, an advocate belonging to the Manila
+Audiencia; according to Diaz (p. 404) he was even more avaricious
+and extortionate than his predecessors in the alcaldia of La Lacuna,
+and so oppressed those Chinese that in desperation they decided,
+to kill him--which they did with much and barbarous cruelty.
+
+[53] Diaz says (p. 404) that the Jesuit Villamayor, who accompanied
+the Spaniards, tried to persuade Aduna not to pursue the Chinese;
+but the captain refused to listen to him, and went on to his death.
+
+[54] The names in brackets are obtained from Diaz (p. 406); and some
+names occurring later in this document are similarly filled out,
+from the same source.
+
+[55] Diaz states (p. 406) that the Augustinian friars of Comintan
+(the ancient name of Batangas province) after this battle assembled a
+large troop of Indians, and with them scoured the surrounding country,
+killing the scattered Sangley fugitives.
+
+[56] A visita of the Augustinian mission station at Pasig.
+
+[57] According to Diaz's account (p. 408), the Sangleys of Santa Cruz
+attempted to seize Corcuera's person; but he escaped their hands,
+ordered the village to be set afire, and then attacked the Chinese,
+who numbered some 6,000 men. To check their advance, a detachment of
+Spaniards was sent to a certain spot with a troop of Moros, "aimed with
+campilans, who had come with the ambassador from Sanguyl." Olaso was
+soon recalled to Manila, leaving Santa Cruz defenseless--an imprudent
+step, which resulted in loss, "since that post was most necessary
+and convenient for guarding the river and the Parian."
+
+[58] Diaz (p. 409) makes this twenty-three, besides a Japanese priest
+who accompanied and encouraged his countrymen.
+
+[59] Diaz (p. 408) says that the friars at Tondo gathered the natives
+within the convent, "which, as it was very strong and spacious,
+was capable of being a sufficient fortification for 6,000 Indians."
+
+[60] "In Binondoc father Fray Francisco de Herrera was fortified, with
+the Sangley mestizos, and kept within the walls more than 160 Christian
+Sangleys; the governor commanded that these should be taken from that
+place, because they were continually making signs and writing notes
+[to their countrymen?], and they were conveyed to Manila, to the
+public prison, in order to make sure of them." (Diaz, p. 413.)
+
+[61] Diaz states (p. 412) that the governor issued this command,
+which was executed by one of the auditors of the Audiencia and the
+two alcaldes of the city; "they killed a great many Chinese, although
+there were many whom the religious and the citizens concealed."
+
+[62] "By the fire were destroyed more than 3,000 pesos of rents
+from the municipal property of the city, and more than 80,000 pesos
+of those belonging to private persons, for the houses in which the
+Sangleys lived; the riches lost in the property of the Sangleys were
+immense, because the looting of these could not be enjoyed on account
+of the fire, and because the [military] authorities would not allow
+the Spaniards to be diverted from their attention to the defense of
+the city." (Diaz, p. 412).
+
+[63] Diaz says that the church was burned; but this probably refers
+to its woodwork only.
+
+[64] "On December 5 orders were despatched to the provinces to put to
+death all the Sangleys in them--although the opinions of the jurists
+[regarding this step] differed." (Diaz, p. 412).
+
+[65] "They burned the magazines, where there were large quantities
+of the supplies necessary for the equipment of the galleons" (Diaz,
+p. 413).
+
+[66] See p. 156 and note 31, ante.
+
+[67] Diaz's figures are somewhat different, and more extensive
+(p. 413). "In Cavite as many as 1,100 were slain, and more than 600
+were seized. In Pampanga, where Santiago Gastelu was alcalde-mayor,
+few escaped; for the said alcalde exercised such care and so vigilant
+guard that as soon as the order arrived he caused it to be executed
+in all places at the same time, so unexpectedly that he gave them
+no opportunity to take the defensive; accordingly he beheaded them
+all, 1,800 in number, including infidels and those baptised. In the
+province of Bulacan, where there were more Sangleys, the slain did
+not exceed 500; for as they were farm laborers, and were scattered,
+they went away, deserting their houses, and joined the rebels, without
+Captain Juan Diaz, the alcalde-mayor of that province, being able to
+hinder them.... In the province of Tondo, as many as 300 were beheaded,
+because, as the insurrection was going on therein, only those were put
+to death who could not easily join the rebels. In the province of Bay
+were beheaded 200, of those who had been sheltered in the convents, and
+of those who were seized as accomplices of the uprising in Calamba. In
+the province of Taal they slew others.... In Pangasinan they beheaded
+500 Sangleys, through the energy of the alcalde-mayor, Captain Don
+Fernando Suarez Deza; and in that of Ilocos, which was governed by
+Sargento-mayor Pedro de Tursis, as many as 100 were slain. The same
+was done in the other provinces, by which the forces of the enemy
+were diminished, and the revolution checked."
+
+[68] "The leaders in these sacrilegious acts were the Christian
+Sangleys, who showed that they were renegades from the faith which
+they had pretended to profess." (Diaz, p. 412).
+
+[69] The bracketed words are conjectural, to replace some that are
+illegible or worn in the original MS.
+
+[70] "On December 7 Captain Santiago Gastelu arrived from Pampanga
+with a large reenforcement of men, and in his company was father Fray
+Juan de Sosa, a religious of our father St. Augustine, and minister of
+the village of Porac, who came with 800 Zambal archers whose leader
+he was in all the fights that occurred, ... urging on the Pampangos,
+who were a terror to the enemy; a thousand of them were arquebusiers,
+and the [above] 800 were archers." (Diaz, p. 415.)
+
+[71] Some of these are described by Diaz, whose account throughout
+is more full and detailed.
+
+[72] "On the way, our people heard how the Aetas from the hills had
+gone out to lie in ambush against the Sangleys, and had done them much
+damage; for in one place seven Aetas, naked and armed with some bamboo
+darts, had rushed in among more than 6,000 Sangleys--of whom they slew
+seventy, the Aeta band losing only one of their seven men." (Diaz,
+p. 418).
+
+[73] Diaz (p. 418) gives the main credit for this achievement to the
+Augustinian friar Juan de Sosa, who offered to dislodge the Chinese
+from their camp with his Indian archers--the Spanish troops seconding
+the attack of the Indians.
+
+[74] "Cogon (Saccharum koenigii): a rapidly growing plant reaching
+three meters (about 10 ft.) in height, and forming a tangled mass
+only penetrable by fire or knife. The areas are burned over during
+the dry season, the young shoots being cut for cattle fodder
+when 18 inches high. Where nipa does not grow cogon is used for
+thatching." (U. S. Gazetteer of Philippines, p. 71.) E. D. Merrill's
+Dictionary of Plant Names (Manila, 1903), p. 52, gives the botanical
+name as Imperata arundinacea.
+
+[75] This was Onofre Esbry (Esvri--incorrectly made Esbin by Diaz's
+editor); he was a native of Tortosa, and entered the Jesuit order
+at the age of fifteen. At the time of this insurrection, Esbry was
+but twenty eight years old. In 1647, while sailing to Macao, he was
+slain by Chinese pirates, near Sanchon Island. See Murillo Velarde's
+Hist. Philipinas, fol. 108 verso, and 154 verso.
+
+[76] The statement in this sentence is not very clearly expressed;
+but the apparent meaning is that the Chinese commander was not
+officially entitled to the designation of "mandarin," which had
+been conferred upon him by the insurgents without due right to
+make such appointment. S. Wells Williams says (Middle Kingdom, i,
+p. 326): "The word mandarin, derived from the Portuguese mandar,
+to command, and indiscriminately applied by foreigners to every
+grade from a premier to a tide-waiter; it is not needed in English
+as a general term for officers, and ought to be disused, moreover,
+from its tendency to convey the impression that they are in some
+way unlike their compeers elsewhere." See his account of the Chinese
+government, general, provincial, and local, and the classes of the
+Chinese people (pp. 322-352); also Winterbotham's description of the
+"mandarins of arms," or military officers, in his Chinese Empire, ii,
+pp. 8-10. Cf. note on civil mandarins, in VOL. XIX of this series,
+p. 44.
+
+[77] "For more than six months, it was impossible to drink the water
+in the rivers, they were so corrupted by the dead bodies; nor did
+the people eat fish in a circuit of many leguas, since all these were
+fattened on human flesh." (Diaz, p. 427).
+
+[78] "Every day those people knew what their losses were, through the
+regular plan that they followed. This was as follows: every ten men
+formed a mess; of these, two went out to procure food, six to fight,
+and two to guard and attend to their lodging. Every ten troops of these
+were under a captain; and a field officer commanded ten captains,
+with a thousand men each. Each soldier had a chapa (a bronze coin
+that is current among them), and at night each one handed this to
+his captain; then all these were counted, and the soldiers knew, by
+the number of coins that were lacking, how many men they lost each
+day." (Diaz, p. 423.)
+
+[79] In the MS. here and elsewhere, "S. Paloc"--evidently supposed
+by the transcriber to be the name of some saint.
+
+[80] In Diaz, "Tabuco, a visita of Quingua."
+
+[81] Diaz relates (p. 414) the plots concocted by the Sangleys for
+this insurrection, which was set for Christmas; they were to carry
+gifts of fowls on that day, as was their custom, to the Spaniards of
+their acquaintance; and were to perform a comedy near one of the gates,
+to divert the attention of the citizens from any suspicion of their
+designs. Then at an appointed hour they were to kill all the Spaniards,
+and take possession of the city. This was frustrated by the premature
+rising at Calamba; sixty of those concerned therein were slain by their
+own countrymen, because they had not waited till the appointed day.
+
+[82] In the MS., guerra; probably a transcriber's conjecture for a
+word poorly written, since the context requires fuerza--referring to
+the fort of Santiago at the mouth of Pasig River.
+
+[83] According to Diaz (p. 414), two negroes (slaves), who under
+torture confessed that they had aided the insurgents, were hanged.
+
+[84] The name of the smallest coin current in former times, the word
+meaning literally "one-fourth." Apparently, the bishop imposed a
+slight tax on all who attended mass, for the benefit of the poor
+prebendaries. It will be noticed that the word coro has several
+different meanings. In this sentence, it means the body of clergy
+in the church who chant the sacred offices; above, referring to the
+bishop's seat, it meant the place which the clergy occupied during
+the church services.
+
+[85] The title-page of the Bocabulario states that additions were made
+to it by Claver before sending the work to the press. This friar came
+to the Philippines in 1624, and was assigned to the Visayan missions,
+where he labored until 1639, when he was sent as procurator to Madrid
+and Rome; he died at Madrid, in 1646. Claver wrote several books,
+the most important being a history of the Augustinian province of
+Philipinas, which has been lost. See Perez's Catalogo, p. 105, and
+T. H. Pardo de Tavera's Biblioteca Filipina, pp. 262, 263.
+
+[86] For bibliographical account of Mentrida's works, see Pardo de
+Tavera's Biblioteca Filipina (Washington, 1903), pp. 262, 263. They
+are as follows: Bocabulario de la lengva Bisaia Hiligvoyna y Haraia
+(Manila, 1637), and another edition (Manila, 1841); Arte de la lengua
+Bisaya Hiliguayna (Manila, 1818), possibly this was a second edition;
+and Ritual para administrar los Santos Sacramentos (Manila, 1630),
+reprinted in 1669. Pardo de Tavera says: "He died in 1637, leaving
+various works which have since been lost, not having been printed;
+Father Agustin Maria says that he had an opportunity to see these in
+Panay, about 1770 to 1780."
+
+[87] Colin says (Labor evangelica, Pastells' ed., i, p. 31): "For
+greater convenience in governing it, this island of Panay is divided
+into two jurisdictions: the territory belonging to that of Panay is
+all of the northern coast, from the point of Potol to Bulacabi; the
+rest of the island belongs to the jurisdiction of Oton, the principal
+[Spanish] post in which, at this time, is at Iloilo--a point which
+projects into the sea on the southern coast, between the two rivers of
+Tigbauan and Jaro; and makes, with the island of Imaras, a strait half
+a legua wide and an open harbor." This would make the jurisdiction of
+Fanay correspond to the present province of Capiz; and that of Oton
+to the provinces of Antique and Iloilo. The boundaries between these
+present divisions are the rugged mountain chains which fill a great
+part of the interior of the island, their peaks ranging in height
+from 3,500 to 7,200 feet; they render traffic between the provinces
+almost impossible, except as it is carried on by way of the sea. The
+island of Guimaras is 26 1/2 miles long by 12 miles wide, and has
+important fishing and agricultural industries.
+
+[88] One of the most notable names in Philippine missionary annals
+is that of Agustin de San Pedro (his family name Rodriguez), born in
+Portugal in 1599. He was a student in the university of Salamanca,
+but, desiring to enter the religious life, he assumed the habit of
+a Recollect Augustinian at Valladolid, and made his profession at
+the age of twenty. Three years later, he set out for the Philippine
+mission, and soon after reaching Manila was sent to Mindanao. There
+he labored with the Indians in the districts of Butuan, Habongan,
+Linao, Cagayan, Tandag, and Romblon; and accompanied the expedition
+of Atienza Ibanez (1639) to Lake Malanao. Retana and Pastells
+(in their edition of Combes's Hist. Mindanao, col. 725) state that
+this missionary converted some 10,000 natives to Catholicism. More
+than that, he aided in the defense of his converts, several times
+fighting at their head against their heathen and piratical enemies;
+and, having been as a student proficient in mathematics and military
+science, he constructed forts in the Christian villages which
+enabled them to repel their invaders, and taught the natives the
+art of fortification. Fray Agustin died in Romblon, in 1653. See
+accounts of his life and exploits in Prov. S. Nicolas de Tolentino,
+pp. 290-292; and La Concepcion's Hist. Philipinas, v, pp. 362-391
+(which will appear in a later volume of this series).
+
+[89] This expedition, departing from Tandag (on the north-eastern coast
+of Surigao, the easternmost province of Mindanao), sailed northwest
+to the point near the town of Surigao, then, passing through the
+strait of that name, southwest into Iligan Bay on the north shore
+of the island. Ascending the Iligan River (which is the outlet of
+Lake Lanao), they reached the lake, after a journey of sixteen and
+one-half miles. Now, as then, the valley of the river and the vicinity
+of the lake are thickly settled, and the Moro inhabitants carry on
+extensive industries in agriculture and commerce. On the Jesuit Atlas
+de Filipinas (Washington, 1900), map no. 27, appears a village named
+P. Capitan--evidently in memory of the soldier-missionary Fray Agustin;
+but no such name is given in the U. S. Gazetteer of the islands.
+
+[90] Marginal note: "This relation has been translated from a Spanish
+manuscript existing in the library of Don Carlo del Pezzo."
+
+This relation is unsigned, and undated, but Rev. Pablo Pastells, S.J.,
+said during the course of a conversation with one of the Editors,
+in 1903, that the author was undoubtedly Father Diego de Bobadilla;
+and in his edition of Colin's Labor evangelica (Barcelona, 1904),
+he says (iii, p. 798, note): "This father [i.e., Father Bobadilla]
+was the author in 1640 of the famous relation which was translated
+by Melquisedec Thevenot."
+
+[91] See our VOLS. I and II for the history of these early
+expeditions. It will be noticed that the author of the present relation
+is inaccurate in regard to the date of the voyage of Villalobos,
+and that he omits mention of some of the early voyages.
+
+[92] That is "Birth follows the womb."
+
+[93] See VOL. XXII, p. 300, note 61.
+
+[94] For this expedition to Mindanao by Hurtado de Corcuera, see
+previous documents. This reference proves the present relation to
+have been written in 1640, as the expedition above mentioned occurred
+in 1637.
+
+[95] Visayan name (also colocolo, elsewhere) of the fishing gannet
+(Sula piscatrix). Delgado says (Historia, p. 820) that he had a tame
+one in his house, which would bring home fish that it had caught,
+and carry them to the kitchen.
+
+[96] French, Estang du Roy ("the King's Pool"); evidently referring
+to the hot springs near Laguna de Bay (see VOL. XIV, p. 211), and
+the word Roy is probably a misprint for Bay.
+
+[97] It is Chirino who is here (although inexactly) cited; see
+VOL. XII, p. 236.
+
+[98] See Chirino's account, in VOL. XII, p. 241; he says that the
+art of writing was imparted to the Visayans by the Tagals.
+
+[99] Marginal note: "Prudish" (melindrosa).
+
+[100] That is, "star-thistles"--the common name of a genus (Tribulus)
+of plants, which bears prickly fruits, very injurious to the feet of
+animals or men. The military instrument called "caltrop" resembles
+that fruit, from which it may have been evolved; and the appellation
+tribolo is one of the etymological elements in "caltrop."
+
+[101] See the Cleveland reissue of the Jesuit Relations, lxv, p. 131,
+for a description of head-compression by the North American Indians.
+
+[102] Mt. Bulusan, near the center of the province of Sorsogon, Luzon;
+at present "almost extinct, but at times emits an abundance of watery
+vapor and sulphurous fumes" (Report of U. S. Philippine Commission,
+1900, iii, p. 149).
+
+[103] Also called balimbin; the fruit of Averrhoa carambola; used for
+food and sweetmeats, and also has medicinal qualities. See Blanco's
+description, Flora, p. 274; and Delgado's Historia, pp. 505, 506. For
+note on santor, see VOL. XVI, p. 87; on banana (Musa), VOL. V, p. 169.
+
+[104] The corot (Dioscorea triphylla) is very common, with leaves
+one palmo long, and very small flowers. Its sap is yellow and very
+poisonous, and has cleansing power which is utilized to whiten
+abaca. The root is very large and is eaten cooked by the Indians,
+after having soaked it in the water for three or four days.
+
+The ubi is the Dioscorea alata, and the plant grows rather high and is
+widely disseminated. The root is violet in color, and often attains a
+great size; it is eaten cooked. The best variety is that known as the
+Cebu ubi or ube, which comes from Bohol, and which makes a delicious
+jelly. The ubi and analogous roots must be carefully prepared, or else
+they prove poisonous. See Blanco's Flora, and U. S. Gazetteer of the
+Philippine Islands. Delgado (p. 763) enumerates eight varieties of
+this root.
+
+The apari is perhaps the apalia or paria (Montordica balsamina),
+a climbing plant, which bears a fruit which is rather bitter to the
+taste, and eaten in salads. The juice of its leaves is used instead
+of soap. The ripe fruit soaked in olive, cocoa, or beneseed oil makes
+an excellent balsam that is used for medicinal purposes.
+
+[105] French, patanes, apparently a misprint for patatas. The camote
+or sweet potato (Convolvulus batatas, Linn.; now named Batatas edulis)
+is extensively cultivated in the islands. Blanco (Flora, p. 69) cites
+Mozo as saying that this plant was carried to the islands from Nueva
+Espana; but Blanco regards it as indigenous in the Philippines. Delgado
+(pp. 766-768) enumerates twenty-nine varieties of camote.
+
+[106] The Batelan is perhaps the balete; see VOL. XII, p. 214, note
+56. For note on dabdab, see ibid., p. 215, note 57.
+
+[107] Apparently a reference to the variety of orange known at the
+present day as navel oranges.
+
+[108] For a treatise on the snakes and poisonous animals of the
+Philippines, see Delgado's Historia, pp. 889-907. He describes the
+omodro as the odto (Hemibungarus collaris)--from the word meaning
+"half-day" or "noon," and given to it because the bite proves fatal
+if given at noon, but at no other time. It is of various colors and
+very furious at the hour of noon. The saua (Python reticulatus) is
+the largest snake of the islands and is often domesticated, and is
+not poisonous to man.
+
+[109] The dugong (a word corrupted from the Malay name duyong);
+not a fish, but a marine mammal (Helicore australis). Crawfurd says
+(Dict. Indian Islands, p. 125) that it is found in the shallow seas
+of the Malayan archipelago, but is not often captured; and that its
+flesh is greatly superior to that of the green turtle. This creature
+is one of those from which originated the fable of the mermaids.
+
+[110] Thevenot has translated the Spanish term for Franciscans
+(padres de San Francisco or padres franciscanos) into the popular
+French term cordeliers, so called because of their girdle. Similarly
+he has translated the term for Dominicans (padres de San Domingo or
+padres dominicanos) as Jacobins, also the popular French appellation,
+so called from the name of the church of St. Jacques, which was
+given them in Paris. See Addis and Arnold's Cath. Dict., article
+"Franciscans," p. 356; and Chevin's Dict. Latin-Francais, p. 353.
+
+Either Thevenot the translator, or the author, omits mention of
+the convent of the Society of Jesus, only the four above mentioned
+being given.
+
+[111] The persimmon; see VOL. XVI, p. 180.
+
+[112] A misprint for sibucao (VOL. III, p. 196; XV, p. 256).
+
+[113] There is evidently a play of words in this passage. The French
+reads Mais il se trouua bie loing de ses esperances, & auec vn pied de
+nez. Pied de nez (literally "a foot of nose") is an exact equivalent of
+the Spanish phrase palmo de narices, and the French expression demeurer
+avec un pied de nez is equivalent to the Spanish idiom quedar con un
+palmo de narices, which signifies "the frustration of one's hopes,"
+or "to be left out in the cold."
+
+[114] Apparently a corruption of Zarpana, the name given by its
+inhabitants to the island of Rota, one of the Mariannes or Ladrones
+Islands.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898,
+Volume 29 of 55, by Various
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PHILIPPINE IS., 1493-1898, VOL 29 ***
+
+***** This file should be named 38748.txt or 38748.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/8/7/4/38748/
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net/ for Project
+Gutenberg.
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.